Operating Instructions - Firmware Center

Operating Instructions
Facsimile Reference
1
Transmission
2
Other Transmission Features
3
Reception
4
Changing/Confirming Communication Information
5
Storing a Document
6
Fax via Computer
7
Facsimile Features
8
Appendix
Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to read the Safety
Information in "Manuals and Safety Information for This Machine" before using the machine.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for This Machine...............................................................................................................................10
Notice................................................................................................................................................................13
Important......................................................................................................................................................13
How to Read This Manual...............................................................................................................................14
Symbols........................................................................................................................................................14
Machine Types.............................................................................................................................................14
Names of Major Functions..........................................................................................................................15
Notes............................................................................................................................................................15
List of Options...............................................................................................................................................15
Laws and Regulations......................................................................................................................................16
Legal Prohibition..........................................................................................................................................16
Model-Specific Information.............................................................................................................................17
Reading the Display.........................................................................................................................................18
Reading the Display Panel and Using Keys...............................................................................................18
Simplified Display........................................................................................................................................21
About Data Security for Copying...................................................................................................................23
1. Transmission
Transmission Modes.........................................................................................................................................25
Selecting Type of Transmission...................................................................................................................26
Memory Transmission..................................................................................................................................28
Immediate Transmission...............................................................................................................................34
Displaying Confirmation of Transmission...................................................................................................36
IP-Fax Functions................................................................................................................................................38
Terminology..................................................................................................................................................40
Notes on Using IP-Fax.................................................................................................................................40
Functions Not Available for IP-Fax Transmission......................................................................................41
E-Mail Functions and Folder Transmission.....................................................................................................42
Internet Fax Transmission.................................................................................................................................43
Notes on Using Internet Fax........................................................................................................................44
Functions Not Available by Internet Fax Transmission.............................................................................45
Functions Not Available by Internet Fax Reception..................................................................................46
T.37 Full Mode.............................................................................................................................................46
E-mail Encryption.........................................................................................................................................47
1
E-mail Transmission..........................................................................................................................................49
Functions Not Available for E-mail Transmission......................................................................................50
E-mail Encryption.........................................................................................................................................50
Folder Transmission..........................................................................................................................................53
Functions Not Available for Folder Transmission......................................................................................53
Placing Originals..............................................................................................................................................55
Setting the Original Orientation.................................................................................................................57
Scanning Two-Sided Originals...................................................................................................................58
Acceptable Original Sizes..........................................................................................................................61
Paper Size and Scanned Area...................................................................................................................61
Checking the Content of a Scanned Original (Preview Before Transmission)........................................63
Detecting Blank Sheet..................................................................................................................................65
Scan Settings....................................................................................................................................................66
Original Type...............................................................................................................................................66
Resolution.....................................................................................................................................................68
Scan Size......................................................................................................................................................70
Density (Contrast).........................................................................................................................................73
Mixing Scan Settings for a Multiple Page Original..................................................................................75
Selecting the File Format.............................................................................................................................76
Specifying a Destination..................................................................................................................................78
Sending over a Fax Line (Fax Destinations)...............................................................................................78
Sending by IP-Fax (IP-Fax Destinations)....................................................................................................81
Sending by Internet Fax (Internet Fax Destinations)..................................................................................86
Sending an E-mail (E-mail Destinations)....................................................................................................92
Sending to Folder Destinations (Folder Destinations)...............................................................................98
Using the Address Book to Specify Destinations....................................................................................101
Specifying Group Destinations.................................................................................................................102
International TX Mode..............................................................................................................................104
Selecting Destinations from Recent Destinations.....................................................................................104
Preventing Transmission to the Wrong Destination.................................................................................105
Registering Destinations in the Address Book..............................................................................................109
Registering a Fax Destination...................................................................................................................109
Changing a Fax Destination.....................................................................................................................112
2
Deleting a Fax Destination........................................................................................................................114
Registering Destinations to the Address Book from [Prg. Dest.].............................................................115
Registering Entered Destinations to the Address Book...........................................................................116
Searching for a Destination in the Address Book........................................................................................118
Search by Destination Name...................................................................................................................118
Search by Fax Number/IP-Fax Destination............................................................................................121
Search by Internet Fax Destination..........................................................................................................123
Search by E-mail Destination...................................................................................................................125
Search by Folder Destination...................................................................................................................127
Search Using Advanced Search..............................................................................................................130
Search by Registration Number...............................................................................................................133
On Hook Dial.................................................................................................................................................136
Manual Dial...................................................................................................................................................138
Sender Settings..............................................................................................................................................140
Advanced Features........................................................................................................................................143
Setting SUB Codes for Transmission........................................................................................................143
Setting SEP Codes for Reception..............................................................................................................146
SEP Code RX Reserve Report...................................................................................................................149
SEP Code RX Result Report.......................................................................................................................150
Canceling a Transmission.............................................................................................................................151
Before the Original Is Scanned................................................................................................................151
While the Original Is Being Scanned......................................................................................................151
While the Original Is Being Transmitted..................................................................................................152
Before the Transmission Is Started............................................................................................................154
Confirming a Transmission............................................................................................................................158
Checking the Storage Result (Memory Storage Report)............................................................................160
Changing the Default Functions of the Fax's Initial Display........................................................................161
2. Other Transmission Features
Sending at a Specific Time (Send Later)
(mainly Europe and Asia)....................................163
Sending at a Specific Time (Send Later)
(mainly North America)........................................166
Requesting a Reception Notice....................................................................................................................168
Setting an Internet Fax/E-mail Destination as a BCC.................................................................................170
Confirming Transmission Results by E-mail..................................................................................................172
3
Entering the Subject.......................................................................................................................................174
Specifying Auto-Generated Subjects for E-mail.....................................................................................176
Entering the Text.............................................................................................................................................177
Transmission Options.....................................................................................................................................179
Standard Message Stamp........................................................................................................................179
Label Insertion............................................................................................................................................180
Closed Network........................................................................................................................................182
SUB Code Transmission............................................................................................................................183
SEP Code Reception.................................................................................................................................184
Fax Header Print
(mainly Europe and Asia)......................................................................186
Fax Header Print
(mainly North America)..........................................................................187
3. Reception
Types of Reception........................................................................................................................................191
Immediate Reception.................................................................................................................................191
Memory Reception....................................................................................................................................192
Substitute Reception..................................................................................................................................192
Reception Modes...........................................................................................................................................196
Manual Reception.....................................................................................................................................196
Auto Reception..........................................................................................................................................196
Receiving E-mail.............................................................................................................................................197
Receiving Internet Fax Documents...........................................................................................................198
Mail to Print................................................................................................................................................201
Reception Functions.......................................................................................................................................203
Routing Received Documents...................................................................................................................203
Transferring Received Documents............................................................................................................204
Forwarding Received Documents............................................................................................................205
SMTP Reception of E-mail........................................................................................................................207
JBIG Reception..........................................................................................................................................210
Auto Fax Reception Power-Up.................................................................................................................210
Printing Options..............................................................................................................................................211
Print Completion Beep..............................................................................................................................211
Checkered Mark.......................................................................................................................................211
Centre Mark...............................................................................................................................................211
4
Reception Time..........................................................................................................................................212
Two-Sided Printing....................................................................................................................................212
Multi-Copy Reception...............................................................................................................................214
Image Rotation..........................................................................................................................................215
Combine Two Originals............................................................................................................................215
Page Separation and Length Reduction..................................................................................................216
TSI Print (Transmitting Subscriber Identification Print).............................................................................217
If There Is No Paper of the Correct Size..................................................................................................217
Where Incoming Documents Are Delivered - Output Tray........................................................................221
Specifying Tray for Lines...........................................................................................................................221
Tray Shift....................................................................................................................................................221
4. Changing/Confirming Communication Information
Changing the Settings of Files in Memory...................................................................................................223
Deleting a Destination from a Broadcast.................................................................................................223
Adding a Destination................................................................................................................................225
Changing the Transmission Time
(mainly Europe and Asia)............................................228
Changing the Transmission Time
(mainly North America)................................................230
Changing the SMTP Server Setting..........................................................................................................232
Printing a File from Memory..........................................................................................................................236
Printing a List of Files in Memory (Print TX File List)......................................................................................238
Resending a File.............................................................................................................................................240
Checking the Transmission Result (Transmission File Status)......................................................................242
Confirming on Display..............................................................................................................................242
Confirming by Report................................................................................................................................243
Confirming by E-mail.................................................................................................................................244
Confirming by Report and E-mail.............................................................................................................245
Communication Result Report (Memory Transmission)..........................................................................245
Immediate TX Result Report (Immediate Transmission)...........................................................................246
Communication Failure Report.................................................................................................................246
Checking the Reception Result (Reception File Status)...............................................................................248
Confirming on Display..............................................................................................................................248
Confirming by Report................................................................................................................................249
Print Journal....................................................................................................................................................250
5
Printing the Journal....................................................................................................................................250
Journal
(mainly Europe and Asia)......................................................................................254
Journal
(mainly North America)..........................................................................................257
Transmitting Journal by E-mail..................................................................................................................260
Confirming/Printing/Deleting Received and Stored Documents..............................................................262
Confirming Received and Stored Documents.........................................................................................263
Printing Received and Stored Documents................................................................................................264
Deleting Received and Stored Documents..............................................................................................265
Printing a File Received with Memory Lock.................................................................................................267
Personal Boxes...............................................................................................................................................270
Personal Boxes..........................................................................................................................................270
Printing Personal Box Documents.............................................................................................................271
Confidential File Report............................................................................................................................273
Information Boxes..........................................................................................................................................274
Information Boxes......................................................................................................................................274
Storing Documents in Information Boxes.................................................................................................275
Printing Information Box Documents........................................................................................................277
Deleting Information Box Documents......................................................................................................278
5. Storing a Document
Sending a Stored File....................................................................................................................................281
Storing a Document...................................................................................................................................282
Sending Stored Documents......................................................................................................................286
Printing Stored Documents........................................................................................................................291
Changing Stored Document Information.................................................................................................293
Deleting a Stored Document....................................................................................................................297
6. Fax via Computer
Sending Fax Documents from Computers....................................................................................................299
Before Use..................................................................................................................................................300
Using the Software....................................................................................................................................300
Installing Individual Applications.............................................................................................................302
Setting LAN-Fax Driver Properties...........................................................................................................305
Basic Transmission.....................................................................................................................................307
Specifying Options....................................................................................................................................311
6
Checking Transmission Using LAN-Fax Driver........................................................................................314
Confirming Transmission Results by E-mail..............................................................................................314
LAN-Fax Result Report..............................................................................................................................315
Printing and Saving...................................................................................................................................315
Editing Address Book................................................................................................................................316
Editing Fax Cover Sheets..........................................................................................................................320
Managing Facsimile Functions Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin................................................322
Using the Machine's Address Book as the LAN-Fax Destination List....................................................322
LAN-Fax Operation Messages................................................................................................................324
Viewing Fax Information Using a Web Browser.........................................................................................326
Viewing, Printing, and Deleting Received Fax Documents Using Web Image Monitor.....................326
Programming Destination Information from Web Browser....................................................................328
Delivering Files Received by Fax..................................................................................................................331
7. Facsimile Features
Accessing User Tools.....................................................................................................................................333
Changing Default Settings........................................................................................................................333
Quitting User Tools....................................................................................................................................334
General Settings............................................................................................................................................335
Scan Settings..................................................................................................................................................338
Send Settings..................................................................................................................................................339
Reception Settings..........................................................................................................................................342
Initial Settings.................................................................................................................................................347
Memory File Transfer.....................................................................................................................................353
Selecting a Line Port or Protocol...............................................................................................................354
Setting a SUB Code..................................................................................................................................354
Setting a Password....................................................................................................................................354
Forwarding.....................................................................................................................................................355
Programming an End Receiver.................................................................................................................356
Quitting the Forwarding Function.............................................................................................................358
Forwarding Mark......................................................................................................................................358
Reception File Setting....................................................................................................................................360
Specifying Fax Auto Deletion or Reception Stop in the Event of Storage Failure................................361
Reception Report e-mail............................................................................................................................362
7
Stored Reception File User Setting...............................................................................................................363
SMTP Reception File Delivery Settings.........................................................................................................365
Program / Change / Delete Scan Size......................................................................................................368
Programming/Changing a Scan Size.....................................................................................................368
Deleting a Scan Size.................................................................................................................................369
Registering Fax Information..........................................................................................................................371
Registering Fax Information......................................................................................................................372
Changing Fax Information........................................................................................................................373
Deleting Fax Information...........................................................................................................................374
Parameter Settings.........................................................................................................................................375
User Parameter List....................................................................................................................................375
Changing the User Parameters................................................................................................................384
Special Senders to Treat Differently.............................................................................................................385
Authorized Reception................................................................................................................................386
Reception File Print Quantity.....................................................................................................................386
Forwarding.................................................................................................................................................387
Print 2 Sided...............................................................................................................................................387
Memory Lock.............................................................................................................................................387
Paper Tray..................................................................................................................................................388
Programming/Changing Special Senders..............................................................................................388
Authorized Reception per Sender............................................................................................................390
Reception File Print Qty per Sender.........................................................................................................390
Forwarding per Sender.............................................................................................................................391
Print 2 Sided per Sender...........................................................................................................................393
Memory Lock per Sender.........................................................................................................................394
Paper Tray per Sender..............................................................................................................................394
Programming Initial Set Up of a Special Sender....................................................................................394
Deleting a Special Sender........................................................................................................................397
Box Settings....................................................................................................................................................398
Programming/Changing Personal Boxes...............................................................................................398
Deleting Personal Boxes...........................................................................................................................402
Programming/Changing Information Boxes..........................................................................................403
Deleting Information Boxes......................................................................................................................405
8
Programming/Changing Transfer Boxes................................................................................................406
Deleting Transfer Boxes............................................................................................................................410
Printing the Box List....................................................................................................................................411
8. Appendix
Checking the Memory Status........................................................................................................................413
Registering Frequently Used Settings...........................................................................................................414
Registering and Changing Keystroke Programs.....................................................................................414
Deleting a Program...................................................................................................................................417
Using a Program........................................................................................................................................418
Optional Equipment.......................................................................................................................................420
Expansion Memory...................................................................................................................................420
Specifications.................................................................................................................................................421
Specifications Required for the Internet Fax Destination Machines......................................................425
Maximum Values...........................................................................................................................................427
Trademarks.....................................................................................................................................................430
INDEX...........................................................................................................................................................433
9
Manuals for This Machine
Read this manual carefully before you use this machine.
Refer to the manuals that are relevant to what you want to do with the machine.
• Media differ according to manual.
• The printed and electronic versions of a manual have the same contents.
• Adobe® Acrobat® Reader®/Adobe Reader must be installed in order to view the manuals as PDF
files.
• A Web browser must be installed in order to view the html manuals.
Manuals and Safety Information for This Machine
(mainly Europe and Asia)
Contains introductions of the manuals and information about safe usage of this machine.
Before using the machine, be sure to read the section of this manual entitled Safety Information to
avoid injury and prevent damage to the machine.
Manuals and Safety Information for This Machine
(mainly North America)
Contains introductions of the manuals and information about safe usage of this machine.
Before using the machine, be sure to read the section of this manual entitled Safety Information to
avoid injury and prevent damage to the machine.
This manual is provided in English only.
Quick Installation Guide
Contains procedures for unpacking and installing the machine.
Initial Guide for Scanner and Fax
Explains how to set up the Scanner and Facsimile functions and use their basic features. Details
about these functions that are not included in this manual are provided in Scanner Reference,
Facsimile Reference, and Network and System Settings Reference.
About This Machine
This manual introduces the machine's various functions. It also explains preparation procedures for
using the machine, the control panel, how to install options, how to enter text, how to install the
CD-ROMs provided, and how to replace paper, print cartridge, staples, and other consumables.
Troubleshooting
Provides a guide for resolving common usage-related problems.
Copy and Document Server Reference
Explains Copier and Document Server functions and operations. Also refer to this manual for
explanations on how to place originals.
10
Facsimile Reference
Explains Facsimile functions and operations.
Printer Reference
Explains Printer functions and operations.
Scanner Reference
Explains Scanner functions and operations.
Network and System Settings Reference
Explains how to connect the machine to a network and how to configure and operate the machine
in a network environment. It also explains how to change System Settings and how to register
information in the Address Book.
Security Reference
This manual is for administrators of the machine. It explains security functions that you can use to
prevent unauthorized use of the machine, data tampering, or information leakage. For enhanced
security, we recommend that you first make the following settings:
• Install the Device Certificate.
• Enable SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) Encryption.
• Change the user name and password of the administrator using Web Image Monitor.
For details, see “Setting up the Machine”, Security Reference.
Be sure to read this manual when setting the enhanced security functions, or user and administrator
authentication.
VM Card Extended Feature Settings Device Reference
Explains how to set up the extended features settings with the machine.
VM Card Extended Feature Settings Web Reference
Explains how to set up the extended features settings using Web Image Monitor.
UNIX Supplement
Explains how to set up and use a network printer using UNIX.
To obtain the “UNIX Supplement”, visit our Web site or consult an authorized dealer.
This manual includes explanations of functions and settings that might not be available on this
machine.
This manual is provided in English only.
Other manuals
• Quick Reference Copy Guide
• Quick Reference Printer Guide
• Quick Reference Fax Guide
• Quick Reference Scanner Guide
11
• App2Me Start Guide
• The following software products are referred to using general names:
Product name
DeskTopBinder Lite and DeskTopBinder Professional *1
DeskTopBinder
ScanRouter EX Professional *1 and ScanRouter EX Enterprise
*1
the ScanRouter delivery
software
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
*1 Optional
12
General name
Notice
Important
In no event will the company be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages
as a result of handling or operating the machine.
For good output quality, the manufacturer recommends that you use genuine toner from the
manufacturer.
The manufacturer shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of
parts other than genuine parts from the manufacturer with your office products.
13
How to Read This Manual
Symbols
This manual uses the following symbols:
Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations of likely causes of paper
misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure to read these explanations.
Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine’s functions, and instructions on resolving user
errors.
This symbol is located at the end of sections. It indicates where you can find further relevant information.
[]
Indicates the names of keys on the machine's display or control panels.
(mainly Europe and Asia)
(mainly North America)
Differences in the functions of Region A and Region B models are indicated by two symbols. Read the
information indicated by the symbol that corresponds to the region of the model you are using. For
details about which symbol corresponds to the model you are using, see “Model-Specific Information”.
Machine Types
This machine comes in three models with different copy and print speeds, and different units installed.
Machine type
Type 1
Copy/print speed
45 sheets/minute (A4 )
47 sheets/minute (81/2 × 11
Type 2
14
Cannot be installed
Cannot be installed
Cannot be installed
Standard
Standard
Cannot be installed
)
50 sheets/minute (A4 )
52 sheets/minute (81/2 × 11
Internal tray 2
)
50 sheets/minute (A4 )
52 sheets/minute (81/2 × 11
Type 3
Finisher
)
Names of Major Functions
This section tells you the names of this machine's major functions.
• Internet Fax (by specifying an e-mail address)
• Internet Fax (by specifying an IP address)
Internet Fax
IP-Fax
Notes
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Depending on which country you are in, certain units may be optional. For details, please contact your
local dealer.
List of Options
This section provides a list of options for this machine, and how they are referred to as in this manual.
Option list
Referred to as
Memory Unit Type B 32MB
Expansion memory
Copy Data Security Unit Type F
Copy data security unit
15
Laws and Regulations
Legal Prohibition
Do not copy or print any item for which reproduction is prohibited by law.
Copying or printing the following items is generally prohibited by local law:
bank notes, revenue stamps, bonds, stock certificates, bank drafts, checks, passports, driver's licenses.
The preceding list is meant as a guide only and is not inclusive. We assume no responsibility for its
completeness or accuracy. If you have any questions concerning the legality of copying or printing
certain items, consult with your legal advisor.
16
Model-Specific Information
This section explains how you can identify the region your machine belongs to.
There is a label on the rear of the machine, located in the position shown below. The label contains
details that identify the region your machine belongs to. Read the label.
CFE052
The following information is region-specific. Read the information under the symbol that corresponds to
the region of your machine.
(mainly Europe and Asia)
If the label contains the following, your machine is a region A model:
• CODE XXXX -67, -69
• 220-240V
(mainly North America)
If the label contains the following, your machine is a region B model:
• CODE XXXX -57
• 120-127V
• Dimensions in this manual are given in two units of measure: metric and inch. If your machine is a
Region A model, refer to the metric units. If your machine is a Region B model, refer to the inch
units.
17
Reading the Display
This section explains how to use control panel and screen-displayed keys.
The display guides you through operations, shows messages, machine status, and destinations
registered in the destination lists.
If you press the [Facsimile] key or [Clear Modes] key during operation, the standby display appears.
• This machine automatically returns to standby mode if you do not use the machine for a certain
period of time. You can select the period using the Facsimile Auto Reset Timer in System Settings.
• The Facsimile Features menu includes a user parameter setting (switch 17, bit 3) that enables you
to configure the machine to return to standby mode whenever it finishes scanning an original, see
“Parameter Settings”.
• To manually return to the standby display, do one of the following:
• If you have placed the original in the Auto Document Feeder (ADF) and have not pressed the
[Start] key, remove the original.
• If you have not placed an original, press the [Clear Modes] key.
• If you are in User Tools mode, press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
Reading the Display Panel and Using Keys
This section explains key functions and messages that appear on the control panel.
18
Initial Display
1
2
3
4
5
18
6
7
8
9
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
19
10
20
21
CFH002
1. Press a tab to switch the transmission type between “Fax”, “Internet Fax”, “E-mail”, and “Folder”.
• When
(Fax) is selected, you can specify fax numbers or IP-Fax destinations.
• When
(Internet Fax) is selected, you can specify Internet Fax destinations.
• When
(E-mail) is selected, you can specify e-mail destinations.
• When
(Folder) is selected, you can specify folder destinations.
2. Displays the entered number of a destination.
3. Allows you to store documents in the Document Server.
For details about storing documents, see “Sending a Stored File”.
4. Press to display various information about communication.
For details about confirming information, see “Changing/Confirming Communication Information”.
5. Allows you to confirm the transmission settings.
6. Displays the percentage of free memory space.
7. Allows you to check the scanned original before sending it.
8. Allows you to search for a destination by destination name, fax number, e-mail address or
registration number.
For details about a destination search, see “Searching for a Destination in the Address Book”.
9. Switches transmission mode to Immediate Transmission.
When [Immed. TX] is not highlighted, the machine is in the Memory Transmission mode.
19
10. Allows you to set various features for transmission.
For details about setting the features, see “Other Transmission Features”.
11. Allows you to set a sender.
12. Allows you to check the number of “Transmission Standby File(s)”, “Memory Lock File(s)”, and “RX
Print Standby File(s)”.
For details about checking the status in [System Status], see “Checking the Memory Status”.
13. Displays Quick Operation keys set for frequently used functions. [TX File Status] and [RX File Status]
are preset.
For details about Quick Operation Key, see “General Settings”.
14. Displays the date, time, and machine status. Displays the name, facsimile number of the
destination, and the size of the original when transmitting.
When user authentication is set, a login user name appears.
15. Allows you to send or print the documents stored in the Document Server.
16. Allows you to select the file type.
17. Allows you to set scan settings and original feed types.
18. Displays messages and the machine status.
19. Title word keys appear. Allows you to switch from one page (display) to another on the destination
list.
20. Switches the type of title word keys.
For details, see “Switching the type of title in the Address Book”.
21. Appears on Destination keys programmed as a group destination.
• The display will differ depending on installed optional units.
• When the following settings are set to “On” in the Facsimile Features menu, transmission type tabs
are displayed. For details about these settings, see “Initial Settings”.
•
(Internet Fax): When “Internet Fax Setting” is set to “On”.
•
(E-mail): When “E-mail Setting” is set to “On”.
•
(Folder): When “Folder Setting” is set to “On”.
• Information about documents sent using the facsimile function cannot be checked in [Job List]. Use
[Change TX / Info].
• page 102 "Switching the type of title in the Address Book"
• page 118 "Searching for a Destination in the Address Book"
• page 281 "Sending a Stored File"
• page 335 "General Settings"
20
• page 347 "Initial Settings"
• page 413 "Checking the Memory Status"
Simplified Display
This section explains how to switch to the simplified display.
When you press the [Simplified Display] key, the screen changes from the initial display to the simplified
display.
Letters and keys are displayed at a larger size, making operations easier.
CCS002
Example of a simplified display
1
CFH003
1. Key Colour
Press to increase screen contrast by changing the color of the keys.
This is available only for the simplified display.
21
• To return to the initial display, press the [Simplified Display] key again.
• Certain keys do not appear on the simplified display.
22
About Data Security for Copying
When the optional copy data security unit is installed, if you scan a document that was printed using the
Data Security for Copying function, the scanned image that is sent or stored is obscured by vertical
stripes.
For details, ask the administrator.
• When a document that was printed using the Data Security for Copying function is scanned, the
machine beeps and an entry is added to the unauthorized copying log.
• Sending or storing a document that has been printed using the Data Security for Copying function
takes longer than normal.
23
24
1. Transmission
This section explains basic transmission operations such as specifying a transmission mode or
destination.
Transmission Modes
There are two types of transmission: Memory Transmission and Immediate Transmission.
• It is recommended that you call the receivers and confirm with them when sending important
documents.
Memory Transmission
Transmission starts automatically after the original is stored in memory. This is convenient when you
are in a hurry and want to take the document away with you. You can also send the same original
to several destinations (broadcasting). For details about a broadcast and Parallel Memory
Transmission, see “Parallel Memory Transmission” and “Broadcasting sequence”.
Transmitter
(This machine)
Receiver
Receiver
Receiver
BZR030
Immediate Transmission
Immediately dials the destination number, and while scanning the original, sends to it. It is very
convenient when you want to send an original quickly or when you want to check the destination
you are sending to. When using this type of transmission, the original is not stored in memory. You
can only specify one address.
25
1. Transmission
Transmitter
(This machine)
Receiver
BZR031
Normally the machine is in the Memory Transmission mode. To switch the mode to Immediate
Transmission, press [Immed. TX].
• You can set the machine to enter Memory Transmission mode or Immediate Transmission mode
right after the power is turned on or whenever the [Clear Modes] key is pressed. See “Changing
the Default Functions of the Fax's Initial Display”.
• page 31 "Parallel Memory Transmission"
• page 33 "Broadcasting sequence"
• page 161 "Changing the Default Functions of the Fax's Initial Display"
Selecting Type of Transmission
You can select the transmission type: standard fax, IP-Fax, Internet Fax, e-mail transmission, or folder
transmission.
Press the tab in the standby display to select the transmission type.
When sending to a standard fax or IP-Fax destination
Make sure that [Fax] is selected.
26
Transmission Modes
When sending to an Internet Fax destination
Press [Internet Fax] to switch the type of transmission to Internet Fax.
When sending to an e-mail destination
Press [E-mail] to switch the type of transmission to e-mail.
When sending to a folder destination
Press [Folder] to switch the type of transmission to folder.
27
1. Transmission
• For details about each transmission type, see “IP-Fax Functions”, “Internet Fax Transmission”, “Email Transmission”, and “Folder Transmission”.
• page 38 "IP-Fax Functions"
• page 43 "Internet Fax Transmission"
• page 49 "E-mail Transmission"
• page 53 "Folder Transmission"
Memory Transmission
Memory Transmission mode has standard fax, Internet Fax, IP-Fax, e-mail transmission, and folder
transmission.
• If there is a power failure (the main power switch is turned off) or the machine is unplugged for
about one hour, all the documents stored in memory are deleted. As soon as the main power
switch is turned on, the Power Failure Report is printed to help you check the list of deleted files.
Simply turning off the power by pressing the operation switch does not delete stored documents.
See “Turning Off the Main Power / In the Event of Power Failure”, Troubleshooting.
• If memory is full (0% appears in “Memory” at the upper right of the screen), Memory Transmission
is disabled. Use Immediate Transmission instead.
1. Make sure [Immed. TX] is not highlighted.
Normally Memory Transmission mode is selected.
28
Transmission Modes
2. Place the original into the ADF.
3. Make the scan settings you require.
For details about the scan settings, see “Scan Settings”.
4. Using the number keys or a Destination key, specify a destination.
If you make a mistake, press the [Clear/Stop] key, and then enter the correct number.
For details about specifying a destination, see “Specifying a Destination”.
29
1. Transmission
5. When sending the same original to several destinations (broadcasting), press [Add] to
specify the destinations.
You do not have to press [Add] when adding a destination using the destination list.
6. Specify the next destination.
Press the transmission type tab to switch the transmission type between fax/IP-Fax, Internet Fax, email, and folder.
Multiple transmission types can be specified simultaneously.
7. Press the [Start] key.
• If the combined total number of programmed destinations exceeds the maximum value, only
Immediate Transmission is possible.
• For the maximum values of the following items, see “Maximum Values”:
• Number of documents you can store in memory for Memory Transmission
• Number of pages you can store in memory (using A4 Standard <ITU-T 1 Chart>)
• Number of destinations you can specify per file
• Number of destinations you can specify for all files (including files in memory)
• page 66 "Scan Settings"
30
Transmission Modes
• page 78 "Specifying a Destination"
• page 427 "Maximum Values"
Sending originals using the exposure glass (Memory Transmission)
This section explains how to send originals by Memory Transmission using the exposure glass.
1. Make sure [Immed. TX] is not highlighted.
2. Place the first page of the original face down on the exposure glass.
3. Specify a destination.
4. Make the scan settings you require.
5. Press the [Start] key.
The machine starts scanning.
6. Place the next original on the exposure glass within 60 seconds when you send multiple
originals, and then repeat steps 4 and 5.
Repeat this step for each page.
7. Press the [ ] key.
The machine dials the destination and starts transmission.
Parallel Memory Transmission
This function dials while the original is being scanned.
Standard Memory Transmission stores the original in memory, and then dials the destination. However,
Parallel Memory Transmission allows you to confirm the connection status quickly. In addition, this
function scans the original faster than Immediate Transmission. This is useful when you are in a hurry and
need to use the original for another purpose.
• Standard Memory Transmission is used instead of Parallel Memory Transmission in the following
cases:
31
1. Transmission
• When the line is busy and could not be connected to
• With Send Later
• When you store an original for Memory Transmission while another communication is in
progress
• When two or more destinations are specified
• When an original is placed on the exposure glass, and then sent
• When you send documents stored in the Document Server
• When the machine has been switched to the Preview mode with [Preview].
• You can turn this function on or off with the User Parameter (switch 07, bit 2) in the Facsimile
Features menu. See “Parameter Settings”.
• Standard Memory Transmission may be used instead of Parallel Memory Transmission depending
on the optional equipment installed if there is not enough free memory left.
• If you use this function, the Memory Storage Report will not be printed.
• If the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed, the original jams or memory runs out, Parallel Memory
Transmission will stop. The Communication Result Report is printed and files are deleted.
• When using Parallel Memory Transmission, only the page number is printed on the header of the
fax, the total number of originals is not automatically printed.
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
Automatic Redial
If a fax document could not be sent because the line was busy or an error occurred during transmission,
redial is attempted at five-minute intervals up to five times.
If redialing fails after four redials, the machine cancels the transmission and prints a Communication
Result Report or Communication Failure Report.
• If there are a large number of files stored in memory, documents might not be sent in the order they
were scanned.
Dual Access
The machine can scan other documents into memory even while sending a fax document from memory,
receiving a document into memory, or automatically printing a report.
Since the machine starts sending the second document immediately after the current transmission ends,
the line is used efficiently.
32
Transmission Modes
• During Immediate Transmission or when in User Tools mode, the machine cannot scan an original.
Broadcasting sequence
Use the broadcasting function to send the same original to multiple destinations simultaneously.
You can broadcast via multiple transmission types (fax, IP-Fax, Internet Fax, e-mail, and folder) at the
same time.
To specify multiple destinations, specify the first destination, and then specify the next destination by
pressing [Add].
If you dial several destinations for the same document (broadcasting), the documents are sent in the
order in which they were dialed. If the fax document could not be transmitted, the machine redials that
destination after the last destination specified for broadcasting. For example, if you specify four
destinations, A through D, for broadcasting, and if the lines to destinations A and C are busy, the
machine dials the destinations in the following order: A, B, C, D, A, and C.
To check the transmission progress, print the TX file list. See “Printing a List of Files in Memory (Print TX
File List)”.
If you specify a second transmission while broadcasting to several destinations, faxes are transmitted
alternately to each remaining destination in the current and second broadcast.
For example, if you specify a broadcast to destinations A and B, and then specify a broadcast to
destinations C and D while transmission to destination A is in progress, the machine sends the faxes in
the following order: A, C, B, and then D.
If the previous file and next file are both on standby, these are also sent in the same order.
• To avoid accidentally specifying multiple destinations, you can disable broadcasting. You cannot
specify group destinations if you disable broadcasting. You can specify only one address at a time.
For details about how to disable broadcasting, contact your service representative.
• The Facsimile Features menu includes a user parameter setting (switch 17, bit 2) that enables you
to configure the machine to force the user to press [Add] whenever s/he specifies a destination
using a destination key. This prevents users accidentally sending documents to the wrong
destination. See “Parameter Settings”.
• page 238 "Printing a List of Files in Memory (Print TX File List)"
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
33
1. Transmission
Immediate Transmission
Immediate Transmission is possible with standard fax transmission and IP-Fax transmission.
• Internet Fax, e-mail transmission and folder transmission are performed using Memory
Transmission, which automatically starts transmission after storing documents in memory. If you
switch the type of transmission to them while the machine is in Immediate Transmission mode, the
transmission mode is automatically switched to Memory Transmission.
• Group cannot be used for Immediate Transmission. You cannot send the same document to multiple
destinations (broadcasting). If you specify broadcast or transmission for a group, the machine
changes automatically to Memory Transmission.
1. Press [Immed. TX].
2. Place the original into the ADF.
3. Select the scan settings you require.
For details about the scan settings, see “Scan Settings”.
34
Transmission Modes
4. Using the number keys or a Destination key, specify a destination.
If you make a mistake, press the [Clear/Stop] key, and then enter the correct number.
For details about specifying a destination, see “Specifying a Destination”.
5. Press the [Start] key.
The machine dials a destination.
• Documents are not stored in memory.
• page 66 "Scan Settings"
• page 78 "Specifying a Destination"
Sending originals using the exposure glass (Immediate Transmission)
This section explains how to send originals by Immediate Transmission using the exposure glass.
1. Press [Immed. TX].
2. Place the first page face down on the exposure glass.
3. Specify a destination.
4. Make the scan settings you require.
5. Press the [Start] key.
The machine dials the destination.
6. Place the next original on the exposure glass within 10 seconds when you send multiple
originals, and then repeat steps 4 and 5.
Repeat this step for each page.
35
1. Transmission
7. Press the [ ] key.
Displaying Confirmation of Transmission
On this screen you can check the destination, transmission mode, and other transmission settings before
transmission.
1. Press [Check Modes], and then check the transmission settings.
The following display appears.
2. After checking the settings on the display, press [Exit].
• To prevent users sending files to the wrong destination, you can configure the machine to display
the destination again for users to confirm, or to require users to enter the destination twice. To use
36
Transmission Modes
this function, contact your sales or service representative. For details, see “Preventing Transmission
to the Wrong Destination”.
• page 105 "Preventing Transmission to the Wrong Destination"
37
1. Transmission
IP-Fax Functions
The IP-Fax function sends or receives documents between two facsimiles directly via a TCP/IP network.
This function has the following advantages and is suitable for communication within the same LAN:
• Reducing communication costs
• Communicating between IP-Faxes at higher speed than by standard fax
IP-Fax uses SIP and H.323 as the network protocol.
Specify an IP address or host name instead of a fax number for sending. When using a gatekeeper,
specify an alias telephone number.
When using a SIP server, you can send by specifying SIP user name.
You can also transmit to a G3 facsimile connected to the public switched telephone network (PSTN) via
a gateway (T.38-compliant).
Specify addresses of the gatekeeper or SIP server (proxy server, registrar server, redirect server) as
appropriate under H.323 Settings, SIP Settings, or Program / Change / Delete Gateway in the Initial
Settings.
You can receive IP-Faxes in the same manner as standard faxes. For details about reception, see “Types
of Reception”.
38
IP-Fax Functions
CFH001
• To use IP-Fax functions, this machine must be connected to a LAN and its IP-Fax settings correctly
specified under Initial Settings in the Facsimile Features menu. For details about these settings, see
“Initial Settings”.
• Before using this function, configure the network in the System Settings menu. For details about the
required settings, see “Connecting the Machine”, Network and System Settings Reference.
• IP-Fax supported by this machine is ITU-T Recommendation T.38 compliant.
• SIP allows you to transmit and receive documents over an IPv6 network.
• For details about H.323 Settings, SIP Settings, or Program / Change / Delete Gateway, see
“Initial Settings”.
• This function supports both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses.
39
1. Transmission
• page 191 "Types of Reception"
• page 347 "Initial Settings"
Terminology
This section introduces you to useful IP-Fax-related terminology.
H.323
A multimedia communication protocol that sends or receives files via one-to-one communication
over a LAN or the Internet.
SIP
A communication control protocol for Internet telephone that utilizes VoIP (which converts voice
information to IP packets) and is equipped with functions such as creating, modifying, and
terminating sessions with one or more participants.
Gatekeeper (VoIP gatekeeper)
A gatekeeper manages devices connected to an IP network and converts alias telephone numbers
to IP addresses and performs authentication functions. In addition, a gatekeeper governs band
(transmission rate assignment) and access control.
SIP server
A SIP server mediates connection requests between devices connected to an IP network and is
composed mainly of servers that have the following three functions:
• Proxy server: Receives SIP requests and forwards them on behalf of the requestor.
• Registrar server: Receives information about a device's address within an IP network and
registers them in the database.
• Redirect server: Used to inquire the destination address.
Gateway (VoIP gateway)
A gateway connecting a telephone network and IP network, it has functions such as protocol
conversion for connecting these different networks, and also connects communication devices
(telephones, facsimiles, etc.) to a LAN or other network.
Notes on Using IP-Fax
This section describes notes on using IP-Fax.
• You may not be able to send to a firewall-protected network.
• You cannot use telephones on a LAN.
40
IP-Fax Functions
• If there is a power failure (the main power switch is turned off) or the machine is unplugged for
about one hour, all the documents stored in memory are deleted. As soon as the main power
switch is turned on, the Power Failure Report is printed to help you check the list of deleted files.
Simply turning off the power by pressing the operation switch does not delete stored documents.
See “Turning Off the Main Power / In the Event of Power Failure”, Troubleshooting.
• IP-fax communication might not be available if connection is by wireless LAN.
Functions Not Available for IP-Fax Transmission
This section tells you which functions are not available for IP-Fax transmission.
You can use the following functions with standard fax transmission, but not IP-Fax transmission:
• On Hook Dial
• Manual Dial
41
1. Transmission
E-Mail Functions and Folder Transmission
This section explains e-mail and folder transmission.
E-Mail Functions
There are two methods of sending faxes from this machine using e-mail:
• Internet Fax Transmission
• E-mail Transmission
To send a fax by Internet Fax, you must specify an Internet Fax destination.
To send a fax by e-mail, you must specify an E-mail destination.
In both transmission methods, the fax data is sent as a graphics file attached to e-mail. The format
of this graphics file depends on the transmission method, as shown in the table below.
Transmission Method
File Format
Internet Fax
TIFF-F
E-Mail
TIFF or PDF
For details about the E-Mail Transmission, see “Internet Fax Transmission” or “E-mail Transmission”.
Folder Transmission
You can send faxes to network folders that are registered in the Address Book. To do this, select the
path to the folder in the Address Book.
Faxes are sent as graphics in TIFF or PDF format files using the selected protocol (SMB, FTP, or
NCP).
For details about the Folder Transmission, see “Folder Transmission”.
• page 43 "Internet Fax Transmission"
• page 49 "E-mail Transmission"
• page 53 "Folder Transmission"
42
Internet Fax Transmission
Internet Fax Transmission
This machine converts scanned document images to e-mail format and transmits the data over the
Internet.
The e-mail sent by this machine can be received by another Internet Fax machine. Instead of dialing the
telephone number of the destination you want to send to, you enter the relevant e-mail address (Internet
Fax destination). If the machine at the other end supports T.37 full mode, bi-directional exchange of
data such as available paper size and resolution is possible.
You can receive e-mail messages with an attached TIFF-F image from computers.
You can send the same document to fax destination, IP-Fax destination, and an e-mail destination,
folder destination, simultaneously.
You can also print or forward received e-mail messages.
CCV024
• To use Internet Fax Transmission, this machine must be connected to a LAN and set up correctly in
“System Settings”. For details about the required settings, see “Connecting the Machine”, Network
and System Settings Reference.
• You can also enter a computer's e-mail address as the destination. In this case, you can send TIFF
files only.
43
1. Transmission
• To send Internet Fax documents, in the Facsimile Features menu, under Initial Settings, set [Internet
Fax Setting] to [On]. However, documents can still be forwarded or delivered to Internet Fax
destinations even if [Off] is selected. See “Initial Settings”.
• To receive Internet Fax documents, in the System Settings menu, in File Transfer, under [Fax E-mail
Account], set Account to [Receive]. See “File Transfer”, Network and System Settings Reference.
• The Internet Fax function supported by this machine is compliant with ITU-T Recommendation T.37.
• Though Internet Fax documents are normally sent via an SMTP server, you can also send Internet
Fax documents directly to their destinations without going through an SMTP server. To do this, set
whether or not to bypass the SMTP server on the standby display. For details about using this
function, see “Bypassing the SMTP server”.
• When sending Internet Fax documents, “Subject”, “Text”, “Reception Notice”, “BCC
Transmission” can be selected in [TX Mode]. For details about setting these options, see “Other
Transmission Features”.
• You can limit the size of transmitted e-mail messages in “Max. E-mail Size” of “Facsimile Features”.
For details about the setting, see “Send Settings”.
• See “Received images” for how e-mail is actually received by the computer.
• The CC function is disabled.
• If you send Internet Fax documents specifying a user code, and the e-mail address is set as the
routing destination of the specified user code, a Communication Result Report is sent after the
transmission is completed. This makes it possible to verify the result of a transmission.
• For details about how to confirm the transmission result, see “Checking the Transmission Result
(Transmission File Status)”.
• This function supports both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses.
• page 89 "Bypassing the SMTP server"
• page 199 "Received images"
• page 242 "Checking the Transmission Result (Transmission File Status)"
• page 339 "Send Settings"
• page 347 "Initial Settings"
Notes on Using Internet Fax
This section describes notes on using Internet Fax.
44
Internet Fax Transmission
• When using the Internet Fax function, originals are sent at A4 size. Originals larger than A4 are
reduced to A4 size. If the receiver's machine is compliant with the T.37 full mode, originals are sent
at the size specified in the Address Book.
• When using Internet Fax transmission, documents are sent at “Detail” resolution, even if you have
specified “Super Fine”. To send a document at “Super Fine”, configure the Full Mode when
registering the destinations in the Address Book.
• If a transmission is not successful, this machine usually receives error notification e-mail. However,
error notification e-mail may not be transmitted for various reasons. It is recommended that you
confirm receipt of important document by calling the other party.
• The level of security for Internet communications is low. It is recommended that you use the
telephone network for confidential communications.
• Voice communication is not supported over a LAN.
• Internet Fax delivery might be delayed due to network congestion. Use Internet Fax transmission
that bypasses the SMTP server, a public telephone line fax, or IP-Fax whenever communication
time is a concern. For details about using this function, see “Bypassing the SMTP server”.
• If there is a power failure (the main power switch is turned off) or the machine is unplugged for
about one hour, all the documents stored in memory are deleted. As soon as the main power
switch is turned on, the Power Failure Report is printed to help you check the list of deleted files.
Simply turning off the power by pressing the operation switch does not delete stored documents.
See “Turning Off the Main Power / In the Event of Power Failure”, Troubleshooting.
• You may not be able to send large files as e-mail, depending on e-mail environment conditions.
• When available memory is low, you may not be able to send Internet Fax documents.
• Because the machine sends documents as e-mail messages with an attached TIFF-F image, viewer
applications are required in order to view documents when they are received on a computer.
• With a large volume of document, it may take some time before transmission starts. This is due to
the time the machine requires to convert the data in memory.
• POP before SMTP is available in IPv4 environments only.
• For details about the T.37 full mode, see “T.37 Full Mode”.
• page 46 "T.37 Full Mode"
• page 89 "Bypassing the SMTP server"
Functions Not Available by Internet Fax Transmission
This section tells you which functions are not available for Internet Fax transmission.
The following functions are supported with standard fax transmission, but not with Internet Faxing:
45
1. Transmission
• Immediate Transmission
• Closed Network Transmission
• SUB Code Transmission
• On Hook Dial
• Manual Dial
• JBIG Transmission
• ECM (Error Correction Mode)
• Memory File Transfer
Functions Not Available by Internet Fax Reception
This section tells you which functions are not available for Internet Fax reception.
The following functions are available for standard fax reception, but not for Internet Faxing:
• Memory Lock Reception
• SEP Code Reception
• Authorized Reception per Sender
• Reception File Print Quantity per Sender
T.37 Full Mode
This machine is T.37 full mode compatible. T.37 full mode is an international standard for Internet Fax
transmission. (ITU-T Recommendation, RFC2532)
When an Internet Fax communication is made between T.37 full mode compatible machines, the
receiver side sends the return receipt (dispatched) in response to the reception notice request attached to
the sent e-mail. This return receipt includes the receiver's reception capability information (compression
type, paper size, and resolution). When the receiver is programmed in the Address Book as the full
mode destination, the sender side automatically registers the received information in the Address Book.
This allows you to send a subsequent Internet Fax document to that receiver based on this information.
Returning a Return Receipt
When e-mail is received, if the sender requests reception notice, the receiver sends a return receipt
that includes the receiving machine's capability (compression type, paper size, and resolution).
Registering the Received Reception Confirmation Contents
When the sender receives the return receipt that includes the receiver's reception capability, the
sender checks that the final recipient address sent is programmed in the Address Book. If it is
programmed as a full mode destination, the sender automatically registers the receiver's reception
capability. The registered reception capability is updated each time the sender receives new
46
Internet Fax Transmission
reception capability information. The sender can send documents to the receiver based on this
information.
If the receiver is programmed as the simple mode machine or not programmed in the Address
Book, the receiver's reception capability cannot be registered.
If you know the receiver's reception capability, you can set it manually.
Requesting a Reception Notice
When the receiver's machine supports T.37 full mode and is programmed as a full mode machine
in the Address Book, the machine requests the reception notice from the receiver. Then, the
machine will receive the return receipt (sent) that includes the receiver's reception capability.
• For details about requesting reception notice from this machine, see “Requesting a Reception
Notice”.
• Use Web Image Monitor to manually program a receiver's reception capability information. For
details about programming receiver's information, see “Programming Destination Information from
Web Browser”.
• If you use Internet Fax transmission, you can send documents to multiple destinations at once.
However, if you specify full mode destinations, since each destination may have a different
reception capability, transmission is done one by one in the specified transmission order.
• page 168 "Requesting a Reception Notice"
• page 328 "Programming Destination Information from Web Browser"
E-mail Encryption
For security, this machine can apply encryption and/or digital signatures to the e-mail it receives for
forwarding and routing.
Use of encryption and/or digital signatures helps prevent e-mail spoofing and information leakage.
Encryption and digital signatures can be used with the following functions:
• Routing documents to addresses registered in Personal Boxes.
• Transferring documents to addresses registered in Transfer Boxes.
• E-mail forwarding
• Routing e-mail received via SMTP
• First register the forwarding/routing destinations' e-mail addresses in the Address Book, and then
specify the encryption settings in both Address Book and Web Image Monitor for each destination
that you want to send encrypted e-mail to. For details about these settings, ask your administrator.
47
1. Transmission
• E-mail encryption and digital signatures are not available with standard transmission to Internet Fax
destinations. Encryption is only available for forwarding, routing, or transferring to Internet Fax
destinations.
• The encryption method of this machine is S/MIME. For details about S/MIME, ask the
administrator.
• If you specify “Encrypt All” in Web Image Monitor's Address Book settings, all e-mail is forwarded
and routed in encrypted form, regardless of the encryption settings specified on the Facsimile
Features menu.
• If you specify “Use Signatures” in Web Image Monitor's security settings, all e-mail is forwarded
and routed with digital signatures applied, regardless of the digital signature settings specified on
the Facsimile Features menu.
• Encrypted e-mail cannot be broadcasted. When specifying multiple destinations, broadcasted
documents are sent one by one in the order in which the destinations were specified.
• This machine cannot receive e-mails encrypted with S/MIME. When configuring the S/MIME
encryption settings, you should confirm that the receiver can receive S/MIME-encrypted e-mail.
• For details about how to specify encryption and digital signature settings, see the following:
• “Forwarding”
• “SMTP Reception File Delivery Settings”
• “Special Senders to Treat Differently”
• “Box Settings”
• For details about forwarding/routing/transferring functions, see the following:
• “Routing Received Documents”
• “Transferring Received Documents”
• “Forwarding Received Documents”
• “Routing e-mail received via SMTP”
• page 203 "Routing Received Documents"
• page 204 "Transferring Received Documents"
• page 205 "Forwarding Received Documents"
• page 208 "Routing e-mail received via SMTP"
• page 355 "Forwarding"
• page 365 "SMTP Reception File Delivery Settings"
• page 385 "Special Senders to Treat Differently"
• page 398 "Box Settings"
48
E-mail Transmission
E-mail Transmission
This machine uses its fax function to send scanned documents over the network to computers.
Specify an e-mail address of a computer.
You can send the same document to an e-mail destination, folder destination, fax destination, IP-Fax
destination, and Internet Fax destination simultaneously. If you specify a destination fax number (of
another party's fax machine) and a destination folder on your computer at the same time, you can view
the sent document on your computer.
When sending to e-mail/folder destinations, you can select PDF or TIFF as the file type of the document
you are sending.
CCV011
• To send to e-mail destinations, this machine must be connected to a LAN and set up correctly in
“System Settings”.
• You can also enter the e-mail address of another machine that supports Internet Fax. In this case,
select TIFF as the file format. Depending on the model of the destination machine, PDF files might
not be accepted.
• To send e-mail documents, set [E-mail Setting] to [On] in the Facsimile Features menu, under Initial
Settings. See “Initial Settings”.
49
1. Transmission
• To use an e-mail address registered in the Address Book as an e-mail destination, specify “Use Email Address for” for [E-mail / Internet Fax Destination]. Use the same procedure for e-mail
addresses that are registered in group destinations in the Address Book.
• Black and white images are sent in the same way as standard fax transmissions.
• This function supports both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses.
• page 347 "Initial Settings"
Functions Not Available for E-mail Transmission
This section tells you which functions are not available for e-mail transmission.
The following functions are available for standard fax transmission, but not for e-mail transmission:
• Immediate Transmission
• Closed Network Transmission
• SUB Code Transmission
• On Hook Dial
• Manual Dial
• JBIG Transmission
• ECM (Error Correction Mode)
• Memory File Transfer
E-mail Encryption
For security, this machine can apply encryption and/or digital signatures to the e-mail it receives for
forwarding and routing.
Use of encryption and/or digital signatures helps prevent e-mail spoofing and information leakage.
Encryption and digital signatures can be used with the following functions:
• Routing documents to addresses registered in Personal Box.
• Transferring documents to addresses registered in Transfer Box.
• E-mail forwarding
• Routing e-mail received via SMTP
50
E-mail Transmission
• First register the forwarding/routing destinations' e-mail addresses in the Address Book, and then
specify the encryption settings in both Address Book and Web Image Monitor for each destination
that you want to send encrypted e-mail to. For details about these settings, ask your administrator.
• E-mail encryption and digital signatures are not available with standard transmission to e-mail
destinations. Encryption is only available for forwarding, routing, or transferring to e-mail
destinations.
• The encryption method of this machine is S/MIME. For details about S/MIME, ask the
administrator.
• If you specify “Encrypt All” in Web Image Monitor's Address Book settings, all e-mail is forwarded
and routed in encrypted form, regardless of the encryption settings specified on the Facsimile
Features menu.
• If you specify “Use Signatures” in Web Image Monitor's security settings, all e-mail is forwarded
and routed with digital signatures applied, regardless of the digital signature settings specified on
the Facsimile Features menu.
• Encrypted e-mail cannot be broadcasted. When specifying multiple destinations, broadcasted
documents are sent one by one in the order in which the destinations were specified.
• This machine cannot receive e-mails encrypted with S/MIME. When configuring the S/MIME
encryption settings, you should confirm that the receiver can receive S/MIME-encrypted e-mail.
• For details about how to specify encryption and digital signature settings, see the following:
• “Forwarding”
• “SMTP Reception File Delivery Settings”
• “Special Senders to Treat Differently”
• “Box Settings”
• For details about forwarding/routing/transferring functions, see the following:
• “Routing Received Documents”
• “Transferring Received Documents”
• “Forwarding Received Documents”
• “Routing e-mail received via SMTP”
• page 203 "Routing Received Documents"
• page 204 "Transferring Received Documents"
• page 205 "Forwarding Received Documents"
• page 208 "Routing e-mail received via SMTP"
51
1. Transmission
• page 355 "Forwarding"
• page 365 "SMTP Reception File Delivery Settings"
• page 385 "Special Senders to Treat Differently"
• page 398 "Box Settings"
52
Folder Transmission
Folder Transmission
This machine uses its fax function to send scanned documents over the network to computers.
Specify the path to the destination folder.
To send to a folder, you must first register the path to the folder in the Address Book. Then, for the
transmission (communication) protocol, select SMB, FTP, or NCP.
When sending to folder destinations, you can select PDF or TIFF as the file type of the document you are
sending.
You can send the same document to folder destination, fax destination, IP-Fax destination, Internet Fax
destination, and an e-mail destination simultaneously.
If you specify a destination fax number (of another party's fax machine) and a destination folder on your
computer at the same time, you can view the sent document on your computer.
• To send to folder destinations, this machine must be connected to a LAN and set up correctly in
“System Settings”.
• To send to folder destinations, set [Folder Setting] to [On] in the Facsimile Features menu, under
Initial Settings. See “Initial Settings”.
• Black and white images are sent in the same way as standard fax transmissions.
• To send to a folder destination, you must first register the path for the folder in the Address Book.
You cannot enter the path manually on the standby display.
• This function supports both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses.
• page 347 "Initial Settings"
Functions Not Available for Folder Transmission
This section tells you which functions are not available for folder transmission.
The following functions are available for standard fax transmission, but not for folder transmission:
• Immediate Transmission
• Closed Network Transmission
• SUB Code Transmission
• On Hook Dial
• Manual Dial
• JBIG Transmission
53
1. Transmission
• ECM (Error Correction Mode)
• Memory File Transfer
• Selecting destinations from recent destinations
• Directly entering destinations
54
Placing Originals
Placing Originals
Place the original on the exposure glass or the ADF.
For details about how to place originals, see the following:
• Placing originals on the exposure glass
See “Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass” in “Placing Originals”, Copy and Document Server
Reference.
• Placing originals into the ADF
See “Placing Originals in the Auto Document Feeder” in “Placing Originals”, Copy and Document
Server Reference.
Note that “Original Settings” of the copy function cannot be used with the facsimile function.
Place the originals according to their paper size.
Specify the scan area according to the size of originals. The sizes that you can specify as standard size
are A4 , 81/2 × 11 , and 81/2 × 14 . If you are placing any other size, specify the scan area in
“Area”. For details about specifying the scan area, see “Scan Size”.
Original size
Placing on the exposure glass
Placing into the ADF
B5 JIS, A4,
81/2 × 11, 81/2 × 14 *1
B5 JIS, A4,
81/2 × 11, 81/2 × 14 *1
A5, 51/2 × 81/2
A5, 51/2 × 81/2
*1 Place 81/2 × 14 size originals into the ADF.
55
1. Transmission
• Do not lift the ADF while using it to scan originals.
• Originals that are clipped or creased cannot be scanned using the ADF. For details about originals
that are not recommended for the ADF, see “Originals”, Copy and Document Server Reference.
• To scan multiple originals using the ADF, set originals in a stack.
• When sending a fax, the image output at the other end depends on the size and orientation of
paper used in the receiver's machine. If the receiver's machine does not have paper of the same
size and orientation as that you have specified for the scan area, the receiver's fax image might be
smaller, trimmed at both edges, or divided across two or more sheets. When sending an important
original, ask the receiver about the size and orientation of the paper in their machine.
• An original of irregular (i.e. custom) size originals are scanned as regular size originals, so the
receiver may find extra blank margins or edges of images missing. When sending a custom size or
part of a large original, you can specify the scan area precisely. If you specify a scan area, only
that area is scanned regardless of the actual size of the original. For details about specifying the
scan area, see “Scan Size”.
• Documents longer than 800 mm (32 inches) must be sent by Memory Transmission (Immediate
Transmission may not be possible).
• You can use documents longer than 356 mm (14 inches) with the User Parameter (switch 14, bit 1)
in the Parameter Settings. For details about Parameter Setting, see “Parameter Settings”.
• If an original jams, press the [Clear/Stop] key, and then carefully remove the original.
• Make sure that all ink, correcting fluid etc., has completely dried before placing your original. If it is
still wet, the exposure glass will become marked and those marks will appear on the received
image.
• You can send the first page from the exposure glass then the remaining pages from the ADF. You
cannot change from the ADF to the exposure glass.
• When using the Internet Fax function, originals are sent at A4 size. Originals larger than A4 are
reduced to A4 size. If the receiver's machine is compliant with the T.37 full mode, originals are sent
at the size specified in the Address Book. See “T.37 Full Mode”.
• Information about this machine is printed at the destination. This information is printed on the side of
the paper that is to your left when placing the documents on the exposure glass or the ADF. For
details about the fax information, see “Registering Fax Information”.
• For acceptable types of originals, see “Acceptable Original Sizes” and “Paper Size and Scanned
Area”.
• page 46 "T.37 Full Mode"
• page 61 "Acceptable Original Sizes"
56
Placing Originals
• page 61 "Paper Size and Scanned Area"
• page 70 "Scan Size"
• page 371 "Registering Fax Information"
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
Setting the Original Orientation
To preview scanned originals or documents using Document Server, configure the “Original
Orientation” setting to display the top/bottom orientation of the original correctly in the preview.
1. Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
2. Press [Original Feed Type].
3. Specify the original orientation.
Check the orientation of the placed document, and then press [
] or [
].
4. Press [OK].
The selected original orientation appears in “Original Feed Type”.
5. Specify a destination, and then press the [Start] key.
57
1. Transmission
Scanning Two-Sided Originals
Use this function to send two-sided originals.
The front and back of the scanned original will be printed in order on separate sheets at the other end.
The orientation of alternate sheets may be reversed at the other end. If you want to print the original with
the same orientation at the other end, specify the “Original position” and “Page opening orientation”.
Original
Original position
Page opening
orientation
Output at
the other end
A4, B5 JIS, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11
Top to Top
Top to Bottom
Top to Top
Top to Bottom
A5, 51/2 x 81/2
Top to Top
Top to Bottom
Top to Top
Top to Bottom
CCV006
• When you use [2 Sided Original] under [Original Feed Type], the originals cannot be sent by
using just the exposure glass.
• Two-sided originals are only sent with Memory Transmission. Immediate Transmission is not
possible.
1. Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
58
Placing Originals
2. Press [Original Feed Type].
3. Specify the original orientation.
Check the orientation of the placed document, and then press [
] or [
].
Make sure that the specified original orientation matches the orientation of originals loaded in the
ADF.
4. Press [2 Sided Original].
59
1. Transmission
5. Select [Top to Top] or [Top to Bottom].
6. Select [1st Sheet] or [2nd Sheet].
To cancel two-sided transmission, press [1 Sided Original]. The display returns to that of step 4.
Select [2nd Sheet] if you want to send a cover sheet as the first page.
7. Press [OK].
"2 Sided Original" appears above [Original Feed Type].
8. Specify a destination, and then press the [Start] key.
• For details about acceptable original size and paper thickness for two-sided scanning with the
ADF, see “Acceptable Original Sizes”.
• You can set the original feed types that are selected right after the power is turned on or whenever
the [Clear Modes] key is pressed. See “Changing the Default Functions of the Fax's Initial Display”.
• page 61 "Acceptable Original Sizes"
• page 161 "Changing the Default Functions of the Fax's Initial Display"
60
Placing Originals
Acceptable Original Sizes
This section describes the size and thickness limitations that apply to originals placed on the exposure
glass or the ADF.
Original sizes and thickness
Where original
is set
Acceptable original size
Exposure glass
Up to A4 (210 × 297 mm),
Maximum number of sheets
Paper thickness
1 sheet
81/2 × 11 (216 × 279 mm)
ADF, one-sided A5
to A4
original
(up to 1,200 mm long)
51/2 × 81/2
14
ADF, two-sided
original
A5
52 128 g/m2
(14 34 lb.
Bond)
50 sheets: Less than 80
g/m2 (21 lb. Bond)*1
60 105 g/m2
(16 28 lb.
Bond)
to 81/2 ×
to A4
(up to 356 mm long)
51/2 × 81/2
14
50 sheets: Less than 80
g/m2 (21 lb. Bond)*1
to 81/2 ×
*1 Above specification depends on the paper type and condition
• You can use documents longer than 356 mm (14 inches) with the User Parameter (switch 14, bit 1)
in the Parameter Settings. For details about Parameter Setting, see “Parameter Settings”.
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
Paper Size and Scanned Area
This section explains the size of the area the machine can scan.
• There may be a difference in the size of the image when it is printed at the destination.
• Even if an original is correctly placed on the exposure glass or in the ADF, a margin of 3 mm (0.1
inches) around each edge of the original may not be sent.
61
1. Transmission
When placing an original on the exposure glass
This section explains how to place an original on the exposure glass.
• If you place an original larger than A4, 81/2 × 11 on the exposure glass, only an A4, 81/2 × 11
area is scanned.
• Maximum scan area
The following shows the maximum scan area:
216 × 297 mm, 81/2 × 11 inches (W × L)
Positioning mark
Horizontal size
Vertical size
Maximum scanning area
A4
(210 x 297 mm)
81/2 x 11
(216 x 279 mm)
CFH005
When placing an original into the Auto Document Feeder
This section explains how to place an original into the ADF.
• Maximum scan area
The following shows the maximum scan area:
Memory Transmission: 216 × 1,200 mm/81/2 × 47 inches (W × L)
Immediate Transmission: 216 × 1,200 mm/81/2 × 47 inches (W × L)
Horizontal size
Vertical size
Maximum scanning area
1-sided: 216 x 1,200 mm
81/2 x 47 inches
2-sided: 216 x 356 mm
81/2 x 14 inches
CCV008
62
Placing Originals
• During Immediate Transmission, the length of the scanning range can decrease to less than 1,200
mm (47 inches), depending on the resolution of the image and the configuration of the receiving
machine.
Checking the Content of a Scanned Original (Preview Before Transmission)
The Preview Before Transmission function allows you to check the content of a scanned original before
you send it.
• This function cannot be used with the following functions:
• Immediate Transmission
• Parallel Memory Transmission
• On Hook Dial
• Manual Dial
• SEP Code Reception
• When [Store Only] is set for [Store File]
• Transmission of a stored file only
• Memory File Transfer
1. Place the original, and then specify the scan settings you require.
Specify the “Original Orientation” setting correctly. If you do not, the top/bottom orientation of the
original will not be displayed correctly in the preview.
For details about the setting, see “Setting the Original Orientation”.
2. Press [Preview].
63
1. Transmission
3. Specify the destination, and then press the [Start] key.
CCV002
The machine starts to scan the original. When scanning ends, a preview is displayed.
If you want to cancel a preview, press [Cancel].
4. Check the preview.
• Press [Zoom Out] or [Zoom In] to reduce or enlarge the preview image.
• Press [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] to scroll the preview image.
• Press [Switch] under “Display File” to display another selected file.
• Press [Switch] under “Display Page” to change the displayed page.
5. Press [Send].
Transmission starts.
To cancel the transmission, press [Cancel Sending].
After transmission, the standby display appears.
• You can have the machine select Preview Before Transmission right after the power is turned on or
whenever the [Clear Modes] key is pressed. For details, see “Changing the Default Functions of the
Fax's Initial Display”.
• page 57 "Setting the Original Orientation"
• page 161 "Changing the Default Functions of the Fax's Initial Display"
64
Placing Originals
Detecting Blank Sheet
Upon completion of the first page scanning, an alarm sounds if the page is nearly blank.
• The blank sheet-detecting function works only when an original is scanned using the ADF.
• The blank sheet-detecting function is ineffective for second and subsequent pages.
• The machine cannot detect blank sheets if the user has put it into Preview mode using [Preview].
This function notifies you if an original is placed wrong side down on the scanner. When this happens, a
message appears for a few seconds. The message differs depending on number of pages to be scanned
and transmission mode.
• When sending a document using Immediate Transmission or when all pages have been scanned in
Memory Transmission:
• When some pages are left unscanned in Parallel Memory Transmission or Memory Transmission:
• Even if a near blank sheet is detected, it is transmitted as normal.
• You can turn this function on or off with the User Parameter (switch 11, bit 2). See “Parameter
Settings”.
• To cancel scanning if a blank sheet is detected, press the [Clear/Stop] key.
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
65
1. Transmission
Scan Settings
You can configure the scan settings according to the original you are scanning.
You may want to send many different types of fax documents. Some of these may be difficult to
reproduce at the receiver's end. However, the machine has four settings that you can adjust to help you
transmit the document with the best possible image quality.
Original Type:
Text, Text / Line Art, Text / Photo, Photo
Resolution:
Standard, Detail, Super Fine (optional)
Scan Size:
Regular, Area
Density (Contrast):
Auto Density, Manual Density (seven levels), Combined Auto and Manual Density
• When scanning an original with a large number of pages, there may be a long pause between
each page depending on the nature of the original or the machine settings.
Original Type
If the original contains photographs, illustrations, or diagrams with complex shading patterns or grays,
select the appropriate original type to optimize image clarity.
Text
Select [Text] to send high-contrast black-and-white image originals. Use this setting when you only
want to send clearer text, even if the original contains text and photographs.
Text / Line Art
Select [Text / Line Art] to send high-contrast black-and-white graphic originals at improved
resolution. The [Text] mode gives priority to scanning speed; [Text / Line Art] mode gives priority to
scanning quality.
Text / Photo
Select [Text / Photo] to send an original containing both a high-contrast black-and-white image,
such as text, and a halftone image, such as a photograph.
Photo
Select [Photo] to send an original containing a halftone image, such as a photograph or a color
original.
66
Scan Settings
1. Press [Scan Settings].
2. Make sure that [Original Type] is selected.
3. Select the original type you require, and then press [OK].
• If you select [Text / Line Art], [Text / Photo], or [Photo], the transmission will take longer than when
[Text] is selected.
• If you send a fax document with [Text / Line Art], [Text / Photo], or [Photo] and the background of
the received image is dirty, reduce the density setting and resend the fax. For details about setting
the image density, see “Density (Contrast)”.
• You can set the original type that is selected right after the machine is turned on or whenever the
[Clear Modes] key is pressed. See “Changing the Default Functions of the Fax's Initial Display”.
67
1. Transmission
• page 73 "Density (Contrast)"
• page 161 "Changing the Default Functions of the Fax's Initial Display"
JBIG Transmission
If you use JBIG (Joint Bi-level Image experts Group) compression, you can send originals scanned using
[Photo] faster than with other compression methods.
• This function is not available with a transmission to Internet Fax destination, e-mail destination, and
folder destination.
• This function requires that the other party's fax machine has both the JBIG function and ECM
function.
Resolution
Specify the resolution according to the size of the text on the original.
Images and text are scanned into the machine by converting them to a sequence of dots. The density of
the dots determines the quality of the image and how long it takes to transmit. Therefore, images
scanned at high resolution (Super Fine) have high quality but transmission takes longer. Conversely, low
resolution (Standard) scanning results in lower quality but the original is sent more quickly. Select the
setting that matches your needs based upon this trade off between speed and image clarity.
Standard (8 × 3.85 lines/mm, 200 × 100 dpi)
Select for originals containing normal size characters.
Detail (8 × 7.7 lines/mm, 200 × 200 dpi)
Select for originals containing small characters or when you require greater clarity. This resolution
is twice as fine as Standard.
Super Fine (optional expansion memory required: 16 × 15.4 lines/mm, 400 × 400 dpi)
Select for originals with very fine details or when you require the best possible image clarity. This
resolution is eight times finer than Standard.
68
Scan Settings
1. Press [Scan Settings].
2. Press [Resolution].
3. Select the resolution you require, and then press [OK].
• If you install the optional expansion memory, “Super Fine” appears in the Resolution screen.
• If the other party's machine does not support the resolution at which you are sending, this machine
automatically switches to a resolution that is supported. You can check the resolution at which you
actually sent by printing the Journal. For details about printing the Journal, see “Print Journal”.
• Sending with Super Fine resolution requires that the machine has the optional expansion memory,
and the other party's machine has the capability to receive fax documents at Super Fine resolution.
• The machine supports Standard, Detail, Fine (with the optional expansion memory), and Super
Fine (with the optional expansion memory) resolutions for reception.
69
1. Transmission
• You can set the resolution type that is selected right after the machine is turned on or whenever the
[Clear Modes] key is pressed. See “Changing the Default Functions of the Fax's Initial Display”.
• When using Internet Fax transmission, documents are sent at “Detail” resolution, even if you have
specified “Super Fine”. To send a document at “Super Fine”, configure the Full Mode when
registering the destinations in the Address Book. See “T.37 Full Mode”.
• page 46 "T.37 Full Mode"
• page 161 "Changing the Default Functions of the Fax's Initial Display"
• page 250 "Print Journal"
Scan Size
Specify a scan area within an original.
You can specify the scan area manually. Specifying the scan area manually can be useful for cropping
excess border space around an image.
Regular
The placed original is scanned according to specified standard size regardless of actual size.
The sizes that can be specified are A4 , 81/2 × 11 , and 81/2 × 14 .
1. Press [Scan Settings].
70
Scan Settings
2. Press [Scan Size].
3. Press the size of the originals to be sent.
81/2 × 11 indicates Letter. 81/2 × 14 indicates Legal.
4. Press [OK].
The selected size appears above [Scan Settings].
Area
Only the area in the specified size is scanned regardless of the actual size of a placed original.
• You must first register the sizes of the originals that you want to scan in “Program / Change /
Delete Scan Size” on the Facsimile Features menu. See “Program / Change / Delete Scan Size”.
71
1. Transmission
1. Press [Scan Settings].
2. Press [Scan Size].
3. Press [Area 1] or [Area 2].
72
Scan Settings
4. Press [OK].
The specified size appears above [Scan Settings].
• page 368 "Program / Change / Delete Scan Size"
Density (Contrast)
You can adjust the density at which the originals are scanned.
The text and diagrams on originals should stand out clearly from the paper they are on.
If the original has a darker background than normal (for example, a newspaper clipping), or if the
writing is faint, adjust the density.
Auto Density
The appropriate density setting for the original is automatically selected.
1. Make sure that [Auto Density] is selected.
Manual Density
Use manual density to set density manually.
You can select one of seven density levels.
1. If [Auto Density] is selected, press [Auto Density] to turn it off.
73
1. Transmission
2. Press [ ] or [ ] to adjust the density.
The indicator moves.
Combined Auto and Manual Density
You can only adjust density for photographs, illustrations, or diagrams if the original has a dark
background.
You can select one of seven density levels.
1. Make sure that [Auto Density] is selected.
2. Press [ ] or [ ] to adjust the density.
The indicator moves.
• Selecting [Text], [Text / Line Art], or [Text / Photo] for the original type causes [Auto Density] to be
selected.
• You can set the density that is selected right after the machine is turned on or whenever the [Clear
Modes] key is pressed. See “Changing the Default Functions of the Fax's Initial Display”.
• page 161 "Changing the Default Functions of the Fax's Initial Display"
74
Scan Settings
Mixing Scan Settings for a Multiple Page Original
When sending an original of several pages, you can select a different scan setting for each page.
It is recommended that originals be placed on the exposure glass when mixing scan settings for a
multiple page original.
• If you are using the ADF, do not change the “Resolution” setting while originals are being scanned.
When placing originals on the exposure glass
1. Check which pages you want to scan with different settings.
2. Remove the previous page and place the next page that you checked on the exposure glass.
3. Make the scan settings.
You have about 60 seconds (10 seconds for Immediate Transmission) to make the scan
settings. The time remaining is shown on the display.
Adjust the settings for each page before you press the [Start] key.
When placing originals in the ADF
1. Check which pages you want to scan with different settings.
2. Make the scan settings before the page you want to change the settings for starts being
scanned.
75
1. Transmission
Depending on what time the scan settings are adjusted, the settings may not be reflected in the
resulting operation.
Selecting the File Format
This section explains how to select the file format when sending a fax to an e-mail destination or folder
destination. There are two file formats to select from:
• TIFF
• PDF
1. Press [E-mail] or [Folder] and press [File Type].
2. Press [TIFF] or [PDF].
The default setting is TIFF format.
• Even if you specify a format for files being sent to fax, IP-Fax, or Internet fax destinations, the files
will not be converted to the format you specify.
• For details about an e-mail destination, see “Sending an E-mail (E-mail Destinations)”.
• For details about a folder destination, see “Sending to Folder Destinations (Folder Destinations)”.
• page 92 "Sending an E-mail (E-mail Destinations)"
76
Scan Settings
• page 98 "Sending to Folder Destinations (Folder Destinations)"
77
1. Transmission
Specifying a Destination
This section explains how to specify a destination.
Fax numbers, IP-Fax destinations, Internet Fax destinations, e-mail destinations, and folder destinations
can be specified.
• The display shows the percentage of free memory space for storing originals. Since destinations
are programmed in separate memory, dialing fax numbers using the number keys does not change
the percentage on the display.
Sending over a Fax Line (Fax Destinations)
This section explains how to enter a fax number.
Use the number keys on the right side of the control panel to enter numbers.
1. Make sure that [Fax] is selected.
2. Enter the fax number using the number keys.
If you make a mistake, press the [Clear/Stop] key, and then enter again.
When adding a destination, pressing the transmission type tab switches the transmission type
between fax/IP-Fax, Internet Fax, e-mail, and folder.
3. Press the [Start] key.
The machine starts to scan the original and stores it in memory. When scanning ends, the
Communicating indicator lights and transmission starts.
• To select a destination from the Address Book, see “Using the Address Book to Specify
Destinations”.
• You can insert pauses and tones in a fax number. For details, see “Entering a pause” or “Entering a
tone”.
78
Specifying a Destination
• Press [Prg. Dest.] after entering the fax number to store the fax number in the destination list. For
details about storing numbers you entered, see “Registering Entered Destinations to the Address
Book”.
• For the maximum number of digits that can be included in a destination, see “Maximum Values”.
• page 79 "Entering a pause"
• page 80 "Entering a tone"
• page 101 "Using the Address Book to Specify Destinations"
• page 116 "Registering Entered Destinations to the Address Book"
• page 427 "Maximum Values"
Entering a pause
This section explains how to enter a pause.
Press [Pause] when dialing or storing a number to insert a pause of about two seconds.
• A pause is shown as a “-”on the display.
• You can also program numbers including pauses in the destination list.
79
1. Transmission
Entering a tone
This function allows a machine connected to a pulse dialing line to send tonal signals (for example if you
want to use a special service on a tone dialing line).
When you press [Tone], the machine dials the number using tonal signals.
This section explains how to use the tone function with On Hook Dial as an example.
1. Press [On Hook].
2. Enter the fax number using the number keys.
3. Press [Tone].
4. Enter the number you want to tone dial using the number keys.
5. Press the [Start] key, and then press [Start TX].
Transmission starts.
If you want to cancel a transmission, press the [Clear/Stop] key, and then remove the originals.
After transmission, the standby display appears.
• Certain services may be unavailable even when using Tone function.
• A tone is shown as a “T” on the display and the next numbers are dialed using tonal signals.
80
Specifying a Destination
Sending by IP-Fax (IP-Fax Destinations)
This section explains how to specify a destination using IP-Fax transmission.
When using IP-Fax transmission, specify the IP-Fax destination (IP address, host name, or alias
telephone number) in place of the fax number.
• When sending an IP-Fax, select either “SIP” or “H.323” as the protocol.
• To display “SIP” and “H.323” on the screen, make the settings in “Initial Settings” in the Facsimile
Features menu. If you are using SIP, specify “Enable SIP” and “SIP Settings”. If you are using H.
323, specify “Enable H.323” and “H.323 Settings”. For details about these settings, see “Initial
Settings”.
• Ask your administrator whether you should select “SIP” or “H.323” as the protocol.
1. Make sure that [Fax] is selected.
2. Press [Select Line].
3. Select the protocol you want to use, and then press [OK].
81
1. Transmission
4. Press [Manual Entry].
5. Enter the IP-Fax destination, and then press [OK].
If you enter an incorrect character, press [ ], [ ], [Backspace], or [Delete All]. Then, re-enter the
characters correctly.
To change the IP-Fax destination after pressing [OK], press [Edit Dest.], re-enter an IP-Fax
destination, and then press [OK].
6. To add a destination, press [Add].
82
Specifying a Destination
7. Specify the next destination.
To add another destination, repeat steps 6 and 7.
Press the transmission type tab to switch the transmission type between fax/IP-Fax, Internet Fax, email, and folder.
8. Press the [Start] key.
The machine starts to scan the original and stores it in memory. When scanning ends, the
Communicating indicator lights and transmission starts.
• You can specify H.323 or SIP as the default setting. See “Changing the Default Functions of the
Fax's Initial Display”.
• Depending on the security settings, [Manual Entry] might not appear and you might not be able to
enter the IP-Fax destination.
• To select a destination from the Address Book, see “Using the Address Book to Specify
Destinations”.
• IP-Fax will be available only if the gateway (T.38-compliant), gatekeeper, and SIP server are
compatible with this machine. For a list of certified compatible gateways, gatekeepers, and SIP
servers, contact your local retail or service representative.
• Methods of entering a destination vary depending on the network settings made by the
administrator. Ask the machine administrator for details. For details about entering the IP-Fax
destination, see “When using a gatekeeper server or SIP server”.
• For details about text entry, see “Entering Text”, About This Machine.
• The Facsimile Features menu includes a user parameter setting (switch 17, bit 2) that enables you
to configure the machine to force the user to press [Add] whenever s/he specifies a destination
using a destination key. This prevents users accidentally sending documents to the wrong
destination. See “Parameter Settings”.
• If you press [Prg. Dest.], you can register an entered destination in the destination list. For details
about storing a destination you entered, see “Registering Entered Destinations to the Address
Book”.
• For the maximum number of digits that can be included in a destination, see “Maximum Values”.
83
1. Transmission
• page 84 "When using a gatekeeper server or SIP server"
• page 101 "Using the Address Book to Specify Destinations"
• page 116 "Registering Entered Destinations to the Address Book"
• page 161 "Changing the Default Functions of the Fax's Initial Display"
• page 347 "Initial Settings"
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
• page 427 "Maximum Values"
When using a gatekeeper server or SIP server
The IP-Fax destination details that you must specify vary depending on the machine's configuration and
the configuration of the network to which it is connected.
Depending on this machine's configuration, specify the IP-Fax destination as follows:
When not using a gatekeeper/SIP server
• From IP-Fax to IP-Fax
Specify the IP address or host name of the receiving machine.
Example: 192.168.1.10 (IP address)
Example: IPFAX1 (host name)
• From IP-Fax to G3 fax
Specify the G3 fax telephone number of the receiving machine.
Example: 0312345678
When using a gatekeeper server
• From IP-Fax to IP-Fax
Specify the alias telephone number of the receiving machine.
Example: 0311119999 (alias telephone number)
• From IP-Fax to G3 fax
Specify the G3 fax telephone number of the receiving machine.
Example: 0312345678
When using a SIP server
• From IP-Fax to IP-Fax
Specify the SIP user name of the receiving machine.
Example: ABC (SIP user name)
• From IP-Fax to G3 fax
84
Specifying a Destination
Specify the G3 fax telephone number of the receiving machine.
Example: 0312345678
• To send to a G3 fax via a gateway connected to a public telephone line, you must specify it's the
receiver's machine telephone number. For example, if the receiver's fax number is
“0312345678”, specify “5678”. To send from an IP-Fax to G3 fax without using gatekeeper or
SIP server, you must register the gateway also.
• An alias telephone number is a number that is registered in the gatekeeper, and is available only in
the network to which the gatekeeper is connected.
• Pay attention to the number of telephone number digits set in the gateway/IP address conversion
table to avoid transmission error.
• SIP allows you to transmit and receive documents via an IPv6 network. This machine does not
support H.323 over IPv6.
• Although the machine can have multiple IP addresses in an IPv6 environment, only one address
can receive IP-Faxes.
• To send via IPv6, you must specify, for the receiver's IPv6 address and host name, the manually
configured address for the receiver's fax.
• For reception when not using SIP server in an IPv6 environment, you must specify this machine's
IPv6 address manually. This is not necessary if you are using SIP server.
• To send by IPv4 when using SIP server in a mixed IPv4/IPv6 environment, enter “v4:” at the
beginning of the IP-Fax destination. Likewise, to send by IPv6 when using SIP server in a mixed
IPv4/IPv6 environment, enter “v6:” at the beginning of the IP-Fax destination.
• “SIP call setup” is performed either by IPv4 or IPv6, depending on the configuration of your
environment.
Setting a port number
When using IP address and port number
To send to an IP-Fax destination, depending on the receiver's network configuration, you might
have to specify the IPv4 address and port number of the receiving machine. For example, if the
receiver's IPv4 address is “192.168.1.10” and the port number is “2100”, specify
“192.168.1.10:2100”. Similarly, if the receiver's IPv6 address is “fe80::0123:4567:89ab:cdef”
and the port number is “2200”, specify “[fe80::0123:4567:89ab:cdef]:2200”. Ask your network
administrator for details.
When using host name and port number
When you specify a host name, depending on the receiver's network configuration, you may need
to specify the host name and port number of the receiving machine. For example, if the receiver's
85
1. Transmission
host name is “IPFAX1” and the port number is “2100”, specify “IPFAX1:2100”. Ask the network
administrator for details.
Sending by Internet Fax (Internet Fax Destinations)
This section explains how to specify an Internet Fax destination.
When using Internet Fax transmission, specify the e-mail address (Internet Fax destination) in place of
the fax number.
• You can also enter a computer's e-mail address as the destination. In this case, you can send TIFF
files only.
• To send an Internet Fax, you must specify the sender.
• The sender must be registered in the Address Book in advance. Register his/her e-mail address and
specify “Use Name as” for [Sender] using “Address Book Management” in “System Settings”. For
details about these settings, see “Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner
Functions”, Network and System Settings Reference.
• Internet Fax is performed using Memory Transmission, which automatically starts transmission after
storing documents in memory. If you switch the type of transmission to Internet Fax while the
machine is in Immediate Transmission mode, the transmission mode is automatically switched to
Memory Transmission.
1. Press [Internet Fax] to switch the transmission type to Internet Fax.
2. Specify the sender.
For details, see “Sender Settings”.
86
Specifying a Destination
3. Press [Manual Entry].
4. Enter the Internet Fax destination, and then press [OK].
If you enter an incorrect character, press [ ], [ ], [Backspace], or [Delete All]. Then, re-enter the
characters correctly.
To change the e-mail address after pressing [OK], press [Edit Dest.], re-enter an e-mail address,
and then press [OK].
5. To add a destination, press [Add].
87
1. Transmission
6. Specify the next destination.
To add another destination, repeat steps 5 and 6.
Press the transmission type tab to switch the transmission type between fax/IP-Fax, Internet Fax, email, and folder.
7. Press the [Start] key.
The machine starts to scan the original and stores it in memory. When scanning ends, the
Communicating indicator lights and transmission starts.
• Depending on the security settings, [Manual Entry] might not appear and you might not be able to
enter the e-mail address.
• To select a destination from the Address Book, see “Using the Address Book to Specify
Destinations”.
• For details about text entry, see “Entering Text”, About This Machine.
• For details about canceling a transmission, see “Canceling a Transmission”.
• The Facsimile Features menu includes a user parameter setting (switch 17, bit 2) that enables you
to configure the machine to force the user to press [Add] whenever s/he specifies a destination
using a destination key. This prevents users accidentally sending documents to the wrong
destination. See “Parameter Settings”.
• If you press [Prg. Dest.], you can register an entered destination in the destination list. For details
about programming destinations, see “Registering Entered Destinations to the Address Book”.
• For the maximum number of digits that can be included in a destination, see “Maximum Values”.
• When the sender is specified, the transmission result etc. is sent to the sender's e-mail address.
• If “Auto Specify Sender Name” is set to “On” in “System Settings”, the sender is automatically
specified and you can omit the procedure for specifying a sender. If “On” is selected, either the
administrator's or this machine's e-mail address appears in the “From” field. For details about Auto
Specify Sender Name, see “File Transfer”, Network and System Settings Reference.
• If “Auto Specify Sender Name” is set to “Off” in “System Settings” and no e-mail address is
registered for the sender you specified, Internet Fax documents cannot be sent.
88
Specifying a Destination
• page 101 "Using the Address Book to Specify Destinations"
• page 116 "Registering Entered Destinations to the Address Book"
• page 140 "Sender Settings"
• page 151 "Canceling a Transmission"
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
• page 427 "Maximum Values"
Bypassing the SMTP server
You can send Internet Fax documents directly to their destinations without going through the SMTP
server.
Normally, Internet Fax is sent through the SMTP server. With this feature however, the domain part of the
destination's e-mail address is read as the SMTP server's address and transmissions bypass the SMTP
server. Since this reduces the load on the server, you can send Internet Faxes without having to take into
account the transfer time from server to destination.
• To use this function, the following settings must be specified:
• In “System Settings”, “SMTP Server”, in “File Transfer”, set the port number to “25”.
• To specify the host name of the other party as the domain part of the e-mail address, register
the host name of the other party on the DNS server.
• For details about these settings, see “File Transfer”, Network and System Settings Reference.
• If the other party's IP address is not registered on the DNS server, specify the IP address at the
domain part of the e-mail address.
• To send a document over an IPv6 network, you must specify the other party's host name (not IP
address) as the domain part.
• To use this function, the other party's fax machine must:
• be compatible with Internet Fax
• be connected to the same LAN as this machine
• support SMTP reception and have its reception protocol set to SMTP
• SMTP authentication set on the other party's fax machine is disabled when Internet Fax is
transmitted using this function.
• If an Internet Fax is transmitted from the other party using this function, even if reception fails, Error
Mail Notification is not sent to the sender.
• When an Internet Fax is transmitted using this function, even if transmission fails, the server does not
send error notification e-mail.
89
1. Transmission
• When using this function, you cannot send Internet Fax to the administrator e-mail address that is
registered on this machine.
There are two ways of specifying a destination, as follows:
By specifying the other party's host name
Specify a destination's e-mail address by adding the other party's host name to the domain part of
the e-mail address. Specify the address after the @ as follows: “host name”, “. (dot)”, and “domain
name”.
xxxx@host name of the other party.domain name
For example, if the other party's e-mail address is “abc@defcompany.com” and the host name is
“HOST”:
abc@HOST.defcompany.com
By specifying the other party's IP address
Specify a destination's e-mail address by changing the domain part of the e-mail address to the
other party's IP address.
xxxx@[the other party's IP address]
For example, if the other party's e-mail address is “abc@defcompany.com” and the IP address is
“192.168.1.10”:
abc@[192.168.1.10]
Use the following procedure to bypass the SMTP server.
1. Press [Internet Fax] to switch the transmission type to Internet Fax, and then specify a
destination.
90
Specifying a Destination
2. Press [SMTP].
3. Press [No].
4. Press [OK].
• If you use [Manual Entry] to specify the destinations directly, you can also specify whether or not to
use SMTP server for each destination.
• If you use the destination list to select the destinations, the SMTP server setting specified in the
Address Book is enabled. For details about making the SMTP server settings in the Address Book,
see “Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions”, Network and System
Settings Reference.
91
1. Transmission
• To send Internet Fax documents from a computer, use LAN-Fax Driver to specify whether or not to
bypass the SMTP server. When sending with the [Use device address] check box selected, the
SMTP server setting specified on this machine is enabled.
Sending an E-mail (E-mail Destinations)
This section explains how to send a document to a computer by specifying an e-mail address.
To use e-mail transmission, specify the e-mail address in place of the fax number.
• You can also enter the e-mail address of another machine that supports Internet Fax. Note however
that only TIFF-F files can be sent by Internet Fax. Depending on the model of the destination
machine, PDF files might not be accepted.
• To send an e-mail, you must specify the sender.
• The sender must be registered in the Address Book in advance. Register his/her e-mail address and
specify “Use Name as” for [Sender] using “Address Book Management” in “System Settings”. For
details about these settings, see “Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner
Functions”, Network and System Settings Reference.
• To use an e-mail address registered in the Address Book as an e-mail destination, set “Use E-mail
Address for” as [E-mail / Internet Fax Destination]. Use the same procedure for e-mail addresses
that are registered in group destinations in the Address Book.
• E-mail transmission is performed using Memory Transmission, which automatically starts
transmission after storing documents in memory. If you switch the type of transmission to e-mail
while the machine is in Immediate Transmission mode, the transmission mode is automatically
switched to Memory Transmission.
1. Press [E-mail] to switch the transmission type to e-mail.
92
Specifying a Destination
2. To set the file type, press [File Type].
Select [TIFF] or [PDF], and then press [OK].
3. Specify the sender.
For details, see “Sender Settings”.
4. Press [Manual Entry].
93
1. Transmission
5. Enter the e-mail destination, and then press [OK].
If you enter an incorrect character, press [ ], [ ], [Backspace], or [Delete All]. Then, re-enter the
character correctly.
To change the e-mail address after pressing [OK], press [Edit Dest.], re-enter the e-mail address,
and then press [OK].
6. To add a destination, press [Add].
7. Specify the next destination.
To add another destination, repeat steps 6 and 7.
Press the transmission type tab to switch the transmission type between fax/IP-Fax, Internet Fax, email, and folder.
94
Specifying a Destination
8. Press the [Start] key.
The machine starts to scan the original and stores it in memory. When scanning ends, the
Communicating indicator lights and transmission starts.
• Depending on the security settings, [Manual Entry] might not appear and you might not be able to
enter the e-mail address.
• To select a destination from the Address Book, see “Using the Address Book to Specify
Destinations”.
• For details about text entry, see “Entering Text”, About This Machine.
• For details about canceling a transmission, see “Canceling a Transmission”.
• The Facsimile Features menu includes a user parameter setting (switch 17, bit 2) that enables you
to configure the machine to force the user to press [Add] whenever s/he specifies a destination
using a destination key. This prevents users accidentally sending documents to the wrong
destination. See “Parameter Settings”.
• If you press [Prg. Dest.], you can register an entered destination in the destination list. For details
about programming destinations, see “Registering Entered Destinations to the Address Book”.
• For the maximum number of digits that can be included in a destination, see “Maximum Values”.
• When the sender is specified, the transmission result etc. is sent to the sender's e-mail address.
• If “Auto Specify Sender Name” is set to “On” in “System Settings”, the sender is automatically
specified and you can omit the procedure for specifying a sender. If “On” is selected, the either
administrator's or this machine's e-mail address appears in the “From” field. For details about Auto
Specify Sender Name, see “File Transfer”, Network and System Settings Reference.
• If “Auto Specify Sender Name” is set to “Off” in “System Settings” and no e-mail address is
registered for the sender you specified, e-mail documents cannot be sent.
• For details about an e-mail destination, see “E-mail Transmission”.
• page 49 "E-mail Transmission"
• page 101 "Using the Address Book to Specify Destinations"
• page 116 "Registering Entered Destinations to the Address Book"
• page 140 "Sender Settings"
• page 151 "Canceling a Transmission"
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
• page 427 "Maximum Values"
95
1. Transmission
Bypassing the SMTP server
You can send e-mail documents directly to their destinations without going through the SMTP server.
Normally, e-mail is sent through the SMTP server. With this feature however, the domain part of the
destination's e-mail address is read as the SMTP server's address and transmissions bypass the SMTP
server. Since this reduces the load on the server, you can send e-mails without having to take into
account the transfer time from server to destination.
• To use this function, the following settings must be specified:
• In “System Settings”, “SMTP Server”, in “File Transfer”, set the port number to “25”.
• To specify the host name of the other party as the domain part of the e-mail address, register
the host name of the other party on the DNS server.
• For details about these settings, see “File Transfer”, Network and System Settings Reference.
• If the other party's IP address is not registered on the DNS server, specify the IP address at the
domain part of the e-mail address.
• To send a document over an IPv6 network, you must specify the other party's host name (not IP
address) as the domain part.
• To use this function, the other party's computer or server must:
• be in an environment where e-mail can be received
• be connected to the same LAN as this machine
• support SMTP reception and have its reception protocol set to SMTP
• SMTP authentication set on the other party's computer or server is disabled when e-mail is sent
using this function.
• If e-mail is sent from the other party using this function, even if reception fails, Error Mail
Notification is not sent to the sender.
• When e-mail is sent using this function, even if transmission fails, the server does not send error
notification e-mail.
• When using this function, you cannot send e-mail to the administrator e-mail address that is
registered on this machine.
There are two ways of specifying a destination, as follows:
By specifying the other party's host name
Specify a destination's e-mail address by adding the other party's host name to the domain part of
the e-mail address. Specify the address after the @ as follows: “host name”, “. (dot)”, and “domain
name”.
xxxx@host name of the other party.domain name
For example, if the other party's e-mail address is “abc@defcompany.com” and the host name is
“HOST”:
96
Specifying a Destination
abc@HOST.defcompany.com
By specifying the other party's IP address
Specify a destination's e-mail address by changing the domain part of the e-mail address to the
other party's IP address.
xxxx@[the other party's IP address]
For example, if the other party's e-mail address is “abc@defcompany.com” and the IP address is
“192.168.1.10”:
abc@[192.168.1.10]
Use the following procedure to bypass the SMTP server.
1. Press [E-mail] to switch the transmission type to e-mail, and then specify a destination.
2. Press [SMTP].
97
1. Transmission
3. Press [No].
4. Press [OK].
• If you use [Manual Entry] to specify the destinations directly, you can also specify whether or not to
use SMTP server for each destination.
• If you use the destination list to select the destinations, the SMTP server setting specified in the
Address Book is enabled.
Sending to Folder Destinations (Folder Destinations)
You can specify a folder destination by selecting a Destination key from the destination list.
• To send to a folder destination, you must first register the path for the folder in the Address Book.
You cannot enter the path on the standby display. For details about how to register a folder
destination, see “Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions”, Network and
System Settings Reference.
98
Specifying a Destination
1. Press [Folder] to switch the transmission type to folder.
2. To set the file type, press [File Type].
Select [TIFF] or [PDF], and then press [OK].
99
1. Transmission
3. Press the Destination key to specify a destination.
4. Specify the next destination.
To add another folder destination, press the next Destination key.
Press the transmission type tab to switch the transmission type between fax/IP-Fax, Internet Fax, email, and folder.
5. Press the [Start] key.
The machine starts to scan the original and stores it in memory. When scanning ends, the
Communicating indicator lights and transmission starts.
• Folder transmission is performed using Memory Transmission, which automatically starts
transmission after storing documents in memory. If you switch the type of transmission to folder
while the machine is in Immediate Transmission mode, the transmission mode is automatically
switched to Memory Transmission.
• For details about canceling a transmission, see “Canceling a Transmission”.
• The Facsimile Features menu includes a user parameter setting (switch 17, bit 2) that enables you
to configure the machine to force the user to press [Add] whenever s/he specifies a destination
using a destination key. This prevents users accidentally sending documents to the wrong
destination. See “Parameter Settings”.
• For details about a folder destination, see “Folder Transmission”.
100
Specifying a Destination
• page 53 "Folder Transmission"
• page 151 "Canceling a Transmission"
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
Using the Address Book to Specify Destinations
When destinations are programmed in a destination list, you can specify a destination by selecting a
Destination key from the destination list.
The programmed name appears on Destination key.
Press the transmission type tab to switch the transmission type between fax/IP-Fax, Internet Fax, e-mail,
and folder.
• In the destination list, program destinations in advance. For details about programming
destinations, see “Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions”, Network
and System Settings Reference.
1. Press the transmission type tab to switch the transmission type to fax/IP-Fax, Internet
Fax, e-mail, or folder.
2. Press the title word key where the desired destination is programmed.
For example, if you want to specify “NewYork Office” programmed in “LMN”, press [LMN].
101
1. Transmission
3. Press the Destination key programmed with the desired destination.
If the desired Destination key is not shown, press [ ] and [ ] to look through the list.
To cancel the selection, press the selected Destination key again. You can also press the [Clear/
Stop] key to cancel the selection.
To select more destinations, repeat steps 2 and 3.
The destination is set and the Destination key is highlighted.
4. Press the [Start] key.
• To check the contents of Destination keys, print the destination list using Print Address Book:
Destination List under System Settings. For details about the printing method, see “Administrator
Tools”, Network and System Settings Reference.
Switching the type of title in the Address Book
There are three types of titles for destination lists; “Title 1”, “Title 2”, and “Title 3”.
1. Press [Change Title].
2. Select the type of the title, and then press [OK].
Specifying Group Destinations
If you program multiple destinations into a group, you can send documents to all destinations in that
group using just a few keystrokes.
Destinations programmed in a group are indicated by a group icon
.
• In the destination list, program groups in advance. For details about programming destinations, see
“Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions”, Network and System Settings
Reference.
102
Specifying a Destination
• Group destination can be used only for Memory Transmission; it cannot be used for Immediate
Transmission. The machine automatically changes to Memory Transmission when you use group
destination.
• The total number of destinations programmed in multiple groups should not exceed the maximum
number of destinations you can specify per file, see “Maximum Values”.
1. Press the transmission type tab to switch the transmission type to fax/IP-Fax, Internet
Fax, e-mail, or folder.
2. Press the Destination key programmed with the desired group.
The destination is set and the Destination key is highlighted.
To select more groups, repeat step 2.
3. Press the [Start] key.
• To view which destinations are registered in a group, print the group list using the Print Address
Book: Destination List function under System Settings. For details about the printing method, see
“Administrator Tools”, Network and System Settings Reference.
• A confirmation message appears if the destination group includes an address that is incompatible
with the specified transmission type. Press [Select] to specify destinations where the numbers or
addresses of the specified transmission type are registered. Press [Cancel] to change the
destination.
• To cancel any destination(s) among the group, press [Expand Group Dest.] in [Check Modes].
Then, on the standby display, press [ ] and [ ] to display the desired destination, and then press
the [Clear/Stop] key. You can also cancel a transmission by pressing the highlighted Destination
key to deselect it.
• page 427 "Maximum Values"
103
1. Transmission
International TX Mode
If you set the International TX mode to [On], the machine sends faxes at lower speed. This improves the
chances of successful reception, but increases the time required for sending.
To send a fax using International TX Mode, you must first set the International TX mode to [On] and
register the destination in the Address Book. For details about how to register destinations for
International TX Mode, see “Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions”,
Network and System Settings Reference.
Selecting Destinations from Recent Destinations
The machine stores the latest destinations specified for each transmission method.
This function saves time when you are sending to the same destination repeatedly, as you do not have to
enter the destination again.
• The following kinds of destinations are not stored:
• Destinations specified using the destination list
• Destinations specified as a group destination
• Destinations specified under Memory File Transfer
• Destinations selected from Recent Destinations (regarded as already stored in memory)
• Second and later destinations broadcasted to
• Destinations specified in the LAN-Fax Driver on the computer
• Folder destination
1. Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
2. Press [Recent].
104
Specifying a Destination
3. Select the destination you want to redial to, and then press [OK].
4. Press the [Start] key.
• You can select Internet Fax, IP-Fax, and e-mail destinations from Recent Destinations as well.
• When you press [Program Dest.], you can register a selected destination in the destination list. For
details about storing a destination you selected, see “Registering Entered Destinations to the
Address Book”.
• For the maximum number of recent destinations the machine can store, see “Maximum Values”.
• You can delete destinations stored in “Recent Destinations” using the [Delete Recent Destinations]
function in the Facsimile Features menu. For details about this function, see “General Settings”.
• page 116 "Registering Entered Destinations to the Address Book"
• page 335 "General Settings"
• page 427 "Maximum Values"
Preventing Transmission to the Wrong Destination
If you want to prevent documents being sent to the wrong destination, you can configure the machine to
prompt users twice for the destination, or to display the entered destination prior to transmission.
Re-entering a fax number to confirm destination
Enter the fax number again to confirm the destination is correct.
Transmission is disabled if the confirmation fax number does not match the first fax number. This function
helps prevent users accidentally sending faxes to the wrong destination.
If you want to enable this function, contact your service representative.
105
1. Transmission
• When using this function, you must press [Manual Entry] on the standby display to enter the fax
number.
1. Press [Manual Entry].
2. Enter the fax number using the number keys, and then press [OK].
If you make a mistake, press [Clear], and then enter the number again.
3. Enter the fax number again, and then press [OK].
The destination is specified.
106
Specifying a Destination
4. Press the [Start] key.
Transmission starts.
After transmission, the standby display appears.
• If the "Entered destination is not correct." message appears, press [Exit] and check the fax number
again, and then repeat the procedure from step 1.
• Please contact your service representative if specifying the number of times (1 to 15) that the fax
number must be re-entered. Step 3 must be repeated as many times as is set here.
• You cannot edit the first fax number that is entered.
• You cannot use this function from the simplified display.
Displaying the destination prior to transmission
To prevent documents being sent to the wrong destination, you can configure the machine to display the
destination again after it has been entered and before the file is sent.
If you want to enable this function, contact your service representative.
Note that the entered destination will not be displayed again if you are sending the fax by any of the
following means:
• Scanning without entering a destination (storing documents, storing documents in Information
Boxes)
• On Hook Dial
• Manual Dial
• the simplified display
107
1. Transmission
1. Specify the destination.
If you make a mistake, press the [Clear/Stop] key, and then enter the number again.
2. Press the [Start] key.
Displays the destination and the transmission settings.
To change the destination, press [Exit], and then specify the destination again.
3. Press the [Start] key again.
Transmission starts.
After transmission, the standby display appears.
108
Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Registering Destinations in the Address Book
This section explains how to register a fax number in the Address Book.
You can register fax numbers, IP-Fax destinations, Internet Fax destinations, e-mail destinations, and
folder destinations in the Address Book. For details about how to register IP-Fax destinations, Internet
Fax destinations, e-mail destinations, and folder destinations, see “Registering Addresses and Users for
Facsimile/Scanner Functions”, Network and System Settings Reference.
You can back up the contents of the Address Book. For details about how to do this, see “Administrator
Tools”, Network and System Settings Reference.
• You can also register Address Book fax numbers, IP-Fax destinations, Internet Fax destinations, email destinations, and folder destinations to groups.
• On the facsimile initial display, press [Prg. Dest.] to display the registration screen of the Address
Book. You can register destinations on this screen.
• To register destinations, press [Prg. Dest.] after entering Fax destinations, IP-Fax destinations,
Internet Fax destinations or e-mail destinations. You cannot register folder destinations using this
screen. For details about registering folder destinations, see “Registering Addresses and Users for
Facsimile/Scanner Functions”, Network and System Settings Reference.
• In the facsimile initial display, if you change the contents of the Address Book, the “Destination list /
machine settings are updated.” message appears. Press [Exit] to bring back the facsimile initial
display.
• You can register destinations in the Address Book using Web Image Monitor. For details about
operation of Web Image Monitor, see “Monitoring and Configuring the Machine”, Network and
System Settings Reference, or, for information about the Address Book, see the Web Image
Monitor's Help.
Registering a Fax Destination
This section explains how to register a name and fax number to the Address Book.
109
1. Transmission
1. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
CCS003
2. Press [System Settings].
3. Press [Administrator Tools].
4. Press [Address Book Management].
5. Check that [Program / Change] is selected.
6. Press [New Program].
110
Registering Destinations in the Address Book
7. Press [Change] under “Name”.
The name entry display appears.
8. Enter the name, and then press [OK].
If necessary, press [Change] under “Key Display”, and then enter the name of the key to which the
destination is assigned.
9. Press the key for the classification you want to use under “Select Title”.
10. Press [Fax Dest.].
11. Press [Change] under “Fax Destination”.
12. Enter the fax number using the number keys, and then press [OK].
13. Specify the following functions for each destination, as necessary:
• Adv. Features: program SUB/SID/SEP/PWD Codes.
111
1. Transmission
• International TX Mode: set whether or not to use International TX Mode.
• Fax Header: specify the header that appears on your faxes when the receiver prints them.
• Label Insertion: specify label information such as the destination name that appears on your
faxes when the receiver prints them.
14. Press [OK].
15. Press [Exit].
16. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
• For details about the procedure in step 13, see “Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/
Scanner Functions”, Network and System Settings Reference.
Changing a Fax Destination
This section explains how to change a name and fax number registered in the Address Book.
1. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
CCS003
2. Press [System Settings].
3. Press [Administrator Tools].
4. Press [Address Book Management].
112
Registering Destinations in the Address Book
5. Check that [Program / Change] is selected.
6. Select the name whose fax destination you want to change.
Press the name key, or enter the registration number using the number keys.
7. To change the name or key display, press [Change] under “Name” or “Key Display”.
8. Enter the name or key display, and then press [OK].
9. To change the title, press the key for the classification you want to use from “Select Title”.
10. Press [Fax Dest.].
11. Press [Change] under “Fax Destination”.
12. Enter the new fax number using the number keys, and then press [OK].
13. Change the settings of “Adv. Features”, “International TX Mode”, “Fax Header”, and
“Label Insertion”, as necessary.
113
1. Transmission
14. Press [OK].
15. Press [Exit].
16. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
• For details about the procedure in step 13, see “Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/
Scanner Functions”, Network and System Settings Reference.
Deleting a Fax Destination
This section explains how to delete destination information from the Address Book.
1. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
CCS003
2. Press [System Settings].
3. Press [Administrator Tools].
4. Press [Address Book Management].
114
Registering Destinations in the Address Book
5. Press [Delete].
6. Select the name you want to delete.
Press the name key, or enter the registration number using the number keys.
7. Press [Yes].
8. Press [Exit].
9. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
Registering Destinations to the Address Book from [Prg. Dest.]
This section explains how to register a directly entered fax number, IP-Fax destination, Internet Fax
destination, e-mail destination, or folder destination to the Address Book from [Prg. Dest.].
• To use an e-mail address registered in the Address Book as an e-mail destination, specify “Use Email Address for” for [E-mail / Internet Fax Destination]. Use the same procedure for e-mail
addresses that are registered in group destinations in the Address Book.
1. Press [Prg. Dest.].
2. Enter the destination.
115
1. Transmission
3. Press [Names] and enter any necessary information.
4. Press [OK].
• For details about registering destinations, see “Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/
Scanner Functions”, Network and System Settings Reference.
• Depending on the security settings, [Prg. Dest.] might not appear and you might not be able to
register the destination.
Registering Entered Destinations to the Address Book
This section explains how to register a directly entered fax number, IP-Fax destination, Internet Fax
destination, or e-mail destination to the Address Book.
• To use an e-mail address registered in the Address Book as an e-mail destination, specify “Use Email Address for” for [E-mail / Internet Fax Destination]. Use the same procedure for e-mail
addresses that are registered in group destinations in the Address Book.
1. Press [Prg. Dest.].
116
Registering Destinations in the Address Book
2. Press [Names] and enter any necessary information.
3. Press [OK].
• For details about registering destinations, see “Registering Addresses and Users for Facsimile/
Scanner Functions”, Network and System Settings Reference.
• Depending on the security settings, [Prg. Dest.] might not appear and you might not be able to
register the destination.
117
1. Transmission
Searching for a Destination in the Address
Book
Use this function to search for a destination registered in the destination list or on the LDAP server.
• To search for a destination from an LDAP server, the LDAP server must be registered in advance.
For details about registering LDAP servers, see “Administrator Tools”, Network and System Settings
Reference.
• Press the transmission type tab on the Search Destination screen to switch the transmission type
between fax/IP-Fax, Internet Fax, e-mail, and folder.
• The search returns only destinations whose first characters match the entered characters.
• A warning message appears if the search returns more than the maximum number of destinations
you can search for at a time. Press [Exit] and change the destination name to view fewer
destinations.
• For the maximum number of destinations you can search at a time using [Search Dest.], see
“Maximum Values”.
• Although one user can program multiple e-mail addresses, only one address can be retrieved by
the search. The address retrieved by the search depends on the searching method supported by the
LDAP server. However, the address programmed first is normally retrieved.
• page 427 "Maximum Values"
Search by Destination Name
This section explains how to search for a destination registered in the Address Book by name.
1. Press [Search Dest.].
118
Searching for a Destination in the Address Book
2. Select a search destination.
To search through the Address Book, select [Address Book].
To search through an LDAP server, select the relevant LDAP server.
3. Press the transmission type tab to switch the transmission type to fax/IP-Fax, Internet
Fax, e-mail, or folder.
If you selected an LDAP server in step 2, you cannot select [Folder].
4. Press [Name].
119
1. Transmission
5. Enter the destination name you want to search for, and then press [OK].
If you enter a wrong destination name, press [ ], [ ], [Backspace], or [Delete All], and then enter
the destination name again.
6. Check the characters you have entered are correct, and then press [Start Search].
When the search is finished, a result appears.
7. Select a destination.
If the destination you require does not appear, use [ ] or [ ] to scroll through the list.
Press [Details] to display the details of a selected destination.
• For details about text entry, see “Entering Text”, About This Machine.
120
Searching for a Destination in the Address Book
Search by Fax Number/IP-Fax Destination
This section explains how to search for a destination registered in the Address Book by fax number or IPFax destination.
1. Press [Search Dest.].
2. Select a search destination.
To search through the Address Book, select [Address Book].
To search through an LDAP server, select the relevant LDAP server.
3. Press [Fax Destination].
4. Enter the number you want to search for, and then press [OK].
To search for an IP-Fax destination, enter the IP-Fax destination that you want to find.
121
1. Transmission
If you enter a wrong number, press [ ], [ ], [Backspace], or [Delete All], and then enter the
number again.
5. Check the fax numbers you have entered are correct, and then press [Start Search].
When the search is finished, a result appears.
6. Select a destination.
If the destination you require does not appear, use [ ] or [ ] to scroll through the list.
Press [Details] to display the details of a selected destination.
122
Searching for a Destination in the Address Book
Search by Internet Fax Destination
This section explains how to search for a destination registered in the Address Book by Internet Fax
destination.
1. Press [Search Dest.].
2. Select a search destination.
To search through the Address Book, select [Address Book].
To search through an LDAP server, select the relevant LDAP server.
3. Press [Internet Fax] to switch the transmission type to Internet Fax.
123
1. Transmission
4. Press [E-mail Address].
5. Enter the e-mail address (Internet Fax destination) you want to search for, and then press
[OK].
If you enter a wrong character, press [ ], [ ], [Backspace], or [Delete All], and then enter the
character again.
6. Check the characters you have entered are correct, and then press [Start Search].
When the search is finished, a result appears.
124
Searching for a Destination in the Address Book
7. Select a destination.
If the destination you require does not appear, use [ ] or [ ] to scroll through the list.
Press [Details] to display the details of a selected destination.
Search by E-mail Destination
This section explains how to search for a destination registered in the Address Book by e-mail
destination.
1. Press the [Search Dest.].
2. Select a search destination.
To search through the Address Book, select [Address Book].
To search through an LDAP server, select the relevant LDAP server.
125
1. Transmission
3. Press [E-mail] to switch the transmission type to e-mail.
4. Press [E-mail Address].
5. Enter the e-mail address (e-mail destination) you want to search for, and then press [OK].
126
Searching for a Destination in the Address Book
If you enter a wrong character, press [ ], [ ], [Backspace], or [Delete All], and then enter the
character again.
6. Check the characters you have entered are correct, and then press [Start Search].
When the search is finished, a result appears.
7. Select a destination.
If the destination you require does not appear, use [ ] or [ ] to scroll through the list.
Press [Details] to display the details of a selected destination.
Search by Folder Destination
This section explains how to search for a destination registered in the Address Book by folder
destination.
127
1. Transmission
1. Press the [Search Dest.].
2. Make sure that [Address Book] is selected.
3. Press [Folder] to switch the transmission type to folder.
128
Searching for a Destination in the Address Book
4. Press [Folder Name].
5. Enter the folder name you want to search for, and then press [OK].
If you enter a wrong character, press [ ], [ ], [Backspace], or [Delete All], and then enter the
character again.
6. Check the characters you have entered are correct, and then press [Start Search].
When the search is finished, a result appears.
129
1. Transmission
7. Select a destination.
If the destination you require does not appear, use [ ] or [ ] to scroll through the list.
Press [Details] to display the details of a selected destination.
Search Using Advanced Search
This section explains how to search for a destination registered in the Address Book by specifying search
criteria.
1. Press [Search Dest.].
2. Select a search destination.
To search through the Address Book, select [Address Book].
To search through an LDAP server, select the relevant LDAP server.
130
Searching for a Destination in the Address Book
3. Press the transmission type tab to switch the transmission type to fax/IP-Fax, Internet
Fax, e-mail, or folder.
If you selected an LDAP server in step 2, you cannot select [Folder].
4. Press [Advanced Search].
131
1. Transmission
5. Press the key for each condition, and then enter a partial string.
The following conditions can be specified for Address Book searches: Name, Fax Destination, Email Address, and Folder Name.
The following conditions can be specified for LDAP server searches: Name, Fax Destination, E-mail
Address, Company Name, and Department Name.
6. Select search criteria for each condition.
The meanings of the search criteria are as follows:
• [Beginning Word]: Search for strings that start with the specified character.
Example: When searching for “ABC”, enter “A”.
• [End Word]: Search for strings that end with the specified character.
Example: When searching for “ABC”, enter “C”.
• [Exact Match]: Search for strings that fully match the specified character.
Example: When searching for “ABC”, enter “ABC”.
• [Include one Word]: Search for strings that include the specified character.
Example: When searching for “ABC”, enter “A”, “B”, or “C”.
• [Exclude Words]: Search for strings that do not include the specified character.
Example: When searching for “ABC”, enter “D”.
• [Fuzzy Search]: Perform a fuzzy search.
This item appears when selecting an LDAP server in step 2. The performance of fuzzy search
depends on the search method supported by the LDAP server.
7. Press [OK].
132
Searching for a Destination in the Address Book
8. Press [Start Search].
When the search is finished, the search result appears.
9. Select a destination.
If the destination you require does not appear, press [ ] or [ ] to display it.
Press [Details] to display the details of a selected destination.
• You can add one additional search condition for LDAP servers by specifying the Search Options
under Program / Change / Delete LDAP Server under System Settings. See “Administrator Tools”,
Network and System Settings Reference.
• When searching via LDAP servers, the string you enter in the [Name] condition field is read as the
first or last name, depending on the administrator's setting. For example, to search for the name
“John Smith”, ask the system administrator whether you should enter “John” or “Smith”.
• For details about text entry, see “Entering Text”, About This Machine.
Search by Registration Number
This section explains how to search for a destination by specifying a registration number stored in the
destination list.
133
1. Transmission
1. Press the transmission type tab to switch the transmission type to fax/IP-Fax, Internet
Fax, e-mail, or folder.
2. Press [Reg. No.].
The registration number entry display appears.
3. Enter a registration number using the number keys, and then press [ ].
While usually a registration number is displayed in the five-digit format, you do not need to enter
the first zeros of a registration number.
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] before pressing [ ], and then try again.
4. Press [OK].
The corresponding destination appears.
134
Searching for a Destination in the Address Book
• If the "Cannot find the specified Registration No." message appears, the specified registration
number or selected type of transmission is wrong or does not exist. Press [Exit], check the
registration number again, and then follow the procedure from step 1 or 3.
135
1. Transmission
On Hook Dial
The On Hook Dial function allows you to dial while listening to the tone from the internal speaker.
You can send a fax checking the connection.
• This function is not available for Internet Fax, IP-Fax, and transmission to e-mail/folder destinations.
1. Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
2. Press [On Hook].
You will hear a low tone from the internal speaker.
If you want to cancel this operation, press [On Hook] again.
3. Dial.
The machine immediately dials the destination.
If you make a mistake, press [On Hook] or the [Clear Modes] key, and then try again.
4. When the line is connected and you hear a high-pitched tone, press the [Start] key.
5. Press [Start TX].
Transmission starts.
If you want to cancel a transmission, press the [Clear/Stop] key, and then remove the originals.
After transmission, the standby display appears.
136
On Hook Dial
• This function is unavailable in some countries.
• To select a destination from the Address Book, see “Using the Address Book to Specify
Destinations”.
• Press [Vol...] to display the Adjust Sound Volume screen, and then press [Louder] or [Lower] to
adjust the volume of the on-hook sound. The volume can also be preprogrammed in the Facsimile
Features menu.
• If you have an external telephone on the fax machine, you can speak with the other party when
you hear a voice. If you hear a voice before pressing the [Start] key, pick up the external telephone
and tell the receiver you want to send a fax document (ask them to switch to facsimile mode).
• The Facsimile Features menu contains the On Hook Mode Release Time setting, which allows you
to specify the time after which On Hook mode is deactivated. See “General Settings”.
• page 101 "Using the Address Book to Specify Destinations"
• page 335 "General Settings"
137
1. Transmission
Manual Dial
Pick up the handset of the external telephone and dial. If you hear a voice at the other end, continue
conversation as normal.
• An external telephone is required.
• This function is not available for Internet Fax, IP-Fax, and transmission to e-mail/folder destinations.
1. Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
2. Pick up the handset.
You will hear a dial tone.
3. Dial.
The machine immediately dials the destination.
If you make a mistake, replace the handset, and then try again from step 2.
4. When the line is connected and you hear a high-pitched tone, press the [Start] key to
send your fax document.
5. Press [Start TX].
If you hear a voice, tell the receiver that you want to send them a fax document (ask them to switch
to facsimile mode).
Transmission starts.
6. Replace the handset.
If you want to cancel a transmission, press the [Clear/Stop] key, and then remove the originals.
After transmission, the standby display appears.
• To select a destination from the Address Book, see “Using the Address Book to Specify
Destinations”.
138
Manual Dial
• When the operation switch is off, even if the main power switch is on, you cannot operate this
machine using only the handset of the external telephone. You must first press the operation switch
to turn on the machine.
• page 101 "Using the Address Book to Specify Destinations"
139
1. Transmission
Sender Settings
Select a user that you want to specify as a sender.
If the sender's e-mail address is registered in the destination list, the sender can receive transmission
results by e-mail.
Also, if you enable the Stamp Sender Name, the registered sender's name (user name) appears on the
receiver's sheet, lists, and report.
• You must first register the senders in the destination list using “Address Book Management” in
“System Settings” to specify their e-mail addresses, and then specify “Use Name as” for [Sender].
If you want senders to receive e-mail notification of transmission results, specify “Use Name as” for
both [Sender] and [Destination]. For details about these settings, see “Registering Addresses and
Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions”, Network and System Settings Reference.
• If user authentication is set, the user logged in is set as sender. The transmission result is sent to the
logged-in user's e-mail address.
1. Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
2. Press [Sender Name].
3. Select a sender.
To select a sender by specifying the registration number registered in the Address Book, press
[Registration No.].
140
Sender Settings
To search for a sender from the Address Book, press [Search].
If a destination protection code is set, the entry screen appears. Enter the protection code for
destination using the number keys, and then press [OK].
4. Confirm the selected sender, and then press [OK].
5. To print the sender's name on the receiver's sheet, press [Stamp Sender Name] to
highlight it.
If you enable this function, the sender's name (user name) appears on the receiver's sheet, lists, and
report.
6. To confirm the transmission results by e-mail notification, press [E-mail TX Results] to
highlight it.
If the sender's e-mail address is registered, you can send the transmission result to the registered email address.
141
1. Transmission
7. Press [OK].
The standby display appears.
To check the settings, press [Sender Name].
8. Specify the destination, and then press the [Start] key.
• You can confirm transmission results by using both the E-mail TX Results function, which sends the
results by e-mail, and the Communication Result Report printed by the machine. You can set
whether to use both of these together in User Parameter (switch 10, bit 6) in the Facsimile Features
menu. See “Parameter Settings”.
• You can use Communication Result Report, etc. to check usage status by specified users. If user
authentication is set, you can check usage by logged-in users. If User Code is set to sender, you
can count the number of uses by each user.
• To cancel the Sender Name, cancel the transmission. See “Canceling a Transmission”.
• page 151 "Canceling a Transmission"
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
142
Advanced Features
Advanced Features
This section describes how to specify a destination using advanced features.
Setting SUB Codes for Transmission
This section explains how to send a document with a SUB Code as a confidential transmission.
A SUB Code is an ID consisting of numbers, , , and spaces. Document transmitted with a SUB Code
is stored in the other party's memory, and not printed automatically. The other party inputs the SUB Code
to print the received document. Privacy can be mutually protected when transmitting a confidential
document intended for a particular receiver, since only a person who knows the SUB Code can print the
document.
Documents can also be sent via facsimiles that have the Transfer Station function.
This function helps you save costs when you send the same document to more than one place in a distant
area, and saves time since many documents can be sent in a single operation.
• Documents can be sent to facsimiles that have the Personal Box function.
• A SUB Code cannot be used with Internet Fax, e-mail transmission, and folder transmission.
• To use this function, set [SUB Code Transmission] to on. For details about [SUB Code Transmission],
see “SUB Code Transmission”.
• Obtain the SUB Code of the other party in advance.
• When sending a confidential document, inform the other party of the SUB Code in advance.
1. Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
2. Press [TX Mode].
143
1. Transmission
3. Press [Option Setting].
4. Press [SUB Code Transmission].
5. Press [OK] twice.
The standby display appears.
6. Enter the fax number of a destination or an IP-Fax destination.
7. Press [Adv.Features].
8. Make sure that [SUB Code] is selected.
9. Press [Transmission SUB Code].
144
Advanced Features
10. Enter a SUB Code, and then press [OK].
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] before pressing [OK], and then try again.
11. When a password is required, press [Password (SID)], enter the password with the
number keys, and then press [OK].
12. Press [OK].
13. Press the [Start] key.
If you use Immediate Transmission and the fax machine at the destination does not support the SUB
Code function, a message will appear on the display to inform you of this. When this happens,
press [Exit] to cancel the transmission.
• Make sure the number of digits in the SUB Code matches the specification of the machine to which
you are sending. For the maximum number of digits for the SUB Code of this machine, see
“Maximum Values”.
• You can store SUB Codes as well as names and fax numbers in the destination list and Keystroke
Programs. For registering into the destination list, see “Registering Addresses and Users for
Facsimile/Scanner Functions”, Network and System Settings Reference. For registering into the
Keystroke Programs, see “Registering and Changing Keystroke Programs”.
• When a SUB Code is stored in the destination list, the SUB Code can be modified or deleted after
selecting a destination using the Destination keys.
• The SUB Code is printed on lists and reports.
• page 183 "SUB Code Transmission"
• page 414 "Registering and Changing Keystroke Programs"
• page 427 "Maximum Values"
145
1. Transmission
Setting a password
There are times when you may want to use an “SID” (Sender ID) when sending confidential faxes with
the SUB Code function.
When you use a Transfer Box that has a password, enter the SID Code as the password.
• For the maximum number of digits for the SID Code, see “Maximum Values”.
• You can enter numbers,
,
, and spaces.
• You can store SID Codes as well as names and fax numbers in the destination list and Keystroke
Programs. For registering into the destination list, see “Registering Addresses and Users for
Facsimile/Scanner Functions”, Network and System Settings Reference. For registering into the
Keystroke Programs, see “Registering and Changing Keystroke Programs”.
• The SID Code is printed on lists and reports.
• page 414 "Registering and Changing Keystroke Programs"
• page 427 "Maximum Values"
Setting SEP Codes for Reception
This section explains how to enter a SEP Code to request the destination to transmit a document.
You can receive a document stored in the destination's memory if the document has the same SEP Code
as the SEP Code you entered.
This function enables the machine to receive documents from multiple destinations.
• Documents can be received from facsimiles that have Information Boxes.
• A SEP Code cannot be used with Internet Fax and e-mail.
• To use this function, set [SEP Code Reception] to on. For details about [SEP Code Reception], see
“SEP Code Reception”.
146
Advanced Features
1. Press [TX Mode].
2. Press [Option Setting].
3. Press [SEP Code Reception].
4. Press [OK] twice.
The standby display appears.
5. Enter the fax number of a destination or an IP-Fax destination.
147
1. Transmission
6. Press [Adv.Features].
7. Make sure that [SEP Code] is selected.
8. Press [Reception SEP Code].
9. Enter a SEP Code, and then press [OK].
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] before pressing [OK], and then try again.
10. When a password is required, press [Password (PWD)], enter the password using the
number keys, and then press [OK].
11. Press [OK].
12. Press the [Start] key.
• Make sure the number of digits in the SEP Code matches the specification of the machine from
which you are receiving. For the maximum number of digits for the SEP Code of this machine, see
“Maximum Values”.
• You can enter numbers,
,
, and spaces.
• You can store SEP Codes as well as names and fax numbers in the destination list and Keystroke
Programs. For registering into the destination list, see “Registering Addresses and Users for
Facsimile/Scanner Functions”, Network and System Settings Reference. For registering into the
Keystroke Programs, see “Registering and Changing Keystroke Programs”.
• When a SEP Code is stored in the destination list, the SEP Code can be modified or deleted after
selecting a destination using the Destination keys.
148
Advanced Features
• The SEP Code is printed on lists and reports.
• page 184 "SEP Code Reception"
• page 414 "Registering and Changing Keystroke Programs"
• page 427 "Maximum Values"
Entering a password
There are times you may want to use a password when receiving faxes by SEP Code Reception.
• For the maximum number of digits for the PWD Code, see “Maximum Values”.
• You can enter numbers,
,
, and spaces.
• You can store PWD Codes as well as names and fax numbers in the destination list and Keystroke
Programs. For registering into the destination list, see “Registering Addresses and Users for
Facsimile/Scanner Functions”, Network and System Settings Reference. For registering into the
Keystroke Programs, see “Registering and Changing Keystroke Programs”.
• The PWD Code is printed on lists and reports.
• page 414 "Registering and Changing Keystroke Programs"
• page 427 "Maximum Values"
SEP Code RX Reserve Report
This report is printed after SEP Code Reception is set up.
You can use this report to check the reservations for SEP Code Reception.
• You can turn this function on or off with the User Parameter (switch 03, bit 3) in the Facsimile
Features menu.
• If user authentication is set, you can select whether to display a destination with the User Parameter
(switch 04, bit 4) in the Facsimile Features menu.
• If user authentication is set, you can select whether to display a sender name with the User
Parameter (switch 04, bit 5) in the Facsimile Features menu.
• For details about Parameter Setting, see “Parameter Settings”.
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
149
1. Transmission
SEP Code RX Result Report
This report is printed after each SEP Code Reception is completed and shows its result.
If E-mail TX Results is programmed in a Quick Operation Key, you can select whether a report e-mail is
sent after reception. For details about Quick Operation Key, see “General Settings”.
• You can turn this function on or off with the User Parameter (switch 03, bit 4) in the Facsimile
Features menu.
• If user authentication is set, you can select whether to display a destination with the User Parameter
(switch 04, bit 4) in the Facsimile Features menu.
• If user authentication is set, you can select whether to display a sender name with the User
Parameter (switch 04, bit 5) in the Facsimile Features menu.
• For details about Parameter Setting, see “Parameter Settings”.
• You can also check the result of a SEP Code Reception with the Journal.
• To view the report without text disruption, select a font of even character width in your e-mail
application's settings.
• page 335 "General Settings"
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
150
Canceling a Transmission
Canceling a Transmission
This section explains how to cancel a fax transmission.
• Remember that the Communicating indicator turns off almost immediately when an Internet Fax, email transmission, or folder transmission is being executed.
Before the Original Is Scanned
Use this procedure to cancel a transmission before pressing the [Start] key.
1. Press the [Clear Modes] key.
CCV004
• When originals are placed into the ADF, you can cancel transmission simply by removing them.
While the Original Is Being Scanned
Use this procedure to cancel a transmission while the originals are being scanned after the [Start] key
has been pressed.
151
1. Transmission
1. Press the [Clear/Stop] key.
CCV005
The machine stops scanning.
• Scanning may be completed while you are performing the cancel operation.
While the Original Is Being Transmitted
This section explains how to cancel a transmission while the Communicating indicator is lit.
1. Press the [Clear/Stop] key.
CCV005
The screen shown in step 2 can also be displayed by pressing [Check / Stop Transmission File]
under [Change TX / Info].
152
Canceling a Transmission
2. Select the file you want to cancel.
If the desired file is not shown, press [ ] or [ ] to find it.
There are cases when a destination may not be selected as the destination appears as “ ”,
depending on the security settings.
3. Press [Stop Transmission].
4. Press [OK].
To cancel another file, repeat steps 2 through 4.
To cancel stopping transmission, press [Cancel].
153
1. Transmission
5. Press [Exit].
After pressing [Check / Stop Transmission File] under [Change TX / Info] in step 1, press [Exit]
twice.
The standby display appears.
• If you cancel a document while it is being sent, the transmission is halted as soon as you finish the
cancellation procedure. However, some pages of the document may already have been sent and
received at the other end.
• If the transmission finishes while you are carrying out this procedure, it will not be canceled.
• If multiple destinations were specified, only one destination number appears.
Before the Transmission Is Started
Use this procedure to cancel a transmission after the original is scanned.
This function is useful to cancel a transmission when you notice a mistake in destination or with the
originals after storing. To cancel Memory Transmission, search for the file to be canceled among the files
stored in memory, and then delete it.
You can cancel transmission of a file while the file is being sent, stored in memory, or fails to transmit. All
the scanned data is deleted from memory.
• This function is unavailable with Immediate Transmission.
154
Canceling a Transmission
1. Press [Change TX / Info].
2. Press [Check / Stop Transmission File].
The list of stored files being transmitted or waiting for transmission appears.
To display only the files being sent, press [Files under TX].
3. Select the file you want to cancel.
If the desired file is not shown, press [ ] or [ ] to find it.
There are cases when a destination may not be selected as the destination appears as “ ”,
depending on the security settings.
155
1. Transmission
4. Press [Stop Transmission].
5. Press [OK].
To cancel another file, repeat steps 3 through 5.
To cancel stopping transmission, press [Cancel].
6. Press [Exit] twice.
The standby display appears.
• To delete some destinations from a broadcast, see “Deleting a Destination from a Broadcast”.
• If you cancel a transmission while the file is being sent, some pages of your file may have already
been sent and is received at the other end.
156
Canceling a Transmission
• If the transmission finishes while you are carrying out this procedure, transmission cannot be
canceled.
• If multiple destinations were specified, only the number of the destinations that have not received
the document you sent is shown.
• If multiple destinations were specified, only one destination number appears. To display all
destinations, press [Check / Change Settings].
• page 223 "Deleting a Destination from a Broadcast"
157
1. Transmission
Confirming a Transmission
Check the contents of a file that is stored in memory and not yet sent.
1. Press [Change TX / Info].
2. Press [Check / Stop Transmission File].
3. Select a file to check.
If multiple destinations were specified, only the name of the destination you specify first and only
the number of destinations that have not received the document you sent are shown.
158
Confirming a Transmission
4. Press [Check / Change Settings].
5. Confirm a transmission, and then press [Exit].
6. Press [Exit] twice.
The standby display appears.
• You cannot view or edit a file that is in the process of being sent or a file that was sent by LAN-Fax
and is stored in memory.
159
1. Transmission
Checking the Storage Result (Memory Storage
Report)
This report is printed after an original is stored in memory. It helps you review the contents and the
destinations of stored originals.
• If you use Parallel Memory Transmission, the Memory Storage Report is not printed.
• You can turn this report on and off with the User Parameter (switch 03, bit 2) in the Facsimile
Features menu.
• Even if the machine is set up not to print this report, it is still printed if an original could not be
stored.
• You can select whether to include part of the original image on the report with the User Parameter
(switch 04, bit 7) in the Facsimile Features menu.
• If user authentication is set, you can select whether to display a destination with the User Parameter
(switch 04, bit 4) in the Facsimile Features menu.
• If user authentication is set, you can select whether to display a sender name with the User
Parameter (switch 04, bit 5) in the Facsimile Features menu.
• For details about Parameter Setting, see “Parameter Settings”.
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
160
Changing the Default Functions of the Fax's Initial Display
Changing the Default Functions of the Fax's
Initial Display
You can specify the default values of document transmission function settings.
“Default” refers to the value of a setting on the initial display when the machine is first turned on or when
modes are cleared.
The following procedure allows you to specify the default values only of settings that can be changed
from the initial display.
You can specify default values for the following settings:
Memory Transmission/Immediate Transmission, transmission type, Original Type, Resolution, Scan Size,
Auto Density, Manual Density, Original Orientation, Original Settings, Select Line, Send Later,
Reception Notice, BCC Transmission, E-mail TX Results, Text, Standard Message, Label Insertion,
Closed Network, SUB Code Transmission, SEP Code Reception, Fax Header Print, TX Status Report,
Store File, File Type, Preview before transmission
1. On the initial display, configure a setting with the default value you want to specify.
2. Press the [Program] key.
CCU003
3. Press [Program as Defaults].
4. Press [Program].
161
1. Transmission
5. When a confirmation message appears, press [Yes].
The value currently specified for the setting becomes the default.
• To restore the factory default settings for the settings on the initial display, press [Restore Factory
Defaults].
• You can set the default settings of the normal and simplified screens separately.
162
2. Other Transmission Features
This section explains functions you can apply using the [TX Mode] setting, such as Sending at a Specific
Time (Send Later) and Label Insertion. [TX Mode] allows you to use various functions with transmissions.
Sending at a Specific Time (Send Later)
(mainly Europe and Asia)
Using this function, you can instruct the machine to delay transmission of your fax document until a
specified later time.
This allows you to take advantage of off-peak telephone charges without having to be by the machine at
the time.
• If the machine is switched off for about one hour, all fax documents stored in memory are lost. If
documents are lost for this reason, a Power Failure Report is automatically printed when the
operation switch is turned on. Use this report to check the list of lost documents. See “Turning Off
the Main Power / In the Event of Power Failure”, Troubleshooting.
• This function is unavailable with Immediate Transmission. Use Memory Transmission.
1. Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
2. Press [TX Mode].
163
2. Other Transmission Features
3. Press [Send Later].
4. Enter the time (24 hour format) using the number keys, and then press [OK].
When entering numbers smaller than 10, add a zero at the beginning.
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] before pressing [OK], and then try again.
To cancel Send Later, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of step 3.
The specified time is shown above the highlighted [Send Later].
5. Press [OK].
The standby display appears.
To check the settings, press [TX Mode].
6. Specify a destination, and then press the [Start] key.
• You can specify a time within 24 hours of the current time.
• If the current time shown is not correct, change it using [Set Time] under [System Settings]. For
details about the setting, see “Timer Settings”, Network and System Settings Reference.
• You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this function. Using the
Quick Operation Key allows you to omit step 2 and 5. For details about Quick Operation Key, see
“General Settings”.
• You can cancel the transmission setup for Send Later. See “Canceling a Transmission”.
164
Sending at a Specific Time (Send Later)
(mainly Europe and Asia)
• page 151 "Canceling a Transmission"
• page 335 "General Settings"
165
2. Other Transmission Features
Sending at a Specific Time (Send Later)
(mainly North America)
Using this function, you can instruct the machine to delay transmission of your fax document until a
specified later time.
This allows you to take advantage of off-peak telephone charges without having to be by the machine at
the time.
• If the machine is switched off for about one hour, all fax documents stored in memory are lost. If
documents are lost for this reason, a Power Failure Report is automatically printed when the
operation switch is turned on. Use this report to check the list of lost documents. See “Turning Off
the Main Power / In the Event of Power Failure”, Troubleshooting.
• This function is unavailable with Immediate Transmission. Use Memory Transmission.
1. Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
2. Press [TX Mode].
3. Press [Send Later].
166
Sending at a Specific Time (Send Later)
(mainly North America)
4. Enter the time using the number keys and select [AM] or [PM]. Then press [OK].
When entering numbers smaller than 10, add a zero at the beginning.
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] before pressing [OK], and then try again.
To cancel Send Later, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of step 3.
The specified time is shown above the highlighted [Send Later].
5. Press [OK].
The standby display appears.
To check the settings, press [TX Mode].
6. Specify a destination, and then press the [Start] key.
• You can specify a time within 24 hours of the current time.
• If the current time shown is not correct, change it using [Set Time] under [System Settings]. For
details about the setting, see “Timer Settings”, Network and System Settings Reference.
• You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this function. Using the
Quick Operation Key allows you to omit step 2 and 5. For details about Quick Operation Key, see
“General Settings”.
• You can cancel the transmission setup for Send Later. See “Canceling a Transmission”.
• page 151 "Canceling a Transmission"
• page 335 "General Settings"
167
2. Other Transmission Features
Requesting a Reception Notice
You can confirm sent documents were properly received using e-mail or the Journal.
The receiver sends back a reception notice message. Once the reception notice message is received,
“OK” appears in the Result column of the Journal, allowing the originator to verify the transmission was
received.
• The Reception Notice feature is only available if the receiver supports MDN (Message Disposition
Notification).
1. Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
2. Specify the sender.
For details, see “Sender Settings”.
3. Press [TX Mode].
4. Press [Reception Notice] to highlight it.
5. Press [OK].
The standby display appears.
To check the settings, press [TX Mode].
6. Specify a destination, and then press the [Start] key.
168
Requesting a Reception Notice
• If the Internet Fax or e-mail is not received normally, “Error” appears in the Result column.
• Only the last 50 communications appear in the Journal. If you do not receive a reception notice
message before the last 50 communications are finished, “OK” might not be printed in the Journal's
Result column. This may happen even if the mail is received normally at the other end.
• If you specify mailing list addresses, do not set for Reception Notice. Otherwise, you will receive
multiple reception notice messages from e-mail recipients, and the Result column will be overwritten
each time a new notice message is received. However, if you receive a reception notice message
indicating an error, “Error” appears in the Result column and will not be overwritten, even if you
subsequently receive a reception notice message as “OK” following the error message.
• Reception notice results are only shown in the Journal. The Result column in all other files, lists, and
transmission reports show “--”.
• Reception notice messages themselves are not recorded in the Journal.
• You can select whether or not to print the Reception Notice. This can be set with User Parameter
(switch 21, bit 0) in the Facsimile Features menu. See “Parameter Settings”.
• You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this function. Using the
Quick Operation Key allows you to omit steps 3 and 5. For details about Quick Operation Key,
see “General Settings”.
• You cannot broadcast Internet Fax or e-mail using Reception Notice. The documents are sent to the
destinations in the order in which they were specified.
• page 140 "Sender Settings"
• page 335 "General Settings"
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
169
2. Other Transmission Features
Setting an Internet Fax/E-mail Destination as a
BCC
E-mail is sent to all specified Internet Fax or e-mail destinations as bcc.
1. Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
2. Specify the sender.
For details, see “Sender Settings”.
3. Press [TX Mode].
4. Press [BCC Transmission] to highlight it.
5. Press [OK].
The standby display appears.
To check the settings, press [TX Mode].
6. Specify a destination, and then press the [Start] key.
• You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this function. Using the
Quick Operation Key allows you to omit steps 3 and 5. For details about Quick Operation Key,
see “General Settings”.
170
Setting an Internet Fax/E-mail Destination as a BCC
• page 140 "Sender Settings"
• page 335 "General Settings"
171
2. Other Transmission Features
Confirming Transmission Results by E-mail
Use this function to confirm the transmission results by sending an e-mail notification to the specified
destination.
• Register the e-mail address of the destination for e-mail notification in the destination list in
advance.
1. Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
2. Specify the sender.
For details, see “Sender Settings”.
3. Press [TX Mode].
4. Press [E-mail TX Results].
172
Confirming Transmission Results by E-mail
5. Select the destination of notification, and then press [OK].
If you make a mistake, before pressing [OK], press [Clear] or press the selected Destination key
again to turn the highlight off.
[E-mail TX Results] gets highlighted and the destination of notification selected appears.
6. Press [OK].
The standby display appears.
To check the settings, press [TX Mode].
7. Specify a destination, and then press the [Start] key.
• You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this function. Using the
Quick Operation Key allows you to omit steps 3 and 6. For details about Quick Operation Key,
see “General Settings”.
• page 140 "Sender Settings"
• page 335 "General Settings"
173
2. Other Transmission Features
Entering the Subject
Allows you to enter a subject for the Internet Fax or e-mail document you want to send.
1. Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
2. Specify the sender.
For details, see “Sender Settings”.
3. Press [TX Mode].
4. Press [Subject].
5. Enter the subject.
174
Entering the Subject
6. To enter the character strings programmed in the machine, press [User Text], and then
select the character strings you want to enter.
7. Press [OK].
The entered subject appears in the Subject field.
8. Press [OK].
The standby display appears.
9. Specify a destination, and then press the [Start] key.
• For convenience, program frequently-used subjects in advance in “Program / Change / Delete
User Text” in “System Settings”. For details about the programming method, see “General
Features”, Network and System Settings Reference.
• If you send Internet Fax or e-mail without setting a subject, a subject is automatically inserted. For
details about how the subject is automatically inserted, see “Specifying Auto-Generated Subjects
for E-mail” and “Received images”.
• You cannot send a subject only as Internet Fax or e-mail without an original.
• For details about text entry, see “Entering Text”, About This Machine.
• You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this function. Using the
Quick Operation Key allows you to omit steps 3 and 8. For details about Quick Operation Key,
see “General Settings”.
• For the maximum number of characters for an e-mail subject, see “Maximum Values”.
175
2. Other Transmission Features
• page 140 "Sender Settings"
• page 176 "Specifying Auto-Generated Subjects for E-mail"
• page 199 "Received images"
• page 335 "General Settings"
• page 427 "Maximum Values"
Specifying Auto-Generated Subjects for E-mail
If you do not enter a subject when sending e-mail, a subject will be auto generated. This section explains
how to specify the content of auto-generated subjects.
Subjects differ depending on Stamp Sender Name settings. For details about using the Stamp Sender
Name function, see “Sender Settings”.
When Stamp Sender Name is set to on:
From Sender Name (Fax Message NO.xxxx)
When Stamp Sender Name is set to off:
• If Own Fax Number and Own Name are programmed:
From “Own Fax Number” (“Own Name”) (Fax Message NO.xxxx)
• If only Own Fax Number is programmed:
From “Own Fax Number” (Fax Message NO.xxxx)
• If only Own Name is programmed:
From “Own Name” (Fax Message NO.xxxx)
• If neither Own Fax Number nor Own Name are programmed:
Fax Message NO.xxxx
• “xxxx” is the document number that appears in the Journal.
• page 140 "Sender Settings"
176
Entering the Text
Entering the Text
Allows you to enter the text for the Internet Fax or e-mail document you want to send.
• Program text strings in advance in “Program / Change / Delete E-mail Message” in “System
Settings”. For details about the programming method, see “File Transfer”, Network and System
Settings Reference.
1. Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
2. Specify the sender.
For details, see “Sender Settings”.
3. Press [TX Mode].
4. Press [Text].
177
2. Other Transmission Features
5. Select a text, and then press [OK].
6. Press [OK].
The standby display appears.
7. Specify a destination, and then press the [Start] key.
• You cannot send text only without an original.
• You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this function. Using the
Quick Operation Key allows you to omit steps 3 and 6. For details about Quick Operation Key,
see “General Settings”.
• page 140 "Sender Settings"
• page 335 "General Settings"
178
Transmission Options
Transmission Options
This section describes various functions that you can switch on and off for any particular transmission,
following the procedures given here.
Standard Message Stamp
Use this function to stamp a standard message at the top of the first original sent.
There are four types of standard messages: “Confidential”, “Urgent”, “Please phone”, and “Copy to
corres. Section”
You can also program other messages.
• While this function is in use, the third line of the Label Insertion is not printed.
• When there is an image around the area where the standard message is to be stamped, that image
is deleted.
1. Place the originals, and then select the scan settings you require.
2. Press [TX Mode].
3. Select [Option Setting].
4. Press [Standard Message].
179
2. Other Transmission Features
5. Select the standard message to be stamped, and then press [OK].
The selected standard message is shown above the highlighted [Standard Message].
6. Press [OK] twice.
7. Specify the destination, and then press the [Start] key.
The machine cannot stamp multiple standard messages.
• To print a standard message that is not programmed as a default, program it in advance in
“Program / Change / Delete Standard Message” in the Facsimile Features menu. For details
about the programming method, see “Send Settings”.
• You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this function. Using the
Quick Operation Key allows you to omit steps 2, 3, and 6. For details about Quick Operation Key,
see “General Settings”.
• page 335 "General Settings"
• page 339 "Send Settings"
Label Insertion
With this function you can have the receiver's name printed on the document that is received at the other
end.
• To use this function, set Label Insertion to [On] when registering fax destinations in the Address
Book, and also set “Label Insertion” to on when sending fax documents.
• When there is an image around the area where the Label is to be printed, that image is deleted.
The receiver's name is printed as follows:
• Receiver's name: printed at the top of the page and preceded by “To:”.
• Standard message: the programmed message is printed within the next two lines.
180
Transmission Options
Set this function as follows:
• Set Label Insertion to [On] when programming fax destinations.
• Set Label Insertion to on when sending fax documents.
• On the Standard Message screen, select the standard message you want to print.
1. Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
2. Press [TX Mode].
3. Select [Option Setting].
4. Press [Label Insertion] to highlight it.
To cancel Label Insertion, press [Label Insertion] again.
5. Press [OK] twice.
6. Specify the destination, and then press the [Start] key.
• To print a standard message that is not programmed as a default, program it in advance in
“Program / Change / Delete Standard Message” in the Facsimile Features menu. For details
about the programming method, see “Send Settings”.
• You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this function. Using the
Quick Operation Key allows you to omit steps 2, 3, and 5. For details about Quick Operation Key,
see “General Settings”.
181
2. Other Transmission Features
• page 335 "General Settings"
• page 339 "Send Settings"
Closed Network
Transmission will only take place if the destination's Closed Network Code is the same as yours.
This function can stop you accidentally sending information to the wrong place.
• You must program a Closed Network Code beforehand, using Program Closed Network Code
under Facsimile Features. For details about the programming method, see “Initial Settings”.
• This function is not available with Internet Fax, e-mail transmission, and folder transmission.
1. Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
2. Press [TX Mode].
3. Select [Option Setting].
4. Press [Closed Network] to highlight it.
To cancel a Closed Network Transmission, press [Closed Network] again.
5. Press [OK] twice.
182
Transmission Options
6. Specify the destination, and then press the [Start] key.
• You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this function. Using the
Quick Operation Key allows you to omit steps 2, 3, and 5. For details about Quick Operation Key,
see “General Settings”.
• page 335 "General Settings"
• page 347 "Initial Settings"
SUB Code Transmission
Enable this function to perform SUB Code Transmission.
• This function is not available with Internet Fax, e-mail transmission, and folder transmission.
• To perform SUB Code Transmission, a SUB Code must be set in [Adv.Features], the Address Book,
or Keystroke Programs in advance. Even though “SUB Code Transmission” is set to on, if the SUB
Code is not appended to the specified destination, transmission is in standard fax mode.
• When you select a destination that has a registered SUB Code from the Address Book, if “SUB
Code Transmission” is set to off, the SUB Code is not appended and transmission is in standard fax
mode.
1. Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
2. Press [TX Mode].
3. Select [Option Setting].
183
2. Other Transmission Features
4. Press [SUB Code Transmission] to highlight it.
To cancel a SUB Code Transmission, press [SUB Code Transmission] again.
5. Press [OK] twice.
6. Specify the destination, and then press the [Start] key.
• For details about specifying SUB Codes, see the following:
• To specify SUB Codes in “Adv.Features”, see “Setting SUB Codes for Transmission”.
• To register SUB Codes in the Address Book, see “Registering Addresses and Users for
Facsimile/Scanner Functions”, Network and System Settings Reference.
• To register SUB Codes in Keystroke Programs, see “Registering and Changing Keystroke
Programs”.
• You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this function. Using the
Quick Operation Key allows you to omit steps 2, 3, and 5. For details about Quick Operation Key,
see “General Settings”.
• page 143 "Setting SUB Codes for Transmission"
• page 335 "General Settings"
• page 414 "Registering and Changing Keystroke Programs"
SEP Code Reception
Enable this function to perform SEP Code Reception.
• This function is not available with Internet Fax and e-mail.
• To perform SEP Code Reception, a SEP Code must be set in [Adv.Features], the Address Book, or
Keystroke Programs in advance. Otherwise, even if “SEP Code Reception” is set to on, reception is
not performed.
184
Transmission Options
• When you select a destination that has a registered SEP Code from the Address Book, if “SEP
Code Reception” is set to off, the SEP Code is not appended and transmission is in standard fax
mode.
1. Press [TX Mode].
2. Select [Option Setting].
3. Press [SEP Code Reception] to highlight it.
To cancel SEP Code Reception, press [SEP Code Reception] again.
4. Press [OK] twice.
5. Specify the destination, and then press the [Start] key.
• For details about specifying SEP Codes, see the following:
• To specify SEP Codes in “Adv.Features”, see “Setting SEP Codes for Reception”.
• To register SEP Codes in the Address Book, see “Registering Addresses and Users for
Facsimile/Scanner Functions”, Network and System Settings Reference.
• To register SEP Codes in Keystroke Programs, see “Registering and Changing Keystroke
Programs”.
• You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this function. Using the
Quick Operation Key allows you to omit steps 1, 2, and 4. For details about Quick Operation Key,
see “General Settings”.
185
2. Other Transmission Features
• page 146 "Setting SEP Codes for Reception"
• page 335 "General Settings"
• page 414 "Registering and Changing Keystroke Programs"
Fax Header Print
(mainly Europe and Asia)
When the Fax Header is set to on, the stored name is printed on the receiver's paper.
In some cases, you may want the other party to receive an unmarked copy of your original. To do this,
switch Fax Header off.
You can store two Fax Headers; “First Name” and “Second Name”.
For example, if you store your department name in one and your organization name in the other, you
could use the first when sending internal faxes and the second for external faxes.
1. Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
2. Press [TX Mode].
3. Select [Option Setting].
4. Make sure that [Fax Header Print] is highlighted.
To cancel Fax Header Print, press [Fax Header Print] to turn the highlight off.
186
Transmission Options
5. Press [OK] twice.
6. Specify the destination, and then press the [Start] key.
• You can program fax header names using the Program Fax Information function in the Facsimile
Features menu. For details about the programming method, see “Registering Fax Information”.
• You can select whether or not dates, fax header names, file numbers, or page numbers are printed
by changing their respective User Parameters (switch 18, bit 3, 2, 1, 0) in the Facsimile Features
menu. See “Parameter Settings”.
• If you used the number keys to specify the receiver, the first header name is printed on the receiver's
paper. To print the second header name, contact your service representative.
• You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this function. Using the
Quick Operation Key allows you to omit steps 2, 3, and 5. For details about Quick Operation Key,
see “General Settings”.
• page 335 "General Settings"
• page 371 "Registering Fax Information"
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
Fax Header Print
(mainly North America)
When the Fax Header is set to on, the stored name is printed on the receiver's paper.
You can store two Fax Headers; “First Name” and “Second Name”.
For example, if you store your department name in one and your organization name in the other, you
could use the first when sending internal faxes and the second for external faxes.
• In the USA, the Fax Header must contain the telephone number of the line your machine is
connected to. It will be printed on the header of every page you send. Required in the USA.
1. Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
187
2. Other Transmission Features
2. Press [TX Mode].
3. Select [Option Setting].
4. Make sure that [Fax Header Print] is highlighted.
5. Press [OK] twice.
6. Specify the destination, and then press the [Start] key.
• You can program fax header names using the Program Fax Information function in the Facsimile
Features menu. For details about the programming method, see “Registering Fax Information”.
• You can select whether or not dates, fax header names, file numbers, or page numbers are printed
by changing their respective User Parameters (switch 18, bit 3, 2, 1, 0) in the Facsimile Features
menu. See “Parameter Settings”.
• If you used the number keys to specify the receiver, the first header name is printed on the receiver's
paper. To print the second header name, contact your service representative.
• You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this function. Using the
Quick Operation Key allows you to omit steps 2, 3, and 5. For details about Quick Operation Key,
see “General Settings”.
• In the USA, law requires that your telephone number be included in the Fax Header. Register the
telephone number (own fax number) and switch on Fax Header Print with User Parameters (switch
18, bit 1) in the Facsimile Features menu.
188
Transmission Options
• page 335 "General Settings"
• page 371 "Registering Fax Information"
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
189
2. Other Transmission Features
190
3. Reception
This section explains reception and reception functions such as printing received documents or routing
received documents to other fax machines.
Types of Reception
This section explains different ways of receiving fax documents.
Immediate Reception
Each page of a fax document is printed as soon as it is received. This method is used for standard fax
documents.
Receiver
(This machine)
Sender
BZR040
• When receiving important fax documents, it is recommended that you confirm the contents of the
received documents with the senders.
• The machine may not be able to receive fax documents when free memory space is low.
• If free memory reaches 0% during Immediate Reception, any further reception becomes impossible
and the current communication is terminated.
• Reception is always by Immediate Reception unless “Combine Two Originals” or [2 Sided Print] is
set to “On”, or [Reception File Print Quantity] is set to “2” or higher, in which cases the machine
switches to Memory Reception.
• If the Substitute Reception is used, a fax document is not printed: it is stored in memory.
• This machine supports Standard, Detail, Fine (with the optional expansion memory), and Super
Fine (with the optional expansion memory) resolutions for reception. If you do not have the optional
expansion memory, faxes sent at Super Fine resolution is printed on your machine at Detail
resolution. This may differ from the sender's intended resolution.
191
3. Reception
Memory Reception
The machine waits until all pages of the document have been received into memory before printing it.
Sender
Receiver
(This machine)
BZR041
• If there is a power failure (the main power switch is turned off) or the machine is unplugged for
about one hour, all the documents stored in memory are deleted. As soon as the main power
switch is turned on, the Power Failure Report is printed to help you check the list of deleted files.
Simply turning off the power by pressing the operation switch does not delete stored documents.
See “Turning Off the Main Power / In the Event of Power Failure”, Troubleshooting.
• The machine might not be able to receive large numbers of documents or documents with high data
content. If this is the case, we recommend that you set “Reception File Print Quantity” to “1” and
disable “Combine Two Originals” or “2 Sided Print”. Alternatively, install the optional expansion
memory.
• The machine may not be able to receive fax documents when free memory space is low.
• If free memory reaches 0% during Memory Reception, any further reception becomes impossible
and the current communication is terminated.
• Reception is always by Immediate Reception unless “Combine Two Originals” or [2 Sided Print] is
set to “On”, or [Reception File Print Quantity] is set to “2” or higher, in which cases the machine
switches to Memory Reception.
• If you have selected Store for Reception File Setting in the Facsimile Features menu, received
document is saved on the hard disk and will not be printed. You can print those documents by
operating the machine or a connected computer, as necessary.
Substitute Reception
Substitute Reception is used when the machine cannot print any fax documents.
192
Types of Reception
In Substitute Reception, a received fax document is stored in memory instead of being printed. Fax
documents received using Substitute Reception are automatically printed when the condition which
caused the machine to use Substitute Reception is rectified.
Depending on why the machine cannot print, Substitute Reception might be used for all fax documents
received, or for only those documents that match a condition specified in the User Parameters in the
Facsimile Features menu.
The Receive File indicator lights to let you know when fax documents have been received using
Substitute Reception.
CCV001
• Reception may not take place if there is not enough free memory.
• If free memory reaches 0% during Substitute Reception, any further reception becomes impossible
and the current communication is terminated.
• When a fax document is received after [Store] is selected for Reception File Setting in the Facsimile
Features menu, the Receive File indicator lights. For details about Reception File Setting, see
“Reception File Setting”.
• The Receive File indicator may light even when receiving documents using Immediate Reception.
• page 360 "Reception File Setting"
Receiving documents unconditionally
When faxes cannot be printed as normal, Substitute Reception allows fax reception. This section
describes the conditions under which this will occur.
If one of the conditions in the following list occurs, the machine receives all fax documents using
Substitute Reception.
193
3. Reception
Problems
Causes
Solutions
The machine is printing with a
different function.
The machine is busy printing
with a different function.
The document is automatically
printed after the current job
finishes.
The message "Output Tray is
full." "Remove paper." appears.
The output tray is full.
Remove paper from the output
tray.
The cover is open.
Close the cover shown in the
display.
is lit.
Receiving documents according to parameter-specified settings
When faxes cannot be printed as normal, Substitute Reception allows reception of faxes that match the
criteria specified in User Parameters. This section describes the conditions under which this will occur.
If any of the conditions listed below applies, the machine receives only faxes that match the criteria
specified in User Parameters.
Problems
is lit.
Causes
Paper is jammed.
Solutions
Remove the jammed paper.
For details about removing the paper, see “Removing
Jammed Paper”, Troubleshooting.
is lit.
is lit.
All trays are out of
paper.
Add paper.
Toner is empty.
Replace the print cartridge.
For details about adding paper, see “Adding Paper”,
About This Machine.
For details about replacing the print cartridge, see
“Replacing the Consumables”, About This Machine.
The message "This
tray is out of order."
appears.
The tray is out of
order.
Call your service representative.
In User Parameters (switch 05, bit 2, 1) on the Facsimile Features menu, specify the following conditions
for Substitute Reception:
• When Own Name or Own Fax Number is received
The machine switches to Substitute Reception only when the sender has programmed their Own
Name or Own Fax Number. If the power is switched off for more than an hour, all the documents
194
Types of Reception
stored in memory are deleted. In this case, the Journal can be used to identify the senders of the
deleted documents, so you can ask them to resend.
If a sender has not programmed their Own Name or Own Fax Number, the machine may fail to
receive an important fax document. It is recommended that you ask important senders to program
an Own Name or Own Fax Number in advance.
• Free
The machine switches to Substitute Reception regardless of whether or not the sender has
programmed their Own Name or Own Fax Number.
• Closed Network Code match
The machine switches to Substitute Reception only when the programmed Closed Network Code of
the other end matches the Closed Network Code of this machine.
• Disable
The machine does not receive any documents.
• For details about Parameter Setting, see “Parameter Settings”.
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
195
3. Reception
Reception Modes
There are two ways you can set up the machine to handle incoming calls.
• Manual Reception (an external telephone required)
• Auto Reception
The reception mode can be switched under Switch Reception Mode in the Facsimile Features menu. See
“Reception Settings”.
• An external telephone is required to use this machine as a telephone.
• page 342 "Reception Settings"
Manual Reception
When a telephone call comes in, the machine rings. If the call is a fax document, you must switch
manually to facsimile mode.
1. When the machine rings, pick up the handset of the external telephone.
2. If you hear beeps, press the [Start] key, or hold the [Facsimile] key down for a few
seconds. (The [Start] key is only available in facsimile mode when an original is not
placed.)
3. If you pressed the [Start] key in step 2, press [Start RX].
4. Replace the handset of the external telephone. The machine will start receiving.
• When the operation switch is off, even if the main power switch is on, you cannot operate this
machine using only the handset of the external telephone. You must first press the operation switch
to turn on the machine.
Auto Reception
When a telephone call comes in, the machine automatically receives it as a fax document.
Use this setting on a dedicated fax line.
196
Receiving E-mail
Receiving E-mail
This section explains this machine's e-mail reception functions.
If a TIFF-F file is attached to an e-mail, the machine receives the e-mail by Internet Fax. If a JPEG or PDF
file is attached to an e-mail, the machine receives the e-mail by Mail to Print.
Only one attached file can be printed from a received e-mail.
When multiple files are attached to an e-mail, the reception method and the file that is printed vary
according to the file type and the order of the attached files.
File type attached
File to be printed
Reception method
Text
Text
Internet Fax
Text TIFF
Text TIFF
Internet Fax
Text JPEG
JPEG
Mail to Print
Text TIFF JPEG
JPEG
Mail to Print
Text JPEG TIFF
JPEG
Mail to Print
TIFF TIFF ....
TIFF TIFF ....
Internet Fax
JPEG(1) JPEG(2) ....
JPEG(1)
Mail to Print
TIFF JPEG
JPEG
Mail to Print
JPEG TIFF
JPEG
Mail to Print
Text PDF
PDF
Mail to Print
TIFF PDF
PDF
Mail to Print
JPEG PDF
JPEG
Mail to Print
PDF JPEG
PDF
Mail to Print
PDF(1) PDF(2) ....
PDF(1)
Mail to Print
If JPEG or PDF files are attached along with other types of file, the machine receives the e-mail by Mail
to Print. Only the first JPEG or PDF file is printed and the other files are deleted.
• If Reception Protocol is set to POP3 or IMAP4, you can use the E-mail Storage in Server (in System
Settings) to configure the machine to either retain or delete the received e-mail from the server. See
“File Transfer”, Network and System Settings Reference.
197
3. Reception
• To specify whether or not the machine prints the header (title) and text (body) of each e-mail it
receives, use Parameter Setting (switch 21 bit 5) in Facsimile Features. See “Parameter Settings”.
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
Receiving Internet Fax Documents
You can receive e-mail documents by Internet Fax.
There are two methods of receiving e-mail: Auto E-mail Reception and Manual E-mail Reception.
You can print, store, and transfer received files.
The following functions cannot be used with Internet Fax:
Immediate Reception, SEP Code Reception, Closed Network Code, Resolution setting, Memory Lock
Reception, Authorized Reception
• If [Require Secure Password Authentication (SPA) for all client connections] is selected in Windows
Server 2003/2003 R2/2008/2008 R2, reception is not possible.
• With User Parameter (switch 21, bit 1) in the Facsimile Features menu, you can have the machine
send the return receipt in response to the reception notice request attached to the sent e-mail. See
“Parameter Settings”.
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
Auto e-mail reception
When this function is turned on, the machine periodically checks the e-mail server for incoming e-mail
and downloads it as necessary.
• If memory runs out, e-mail will not be received at the specified intervals. Reception will resume
when sufficient memory becomes available.
• E-mail auto-reception should be set in “System Settings”. When you select auto-reception, set the
reception interval in minutes under E-mail Reception Interval, in System Settings. See “File
Transfer”, Network and System Settings Reference.
• E-mail can also be received manually. For details about the manual reception, see “Manual e-mail
reception”.
198
Receiving E-mail
• page 199 "Manual e-mail reception"
Manual e-mail reception
Use this function to receive an e-mail by accessing the e-mail server manually.
• Program the Manual E-mail RX function to a Quick Operation Key beforehand. For details about
Quick Operation Key, see “General Settings”.
1. Press [Manual E-mail RX].
The machine accesses the server to check for e-mail and receives any new e-mail.
2. Check the message, and then press [Exit].
The standby display appears.
• page 335 "General Settings"
Received images
Here is an example of an Internet Fax document sent from this machine and received on a computer
using the Outlook Express e-mail application.
199
3. Reception
The received image varies according to the e-mail application.
• When Internet Fax e-mail is sent to computer, the following information is always inserted in the email text: “This E-mail was sent from “Host Name” (product name) Queries to: “Administrator's email address”” To check the machine's host name and administrator's e-mail address, use Host
Name or Administrator's E-mail Address under System Settings. For details about Host Name and
Administrator's E-mail Address, see “System Settings”, Network and System Settings Reference.
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
BZR050
1. E-mail transmitted without specifying a subject in “TX Mode”.
2. E-mail transmitted with a subject specified in “TX Mode”.
3. From
The name (e-mail address) of the sender
200
Receiving E-mail
4. Date
The date and time of e-mail transmission
5. To
The e-mail address of the recipient
6. Subject
Shows the subject specified in “TX Mode” at the time of transmission. If no subject is specified, one is
automatically assigned in the format shown in 1 above.
7. The message is inserted in all e-mail. “xxxx” is the machine name.
8. Attachment File
Any document included by the sender is displayed as an attached document.
• The display format of the sender name differs according to that of the Stamp Sender Name setting
and other functions.
• The display format of the subject varies according to Stamp Sender Name and other settings. For
the format of the subject, see “Specifying Auto-Generated Subjects for E-mail”.
• page 176 "Specifying Auto-Generated Subjects for E-mail"
Mail to Print
JPEG or PDF files that are attached to e-mails are printed using the Mail to Print function.
The reception method for e-mail is the same as the method for Internet Fax. For details about reception
methods, see “Auto e-mail reception” and “Manual e-mail reception”.
Mail to Print is not available with the following functions:
Checkered Mark, TSI Print (Transmitting Subscriber Identification Print), Reception Time, Auto Fax
Reception Power-Up, Memory Lock, Multi-Copy Reception, Program Special Sender, Resolution, Page
Separation and Length Reduction, Centre Mark, Image Rotation, 2 Sided Print, Specify Tray for Lines,
Tray Shift, Paper Tray, Communication Page Count, Forwarding, Auto Paper Select function, Printing on
paper from the bypass tray, Just size printing
• Version 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, and 1.7 PDF files are printable. However, this machine might not be
able to print PDF files if they were sent from certain machines or created in certain environments.
• Only JPEG files that are in JFIF format are compatible. This machine cannot print Exif format JPEG
images captured by digital cameras, but it can print JFIF format JPEG images created on multifunction peripherals. However, this machine might not be able to print JPEG images if they were
sent from certain machines or created in certain environments.
201
3. Reception
• The Facsimile Features menu provides a user parameter setting (switch 21, bit 2) that you can use
to enable or disable this function. Text and TIFF files will still be printed even if this function is
disabled.
• If a JPEG or PDF file is received when the Mail to Print function is disabled, the file will be detected
as an error and Error Mail Notification is sent back to the sender. You can turn this function on or
off with the User Parameter (switch 21, bit 7) in the Parameter Settings.
• For details about Parameter Setting, see “Parameter Settings”.
• Only one attached file can be printed from a received e-mail. If multiple JPEG or PDF files are
attached, the first JPEG or PDF file is printed and the other files are deleted.
• If an e-mail contains multiple or unsupported files, its reception result is detected as an error, but an
error notification is not sent to the sender.
• Printing is in black and white even if the image that is received contains color.
• Printed JPEG images and PDF files are counted as printer jobs.
• If an encrypted PDF is received, the PDF file is printed only if its password matches this machine's
password.
• You can check the results of Mail to Print reception using the Journal. In the Journal, “P.1” is always
printed in the number of pages column and “S”, which indicates the Standard resolution, is always
printed in the communication mode column regardless of the actual page/resolution. If the
machine receives files that are unprintable due to their format, “error” will be printed in the result
column.
• When receiving by Mail to Print, this machine does not respond to reception notification requests
attached to the received e-mail.
• page 198 "Auto e-mail reception"
• page 199 "Manual e-mail reception"
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
202
Reception Functions
Reception Functions
This section explains useful functions for receiving fax documents.
Routing Received Documents
This section describes how to route received documents using SUB Codes.
• If the receiver is an Internet Fax/e-mail destination, e-mail can be encrypted and forwarded with a
digital signature. Use both “Box Setting” on the Facsimile Features menu and Web Image Monitor
to specify whether or not to apply encryption and a digital signature. For details about Box Setting,
see “General Settings” and “Box Settings”.
• page 335 "General Settings"
• page 398 "Box Settings"
Routing received documents with SUB Code
This machine can route received documents using SUB Codes.
When a document is received, its SUB Code is compared to SUB Codes programmed in Personal
Boxes, and if a match is found, the document is routed to the destination whose SUB Code is specified.
CCV012
203
3. Reception
• You must set the Personal Box and register a delivery destination beforehand. Personal Boxes can
be programmed in “Box Setting” in the Facsimile Features menu. For details about the
programming method, see “Box Settings”.
• This function is not available when you set received documents to be delivered to the network
delivery server. Use the Fax RX File Transmission in System Settings to configure delivery of
received documents. For details about Fax RX File Transmission, see “File Transfer”, Network and
System Settings Reference.
• If the destination specified is an e-mail address, the received document is routed to that destination
as e-mail.
• You cannot specify a group as the receiver.
• You can route documents received from any fax machine, regardless of manufacturer.
• page 398 "Box Settings"
Transferring Received Documents
The machine can transfer received documents by using SUB Codes.
Originals sent with a SUB Code that matches the SUB Code programmed as a Transfer Box are
received then relayed to the programmed receiver.
• Transfer Boxes and Receiving Stations must be set up in order to transfer received documents.
Transfer Boxes can be programmed in “Box Setting” in the Facsimile Features menu. For details
about the programming method, see “Box Settings”.
• If the destination specified is an e-mail address, the received document is transferred to that
destination as e-mail.
• If the receiver is an Internet Fax/e-mail destination, e-mail can be encrypted and forwarded with a
digital signature. Use both “Box Setting” on the Facsimile Features menu and Web Image Monitor
to specify whether or not to apply encryption and a digital signature. For details about Box Setting,
see “General Settings” or “Box Settings”.
• Transfer results are not sent back to the requesting party.
• You can transfer data received from any fax machine, regardless of manufacturer.
• The Facsimile Features menu provides a user parameter setting (switch 32, bit 0) that allows you to
select a priority order for alternative destinations for sent documents. When this parameter is set, if
204
Reception Functions
the specified receiver is a group destination that includes an address not registered for the specified
transmission type, the document is routed to an alternative destination. See “Parameter Settings”.
• page 335 "General Settings"
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
• page 398 "Box Settings"
SUB Code Transfer Report
You can check the results of transmission to Receiving Stations. The machine prints this report when it has
finished transmitting to Receiving Stations.
• You can select whether the SUB Code Transfer Report be automatically printed using the User
Parameter (switch 04, bit 1) in the Facsimile Features menu.
• You can set whether a portion of the original image is printed on the report with the User Parameter
(switch 04, bit 7) in the Facsimile Features menu.
• For details about Parameter Setting, see “Parameter Settings”.
• “Unprogrammed” indicates the document could not be sent because the end receiver is not
programmed.
• “--” indicates that the e-mail or Internet Fax document was sent to the mail server programmed in
this machine.
• For the maximum number of destinations you can register in a group, see “Maximum Values”.
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
• page 427 "Maximum Values"
Forwarding Received Documents
This machine can forward received documents to other destinations programmed in this machine.
205
3. Reception
CCV013
• To use this function, specify the Forwarding destination in advance. Forwarding can be specified
under Forwarding on the Facsimile Features menu. See “Forwarding”.
• A fax destination, IP-Fax destination, Internet Fax destination, e-mail destination, or folder
destination can be set as a forwarding destination.
• If the receiver is an Internet Fax/e-mail destination, e-mail can be encrypted and forwarded with a
digital signature. Use both “Forwarding” on the Facsimile Features menu and Web Image Monitor
to specify whether or not to apply encryption and a digital signature. See “Forwarding”.
• If you would like the machine to forward received documents to a particular destination according
to the sender, specify the Forwarding destination for each sender under Facsimile Features,
Program Special Sender. Documents from other senders are forwarded to the default Forwarding
destination specified for this function. For details about Program Special Sender, see “Special
Senders to Treat Differently”.
• You can set whether or not the Folder Transfer Result Report is transmitted to the specified e-mail
address if folders are programmed as the forwarding destinations to which documents are sent
from all senders or Special Senders.
• For the maximum number of destinations you can register in a group, see “Maximum Values”.
• With “Reception File Setting” of “Facsimile Features”, you can specify whether or not to print or
store forwarded documents with User Parameter (switch 11, bit 6) in the Facsimile Features menu.
206
Reception Functions
• The Facsimile Features menu provides a user parameter setting (switch 32, bit 0) that allows you to
select a priority order for alternative destinations for sent documents. When this parameter is set, if
the specified receiver is a group destination that includes an address not registered for the specified
transmission type, the document is routed to an alternative destination.
• User Parameters (switch 37, bit 4) on the Facsimile Features menu allows you to include the
sender's name in the names of files sent to folders.
• Garbling of the file name and data loss can result if the receiver's operating system cannot accept
certain characters in file names. To prevent this, use User Parameters (switch 37, bit 5) to limit the
file names to plain characters only.
• If you limit file names to plain characters only but errors still occur, disable display of the sender's
name in the file name of documents forwarded to folders.
• For details about Parameter Setting, see “Parameter Settings”.
• page 355 "Forwarding"
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
• page 385 "Special Senders to Treat Differently"
• page 427 "Maximum Values"
SMTP Reception of E-mail
You can receive a document sent by e-mail, using SMTP reception.
With SMTP reception, e-mail is received as soon as it is sent to the e-mail address set by the machine.
CCV014
207
3. Reception
• Set this machine beforehand using the MX record of the DNS server to enable SMTP reception.
• Use the Reception Protocol setting in System Settings to set the reception protocol. See “File
Transfer”, Network and System Settings Reference.
• You can route received e-mail to other fax machines as well.
• Even if SMTP reception is enabled on the DNS server, e-mail sent from the SMTP server will not be
received and the machine reports an error if SMTP reception is not set under “System Settings”.
Also, the SMTP server sends error notification e-mail to the originator.
• If an error occurs while receiving e-mail, reception is aborted, the e-mail is deleted, and Error
Report is printed. Also, the SMTP server will send error notification e-mail to the originator.
• When the SMTP server attempts to route received documents to this machine while the machine is
transmitting e-mail, the machine will respond to the SMTP server with a “busy” signal. Then, the
SMTP server usually tries resending the documents until the set timeout.
Routing e-mail received via SMTP
E-mail received via SMTP can be routed to other fax machines.
fax=2125671234@aaa.abcdcompany.com
Host name: aaa
Domain name: abcdcompany.com
CCV015
208
Reception Functions
• Before routing e-mail received via SMTP, you first must set “SMTP RX File Delivery Settings” to
“On” in the Facsimile Features menu. See “SMTP Reception File Delivery Settings”.
• Depending on security settings, this function may not be available.
The originator can request transfer of e-mail sent to another fax machine by specifying the e-mail
address as follows:
Fax Number
fax=destination fax number@host name of this machine.domain name
Example: to transfer to fax number 212-567-1234:
fax= 2125671234@aaa.abcdcompany.com
Single destination programmed in the destination list
fax= registration number of 5 digits or less@host name of this machine.domain name
Example: to transfer to the destination number 00001:
fax= 00001@aaa.abcdcompany.com
Group destination programmed in the destination list
fax=
registration number of 5 digits or less@host name of this machine.domain name
Example: to transfer to the destination programmed under group number 00004:
fax=
00004@aaa.abcdcompany.com
• E-mail received via SMTP can also be routed to single or group destinations programmed in the
destination list.
• If the receiver is an Internet Fax/e-mail destination, e-mail can be encrypted and routed with a
digital signature. Use both “SMTP RX File Delivery Settings” on the Facsimile Features menu and
Web Image Monitor to specify whether or not to apply encryption and a digital signature. For
details about SMTP RX File Delivery Settings, see “SMTP Reception File Delivery Settings”.
• If an e-mail transfer request is received when the “SMTP RX File Delivery Settings” is “Off” in the
Facsimile Features menu, this machine responds with an error message to the SMTP server.
• You can make settings that limit transfer to specified originators.
• Using this function, you can also send documents from your e-mail application to e-mail addresses
and G3 fax machines' destinations through this machine simultaneously.
• For the maximum number of destinations you can register in a group, see “Maximum Values”.
• The Facsimile Features menu provides a user parameter setting (switch 32, bit 0) that allows you to
select a priority order for alternative destinations for sent documents. When this parameter is set, if
the specified receiver is a group destination that includes an address not registered for the specified
transmission type, the document is routed to an alternative destination. See “Parameter Settings”.
209
3. Reception
• page 365 "SMTP Reception File Delivery Settings"
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
• page 427 "Maximum Values"
JBIG Reception
If you use JBIG (Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group) compression, you can send photographic originals
faster than with other methods of compression. It allows you to receive documents sent in the JBIG format
through JBIG Transmission.
• This function is not available with Internet Fax and Mail to Print functions.
Auto Fax Reception Power-Up
This machine can be set to shut down automatically if no one has used it for a while. In these situations,
even though the operation switch is off, the machine can still receive incoming documents as long as the
main power switch is on.
• Reception is not possible if both the operation switch and main power switch are turned off.
• You can set whether documents are printed as soon as they are received (Immediate Reception)
with the User Parameter (switch 14, bit 0) in the Facsimile Features menu. See “Parameter
Settings”.
• You can also have fax documents received by Memory Reception (Substitute Reception) printed
after the machine is turned on.
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
210
Printing Options
Printing Options
This section explains useful functions for printing received documents.
Print Completion Beep
When this function is turned on, the machine beeps to let you know when a received document is
printed.
• You can alter the volume of the beep or turn it off completely using “Adjust Sound Volume” in the
General Settings (set the volume to the minimum level). See “Adjusting the Volume”,
Troubleshooting.
Checkered Mark
When this function is turned on, a Checkered Mark is printed on the first page of fax documents to help
you separate them.
BZR017
• You can turn this function on or off using Checkered Mark in the Facsimile Features menu. See
“Reception Settings”.
• page 342 "Reception Settings"
Centre Mark
When this function is enabled, marks are printed halfway down the left side and at the top center of
each page received.
211
3. Reception
This makes it easy for you to position a hole puncher correctly when you file received documents.
BZR018
• The Centre Mark may deviate a little from the exact center of the edge. See “Reception Settings”.
• You can enable or disable this function using Centre Mark in the Reception Settings.
• page 342 "Reception Settings"
Reception Time
You can have the date, time, and file number printed at the bottom of the document when it is received.
• You can turn this function on or off using Print Reception Time in the Facsimile Features menu. See
“Reception Settings”.
• When a received document is split and printed on two or more sheets, the reception time is printed
on the last sheet.
• The time when the document was printed can also be recorded on the document. If you need this
function, contact your service representative.
• page 342 "Reception Settings"
Two-Sided Printing
You can have a received document printed on both sides of a sheet.
212
Printing Options
BZR004
• To use this function, all pages of the received document must be of the same size-inform the
sending party of this beforehand if necessary. You must also have paper set in the machine of the
same size as that sent by the sending party. In Two-Sided Printing, this machine will correctly
receive in A4 (81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 11 ). The following table shows the results that can be
achieved when receiving with this machine.
Originals
Top binding
Side binding
CFH004
• This function works only when all pages are of the same width and received into memory.
• This function cannot be used with Combine Two Originals.
• You can turn this function on or off using 2 Sided Print in the Facsimile Features menu. For details,
see “Reception Settings”.
• Printouts may vary depending on how the sender sets the originals.
• You can select to have documents only from selected senders printed in this way.
• Stored documents of the same size are printed on the same paper. Some stored documents may be
unavailable for this printing option.
• page 342 "Reception Settings"
213
3. Reception
180-degree rotation printing
When printing on both sides of the paper, this machine rotates images as shown in the diagram.
BZR019
Multi-Copy Reception
If you switch this function on, multiple copies of each incoming fax document is printed.
You can also select to have multiple copies made of documents from particular senders.
BZR020
• The maximum number of copies that can be made for each document is 10.
• When using the Multi-copy function with specified senders, the maximum number of copies is 10.
• You can turn this function on or off using Reception File Print Quantity in the Facsimile Features
menu. For details, see “Reception Settings”.
• The machine will use Memory Reception for Multi-copy Reception.
• page 342 "Reception Settings"
214
Printing Options
Image Rotation
If you have set paper in the orientation in the paper tray, incoming fax documents are automatically
rotated to fit onto the paper.
This machine
BZR042
• If you specified a tray for “Paper Tray” in the Facsimile Features menu, the paper loaded in the
specified tray is selected.
Combine Two Originals
When two documents of the same size and orientation are received consecutively, they are printed on a
single sheet when you turn this function on. This can help you economize on paper.
• This function does not work with documents larger than A5 or 81/2 × 51/2 . When A5 or
81/2 × 51/2 size paper is loaded in the machine, each page of the received document is printed
on a single sheet. When A5 or 81/2 × 51/2 size paper is loaded in the machine, each page
of the received document is rotated and printed on a single sheet.
• If paper matching the size and orientation of a received document is available, Combine Two
Originals is not possible.
• If Combine Two Originals and 2 Sided Print are selected at the same time, 2 Sided Print takes
priority and Combine Two Originals is canceled.
215
3. Reception
BZR001
• Two A5 documents are rotated and printed side by side on a sheet of A4 .
• Two 81/2 × 51/2 documents are rotated and printed side by side on a sheet of 81/2 × 11 .
• You can turn this function on or off with the User Parameter (switch 10, bit 1) in the Facsimile
Features menu. The default setting is “Off”. See “Parameter Settings”.
• This function uses Memory Reception.
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
Page Separation and Length Reduction
If the size of a received document is longer than the paper loaded in the machine, each page of the
document can be split and printed on several sheets, or reduced and printed on a single sheet.
(Document)
BZR043
For example, this function splits the document if the document length is 20 mm (0.79 inches) or longer
than the paper used. The document is reduced if it is less than 20 mm (0.79 inches). When a document
is split, an asterisk ( ) is inserted at the split position and about 10 mm (0.39 inches) of the split area is
duplicated on the top of the second sheet.
216
Printing Options
• Your service representative can customize this function with the following settings:
• Reduction
• Print split mark
• Overprinting
• Overprinting length
• Guideline for split
• You can adjust the overprinting and reduction lengths within the following ranges:
• Overprinting length: 4 mm (0.16 inches), 10 mm (0.39 inches), 15 mm (0.59 inches)
• Guideline for split: 5 155 mm (5 mm steps)/0.2 6.1 inches (0.2 inches steps)
TSI Print (Transmitting Subscriber Identification Print)
You can have the sender's Own Name or Own Fax Number printed on documents that this machine
receives.
Usually the sender's Fax Header is printed on received documents. When you receive an Internet Fax
document, the e-mail address of the sender is printed. If the sender has not programmed their Fax
Header, you will not be able to identify them. However, if you turn this function on, the sender's Own
Name or Own Fax Number is printed instead so you can find out where the document came from.
• You can turn this function on or off in the User Parameter (switch 02, bit 3) in the Facsimile Features
menu. See “Parameter Settings”.
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
If There Is No Paper of the Correct Size
If there is no paper in the machine that matches the size of a received document, the machine will
choose a paper size based on the paper available.
This function is available only if the following settings are made:
• Reduction in Sub-scan Direction: Enabled
• Page Separation Threshold: 20 mm (0.79 inches)
• Width or Length Priority: Width
If you have not set the same size paper in the paper tray, incoming fax documents are printed on the
nearest size available.
217
3. Reception
(mainly Europe and Asia)
For example, if your machine does not have A5 loaded and you receive an A5 size document, the
document is printed on A4. If your machine does not have A4 loaded and you receive an A4 size
document, the document is printed on two sheets of A5.
(mainly North America)
For example, if your machine does not have 81/2 × 11 loaded and you receive an 81/2 × 11 size
document, the document is printed on 81/2 × 14. If your machine does not have 81/2 × 14 loaded and
you receive an 81/2 × 14 size document, the document is printed on two sheets of 81/2 × 11.
• The document is split over two sheets of paper depending on the paper size. See “Page Separation
and Length Reduction”.
• Paper placed in the bypass tray is not usually selected for printing a received document. However,
you can use this tray if you select the bypass tray as the main paper tray using Reception with
Specified Senders.
• Widths that this machine can receive are A4 and 81/2 × 11. Any documents narrower than A4 or
81/2 × 11 are received at A4 or 81/2 × 11 width. The length of documents depends on the
document.
• The paper size used to print a received document may be different from the size of the sent original.
• page 216 "Page Separation and Length Reduction"
Setting priority trays
With the same size of paper loaded into multiple trays, you can make the machine use one tray for one
function and another tray for another function.
For example, you may load white A4 paper into tray 1 to use when making copies, and yellow A4
paper into tray 2 to use when printing received faxes. You can then easily identify for which purpose
paper has been output. You can perform this setting in “Paper Tray Priority: Facsimile” in “System
Settings”. See “Tray Paper Settings”, Network and System Settings Reference.
• When a different size of document from the priority tray is received, the tray containing the same
size of paper as the received document is used.
Just size printing
If you enable this function, received documents are printed on the sheet that has the highest priority.
This function is enabled with User Parameter (switch 05, bit 5) in the Facsimile Features menu. See
“Parameter Settings”.
218
Printing Options
If the paper tray is not stocked with paper of a suitable size to print a received document, a message
appears on the display prompting you to load paper of the required size. When you have loaded new
paper, press [Exit] to print the document.
• After pressing [Exit], procedure varies depending on machine status when the message occurred.
• If any received documents or reports were being printed automatically, the printer
automatically continues printing from where it left off.
• If any documents or reports were being printed manually, the printer does not resume printing.
Perform the operation from the beginning again.
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
Having incoming documents printed on paper from the bypass tray
You can print documents sent from Specified Senders on paper from the bypass tray.
In “Program Special Sender” in the Facsimile Features menu, set as follows:
• Program a special sender and select the Bypass Tray for the paper tray type.
• Turn on the “Special Reception Function” in “Initial Set Up”.
• Specify a paper size in “Bypass Tray Paper Size” in “Initial Set Up”.
For details about Program Special Sender, see “Special Senders to Treat Differently”.
• You can load a maximum of 100 sheets of standard paper in the bypass tray.
• You can use a size of paper not loaded in the paper tray(s) in the bypass tray.
• When you load paper in the bypass tray, specify the paper size. The sizes that can be specified as
the standard sizes are: A4 , A5
, B5 JIS (81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/4 ×
1
1
13 , 8 × 13 , 5 /2 × 8 /2
, 16K ). When you load any other size, specify the paper size in
“Custom Size”. However, if the size of the paper on the bypass tray does not match the specified
paper size, a message will appear on the display prompting you to load paper of the specified
size. When you have loaded the paper, press [Exit] to print the document.
219
3. Reception
• Documents printed on paper smaller than A4 may be shortened, or split across sheets.
• Paper longer than 900 mm (35.43 inches) may be creased, not sent, or jam.
• Print area depends on optional expansion memory, resolution, and vertical length of originals.
• If you use this function, Image Rotation and 180-degree rotating printing are not possible.
• page 385 "Special Senders to Treat Differently"
220
Where Incoming Documents Are Delivered - Output Tray
Where Incoming Documents Are Delivered Output Tray
You can specify the output tray or output position to facilitate separation of received documents.
Specifying Tray for Lines
Use this function to specify the output tray for each line port.
You can specify the document feeding tray for each port (telephone, Internet Fax, IP-Fax). You can also
set the machine to output Internet Fax documents and ordinary faxes onto different trays.
• This function is available on type 2 model only.
• To use this function, specify the port and destination using [Specify Tray for Lines] in the Facsimile
Features menu. For details about the setting, see “Reception Settings”.
• page 342 "Reception Settings"
Tray Shift
Use this function to shift the output position for each document, so you can separate received documents
easily.
When the finisher unit is selected for fax output, you can use the Tray Shift function whenever a fax or
report is printed.
This is useful for separating faxes stacked in the finisher output tray. For example, if the previous
incoming fax was output to the left, the next incoming fax will be output to the right and vice-versa.
• This function is available on type 3 model only.
• You can turn this function on or off with the User Parameter (switch 19, bit 0) in the Facsimile
Features menu. See “Parameter Settings”.
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
221
3. Reception
222
4. Changing/Confirming
Communication Information
This section explains the features of [Change TX / Info], which you can use to confirm communication
results on the screen or printed reports.
Changing the Settings of Files in Memory
After you have pressed the [Start] key (after scanning originals), you can check and edit the destination
or settings of Memory Transmission. You can also cancel a transmission, change the settings of a
transmission, print a stored file, print a list of stored files, and resend a file which the machine failed to
transmit.
• If the "No transmission files found." message appears on the screen after you press [Check / Stop
Transmission File], no files are being stored or sent by Memory Transmission.
• You cannot view or edit files that are in the process of being sent, files sent by LAN-Fax, or files
saved for printing as reports.
• There are cases when a destination may not be selected as the destination appears as “ ”,
depending on the security settings.
Deleting a Destination from a Broadcast
You can delete selected broadcasting destinations.
• If you delete a destination that is the only destination for a transmission, the transmission is
canceled.
1. Press [Change TX / Info].
223
4. Changing/Confirming Communication Information
2. Press [Check / Stop Transmission File].
3. Select the file from which you want to delete a destination.
4. Press [Check / Change Settings].
224
Changing the Settings of Files in Memory
5. Press [Change] for the destination you want to delete.
If you delete a folder destination, press [Delete], and then press [Yes] on a confirmation message
screen. Proceed to step 7.
6. Press the [Clear/Stop] key to delete the destination, and then press [OK].
CCV005
Pressing the [Clear/Stop] key deletes by single digits the fax number or IP-Fax address. The
Internet Fax destination or e-mail destination can be entirely deleted at once by pressing the
[Clear/Stop] key.
7. Press [Exit].
To delete another destination, repeat from step 3.
8. Press [Exit] twice.
The standby display appears.
Adding a Destination
You can add a destination for broadcasting.
225
4. Changing/Confirming Communication Information
1. Press [Change TX / Info].
2. Press [Check / Stop Transmission File].
3. Select the file to which you want to add a destination.
226
Changing the Settings of Files in Memory
4. Press [Check / Change Settings].
5. Press [Add Destination].
6. Specify the destination using the number keys or Destination keys, and then press [OK].
Press the transmission type tab to switch the transmission type between fax/IP-Fax, Internet Fax, email, or folder.
If you specify a sender whose e-mail address is already registered, you can add Internet Fax
destinations and e-mail destinations.
You can add a folder destination only with Destination keys.
You can also program a SUB Code or SEP Code by pressing [Adv.Features].
7. Press [Exit].
Repeat from step 3, if you want to add another destination.
227
4. Changing/Confirming Communication Information
8. Press [Exit] twice.
The standby display appears.
• You cannot add a destination if you have disabled broadcasting.
Changing the Transmission Time
(mainly Europe and Asia)
You can change the transmission time specified with Send Later.
You can also delete the transmission time. If the transmission time is deleted, the file is transmitted
immediately.
1. Press [Change TX / Info].
2. Press [Check / Stop Transmission File].
228
Changing the Settings of Files in Memory
3. Select the file for which you want to change or cancel the transmission time.
4. Press [Check / Change Settings].
5. Press [Change TX Time].
If you press [Transmit Now], the file is transmitted immediately. However, if there is a file on
standby, that file is sent first.
229
4. Changing/Confirming Communication Information
6. Press [Clear], re-enter the transmission time using the number keys, and then press [OK].
7. Press [Exit].
Repeat from step 3, if you want to change another transmission time.
8. Press [Exit] twice.
The standby display appears.
Changing the Transmission Time
(mainly North America)
You can change the transmission time specified with Send Later.
You can also delete the transmission time. If the transmission time is deleted, the file is transmitted
immediately.
1. Press [Change TX / Info].
230
Changing the Settings of Files in Memory
2. Press [Check / Stop Transmission File].
3. Select the file for which you want to change or cancel the transmission time.
4. Press [Check / Change Settings].
231
4. Changing/Confirming Communication Information
5. Press [Change TX Time].
If you press [Transmit Now], the file is transmitted immediately. However, if there is a file on
standby, that file is sent first.
6. Press [Clear], re-enter the transmission time using the number keys, and select [AM] or
[PM]. Then press [OK].
7. Press [Exit].
Repeat from step 3, if you want to change another transmission time.
8. Press [Exit] twice.
The standby display appears.
Changing the SMTP Server Setting
You can change the settings for whether or not to bypass the SMTP server.
232
Changing the Settings of Files in Memory
1. Press [Change TX / Info].
2. Press [Check / Stop Transmission File].
3. Select a file whose SMTP server setting you want to change.
233
4. Changing/Confirming Communication Information
4. Press [Check / Change Settings].
5. Press [Change].
6. Press [SMTP].
234
Changing the Settings of Files in Memory
7. Select [Yes] or [No], and then press [OK].
8. Press [OK].
9. Press [Exit].
Repeat from step 3 to change the SMTP server settings of other recipients.
10. Press [Exit] twice.
The standby display appears.
235
4. Changing/Confirming Communication Information
Printing a File from Memory
If you want to check the contents of a file that is stored in memory and not yet sent, use this procedure to
print it out.
1. Press [Change TX / Info].
2. Press [Check / Stop Transmission File].
3. Select the file you want to print.
If multiple destinations were specified, only the number of the destinations that have not received
the document you sent is shown.
236
Printing a File from Memory
4. Press [Print].
A message appears on the display.
If you want two-sided printing, press [Print on 2 Sides].
To cancel printing, press [Cancel]. The display returns to the previous one.
5. Press the [Start] key.
To cancel printing after pressing the [Start] key, press [Stop Printing]. The display returns to that of
step 4.
Repeat from step 3, if you want to print another file.
6. Press [Exit] twice.
The standby display appears.
• You can also print files that have not been successfully transmitted.
237
4. Changing/Confirming Communication Information
Printing a List of Files in Memory (Print TX File
List)
Print this list if you want to find out which files are stored in memory and what their file numbers are.
Knowing the file number can be useful (for example when erasing files).
1. Press [Change TX / Info].
2. Press [Check / Stop Transmission File].
3. Press [Print List].
To cancel printing before pressing the [Start] key, press [Cancel]. The screen returns to that
displayed before pressing [Print List].
238
Printing a List of Files in Memory (Print TX File List)
4. Press the [Start] key.
To cancel printing after pressing the [Start] key, press [Stop Printing]. The display returns to that of
step 3.
5. Press [Exit] twice.
The standby display appears.
• The contents of a file stored in memory can also be printed.
• If user authentication is set, you can select whether to display a sender name with the User
Parameter (switch 04, bit 5) in the Facsimile Features menu. See “Parameter Settings”.
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
239
4. Changing/Confirming Communication Information
Resending a File
Machine memory stores documents that could not be successfully transmitted using Memory
Transmission. Use this procedure to resend these documents.
• Set “Store documents in memory that could not be transmitted” to “On” in User Parameter (switch
24, bit 0) in the Facsimile Features menu.
1. Press [Change TX / Info].
2. Press [Check / Stop Transmission File].
3. Select the file you want to resend.
"TX failed" is displayed for files that could not be sent.
240
Resending a File
If multiple destinations were specified, only the name of the destination you specify first and only
the number of destinations that have not received the document you sent are shown.
4. Press [Transmit Failed File].
To add a destination, press [Add Destination], and then specify the destination.
5. Press [OK].
Transmission starts.
Repeat from step 3 to resend another file.
To cancel transmissions, press [Stop Transmission].
6. Press [Exit] twice.
The standby display appears.
• Files that could not be transmitted are kept for either 24 or 72 hours, depending on the setting you
make in User Parameter (switch 24, bit 1) in the Facsimile Features menu. See “Parameter
Settings”.
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
241
4. Changing/Confirming Communication Information
Checking the Transmission Result (Transmission
File Status)
You can confirm transmission by the display, report, or e-mail.
Confirming on Display
Use this function to display the transmission results.
1. Press [Change TX / Info].
2. Select [Transmission File Status].
3. Check the transmission results.
Transmission results are displayed, from the latest result down, in groups of nine.
When a fax is sent, “Destination” shows the Own Fax Number or Own Name information of the
receiver. When an Internet Fax or e-mail is sent, the e-mail address or name programmed in the
destination list appears. For a transmission from a computer, “-- LAN-Fax -->” is shown.
Depending on security settings, the destination may appear as
4. Press [Exit] twice.
The standby display appears.
242
.
Checking the Transmission Result (Transmission File Status)
• Only the transmission results of the latest communications are displayed. For the maximum number
of communication results you can check on this machine, see “Maximum Values”.
• You can view sent fax documents and their lists, using Web Image Monitor on a network computer.
For details, see the Web Image Monitor's Help.
• If a transmission is completed while you are using this function, the result will not appear. To view
the latest result, exit Transmission File Status, and then try again.
• You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this function. Using the key
allows you to omit step 1. For details about Quick Operation Key, see “General Settings”.
• When documents are transmitted from the computer to the machine, “--LAN-Fax -->” appears. To
check if the documents are sent to the receiver, confirm the same File No.
• An encryption symbol is displayed in the routing/forwarding columns of encrypted e-mail.
• page 335 "General Settings"
• page 427 "Maximum Values"
Confirming by Report
Print reports for confirmation.
Memory Transmission
You can confirm the result with a Communication Result Report.
This report is printed each time a Memory Transmission is completed if turned on with User
Parameter (switch 03, bit 0) in the Facsimile Features menu.
You can also print the report by programming the TX Status Report to a Quick Operation Key and
pressing this when specifying a destination.
If you turn the Communication Result Report on, the Communication Failure Report is not printed.
For details about the contents printed in the reports, see “Communication Result Report (Memory
Transmission)” or “Communication Failure Report”.
Immediate Transmission
You can confirm the result with an Immediate TX Result Report.
Select to print this report in User Parameter (switch 03, bit 5) in the Facsimile Features menu. A
report is printed after every Immediate Transmission is completed.
You can also print the report by programming the TX Status Report to a Quick Operation Key and
pressing this when specifying a destination.
For details about the contents printed in the report, see “Immediate TX Result Report (Immediate
Transmission)”.
243
4. Changing/Confirming Communication Information
• For details about Parameter Setting, see “Parameter Settings”.
• For details about Quick Operation Key, see “General Settings”.
• page 245 "Communication Result Report (Memory Transmission)"
• page 246 "Immediate TX Result Report (Immediate Transmission)"
• page 246 "Communication Failure Report"
• page 335 "General Settings"
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
Confirming by E-mail
Use the E-mail TX Results function to send reports by e-mail to a computer, and then confirm them on the
computer.
The available reports are:
• Communication Result Report.
• Immediate TX Result Report.
• Polling with SEP RX Result.
• You must first register the e-mail addresses of the destinations the report is to be sent to on the
destination list. For details about registering e-mail addresses, see “Registering Addresses and
Users for Facsimile/Scanner Functions”, Network and System Settings Reference.
• For details about E-mail TX Results, see “Confirming Transmission Results by E-mail”.
• For details about the contents of the reports, see “Communication Result Report (Memory
Transmission)”, “Immediate TX Result Report (Immediate Transmission)”, “SEP Code RX Result
Report”.
• By programming the E-mail TX Results to a Quick Operation Key in advance, you can send
transmission results by e-mail after each transmission is completed. Select the destination for
notification from the Internet Fax destinations or e-mail destinations in the destination list. For details
about Quick Operation Key, see “General Settings”.
• When using the Sender Name function to select the sender, the transmission results are sent to
senders' e-mail addresses that have been registered. Select the sender from the Internet Fax
destinations or e-mail destinations in the destination list.
• If you send fax documents from a computer, use LAN-Fax Driver to specify whether or not the Email TX Results is sent to the computer.
244
Checking the Transmission Result (Transmission File Status)
• page 150 "SEP Code RX Result Report"
• page 172 "Confirming Transmission Results by E-mail"
• page 245 "Communication Result Report (Memory Transmission)"
• page 246 "Immediate TX Result Report (Immediate Transmission)"
• page 335 "General Settings"
Confirming by Report and E-mail
You can confirm transmission results using both the E-mail TX Results function, which sends the results by
e-mail, and the Communication Result Report printed by the machine.
You can set whether to use both of these together in User Parameter (switch 10, bit 6) in the Facsimile
Features menu. See “Parameter Settings”.
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
Communication Result Report (Memory Transmission)
This report is printed when a Memory Transmission is completed, so you can check the result of the
transmission.
• You can turn this function on or off with the User Parameter (switch 03, bit 0) in the Facsimile
Features menu.
• If user authentication is set, you can select whether to display a sender name with the User
Parameter (switch 04, bit 5) in the Facsimile Features menu.
• You can select whether to include part of the original image on the report with the User Parameter
(switch 04, bit 7) in the Facsimile Features menu.
• If user authentication is set, you can select whether to display a destination with the User Parameter
(switch 04, bit 4) in the Facsimile Features menu.
• For details about Parameter Setting, see “Parameter Settings”.
• The Pg(s) column gives the total number of pages. The Page Not Sent column gives the number of
pages that could not be sent successfully.
• “--” indicates that the e-mail or Internet Fax document was sent to the mail server programmed in
this machine. (However, this does not mean the e-mail was delivered.)
• To view the report without text disruption, select a font of even character width in your e-mail
application's settings.
245
4. Changing/Confirming Communication Information
• If two or more destinations are specified, this report is printed after the fax document is sent to all
the destinations.
• If the machine is set up not to print this report and the fax document could not be successfully
transmitted, a Communication Failure Report is printed. See “Communication Failure Report”.
• If E-mail TX Results is programmed in a Quick Operation Key, you can select whether a report email is sent after transmission. For details about Quick Operation Key, see “General Settings”.
• page 246 "Communication Failure Report"
• page 335 "General Settings"
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
Immediate TX Result Report (Immediate Transmission)
If you turn this report on, a report is printed after every Immediate Transmission so you have a record of
whether the transmission was successful or not.
If the machine is set up not to print this report and the fax document could not be successfully transmitted,
the Error Report is printed instead.
• You can switch this report on or off in the User Parameter (switch 03, bit 5) in the Facsimile Features
menu.
• If user authentication is set, you can select whether to display a destination with the User Parameter
(switch 04, bit 4) in the Facsimile Features menu.
• For details about Parameter Setting, see “Parameter Settings”.
• To view the report without text disruption, select a font of even character width in your e-mail
application's settings.
• If the page was sent successfully, the Page column gives the total number of pages sent
successfully.
• If E-mail TX Results is programmed in a Quick Operation Key, you can select whether a report email is sent after transmission. For details about Quick Operation Key, see “General Settings”.
• page 335 "General Settings"
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
Communication Failure Report
This report is printed when a document could not be successfully transmitted with Memory Transmission.
246
Checking the Transmission Result (Transmission File Status)
If the machine is set up to print a Communication Result Report, this report is not printed. Use it to keep a
record of failed transmissions so you can send them again.
• You can select whether the Communication Failure Report is automatically printed using the User
Parameter (switch 04, bit 1) in the Facsimile Features menu.
• This report is only printed if the Communication Result Report is turned off and a document could
not be successfully transmitted with Memory Transmission.
• You can select whether to include part of the original image on the report with the User Parameter
(switch 04, bit 7) in the Facsimile Features menu.
• If user authentication is set, you can select whether to display a destination with the User Parameter
(switch 04, bit 4) in the Facsimile Features menu.
• If user authentication is set, you can select whether to display a sender name with the User
Parameter (switch 04, bit 5) in the Facsimile Features menu.
• For details about Parameter Setting, see “Parameter Settings”.
• The Pg(s) column gives the total number of pages. The Page Not Sent column gives the number of
pages that could not be sent successfully.
• “Unprogrammed” indicates that the document could not be sent because the forwarding
destination is not programmed.
• “--” indicates that the e-mail or Internet Fax document was sent to the mail server programmed in
this machine. (However, this does not mean the e-mail was delivered.)
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
247
4. Changing/Confirming Communication Information
Checking the Reception Result (Reception File
Status)
Confirm the reception result on the screen or in a report.
Confirming on Display
Use this function to display the reception result.
1. Press [Change TX / Info].
2. Press [Reception File Status].
3. Check the reception results.
Reception results are displayed, from the latest result, in groups of nine.
When a fax or IP-Fax is received, “Sender” shows the Own Fax Number or Own Name
information. When an Internet Fax is received, the sender's e-mail address appears.
4. Press [Exit] twice.
The standby display appears.
• Only the reception results of the latest communications are displayed. For the maximum number of
communication results you can check on this machine, see “Maximum Values”.
248
Checking the Reception Result (Reception File Status)
• You can view received fax documents and their lists, using Web Image Monitor on a network
computer. For details, see the Web Image Monitor's Help.
• If a document is received while you are using this function, the result will not appear. To view the
latest result, exit Reception File Status, and then try again.
• You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this function. Using the key
allows you to omit step 1. For details about Quick Operation Key, see “General Settings”.
• page 335 "General Settings"
• page 427 "Maximum Values"
Confirming by Report
Print a report to confirm reception results.
Journal
Print the Journal to confirm the latest reception results.
For details, see “Journal”.
•
(mainly Europe and Asia)
page 254 "Journal
(mainly Europe and Asia)"
•
(mainly North America)
page 257 "Journal
(mainly North America)"
249
4. Changing/Confirming Communication Information
Print Journal
You can print the Journal manually.
• The contents of a Journal printed automatically are deleted after printing. Keep the journal if you
require a record of transmissions and receptions.
Printing the Journal
To print the Journal manually, select the printing method: “All”, “Print per File No.”, or “Print per User”.
• You can set whether the Journal is automatically printed after every 50 communications in User
Parameter (switch 03, bit 7) in the Facsimile Features menu.
• Depending on security settings, the Journal is not automatically printed.
• You can set whether the Journal is printed by transmission type with the User Parameter (switch 19,
bit 1) in the Facsimile Features menu.
• If user authentication is set, you can select whether to display a sender name with the User
Parameter (switch 04, bit 5) in the Facsimile Features menu.
• For details about Parameter Setting, see “Parameter Settings”.
• You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this function. Using the key
allows you to omit step 1. For details about Quick Operation Key, see “General Settings”.
• Depending on security settings, the Destination/Sender name may not appear. You can select
whether to display the Destination/Sender with the User Parameter (switch 04, bit 4) in the
Facsimile Features menu.
• For the maximum number of communication results printed in the Journal, see “Maximum Values”.
• page 335 "General Settings"
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
• page 427 "Maximum Values"
All
Prints the results of communications in the order made.
250
Print Journal
1. Press [Change TX / Info].
2. Press [Print Journal].
3. Select [All].
4. Press the [Start] key.
To cancel a file printing before pressing the [Start] key, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of
step 3.
To cancel a file printing after pressing the [Start] key, press [Stop Printing]. The display returns to
that of step 3.
5. Press [Exit] twice.
The standby display appears.
Print per File No.
Prints only the results of communications specified by file number.
251
4. Changing/Confirming Communication Information
1. Press [Change TX / Info].
2. Press [Print Journal].
3. Select [Print per File No.].
4. Enter a 4-digit file number.
If you make a mistake, press [Clear], and then try again.
5. Press the [Start] key.
To cancel a file printing before pressing the [Start] key, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of
step 3.
To cancel a file printing after pressing the [Start] key, press [Stop Printing]. The display returns to
that of step 3.
252
Print Journal
6. Press [Exit] twice.
The standby display appears.
Print per User
Prints the results of communications by individual senders.
1. Press [Change TX / Info].
2. Press [Print Journal].
3. Select [Print per User].
4. Select a user.
Press [Cancel] if the user is not registered. The display returns to that of step 3.
253
4. Changing/Confirming Communication Information
5. After checking the user name shown on the display, press [OK].
Press [Cancel] if a wrong user name is selected. The display returns to that of step 3.
6. Press the [Start] key.
To cancel a file printing before pressing the [Start] key, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of
step 3.
To cancel a file printing after pressing the [Start] key, press [Stop Printing]. The display returns to
that of step 3.
7. Press [Exit] twice.
The standby display appears.
Journal
(mainly Europe and Asia)
This section explains the items printed in the Journal.
254
Print Journal
1
7
8
2
6
5
4
3
11
10
9
CCV010
1. Printing date
Shows the date and time the report was printed.
2. Programmed Fax Header
Shows the sender name programmed for printing.
3. Date
Shows the transmission or reception date.
4. Time
Shows the transmission or reception start time.
5. Other end
• For fax destinations
Shows the name (for display) programmed by the other end.
Shows the programmed fax number if the name (for display) was not programmed. The fax number may
not be shown depending on sender's settings.
255
4. Changing/Confirming Communication Information
If neither name nor fax number was programmed by the other end, an entered fax number or a name
programmed in a destination list is shown for transmissions.
• For Internet Fax/e-mail destinations
At time of transmission, it shows the e-mail address or name programmed in the destination list. At time of
reception, it shows the e-mail address of the sender.
At time of broadcasting transmission, it shows the number of destinations after the e-mail addresses or
names of destination.
When documents are transmitted from the computer to the machine, “--LAN-Fax -->” appears. To check
if the documents are sent to the receiver, confirm the same File No.
• For IP-Fax destinations
Shows the IP-Fax destination or name programmed in the destination list. The fax destination details
appear on the reception report.
• For folder destinations
Shows the name programmed in the destination list.
6. Communication mode
• For fax transmissions and receptions
After the line type, “T” for outgoing faxes or “R” for incoming faxes, and the communication mode
appear in alphabetical letters or symbols.
• For Internet Fax/e-mail transmissions and receptions
After
(e-mail mark), “T” for outgoing e-mail or “R” for incoming e-mail, and the communication
mode appear in alphabetical letters or symbols. Documents sent from Internet Fax destinations are
received by Internet Fax, and documents sent from e-mail destinations are received by Mail to Print. “Q”
indicates outgoing e-mail for which a Reception Notice is set in “TX Mode”, whereas “A” indicates
reception notice e-mail.
• For IP-Fax transmissions and receptions
After
(IP-Fax mark), “T” for outgoing faxes or “R” for incoming faxes, and the communication
mode appear in alphabetical letters or symbols.
• For folder destinations
After
(folder mark) and “T” for outgoing faxes, the communication mode appears in alphabetical
letters or symbols.
7. Communication time
Shows time taken for transmissions or receptions.
8. Number of pages
Shows the number of pages transmitted or received.
9. Communication result
Shows the result of transmissions or receptions.
OK: All pages were properly transmitted or received. When Reception Notice is activated using “TX Mode”,
receipt of Reception Notice is shown. The results of received documents that were routed are preceded by
“ ”.
256
Print Journal
--: The Internet Fax or e-mail document was sent to the mail server programmed in this machine. (However, this
does not mean the e-mail was delivered.) When using LAN-Fax, the results of communication from a computer
to this machine are shown.
E: A communication error occurred.
D: Power was disconnected during communication. Not all fax documents were transmitted.
10. User name
Shows the sender's name.
11. File number
Shows file management numbers.
• For Mail to Print reception, “P.1” is always printed in the number of pages column and “S”, which
indicates the Standard resolution, is always printed in the communication mode column regardless
of the actual page/resolution.
• The information displayed under “Other end” can be either the fax number or name registered in
the machine's own address book, or the fax number or name registered by the other end,
depending on which you prioritize. For details about prioritizing items of journal information,
contact your service representative.
Journal
(mainly North America)
This section explains the items printed in the Journal.
257
4. Changing/Confirming Communication Information
1
7
8
2
6
5
4
3
11
10
9
CCV037
1. Printing date
Shows the date and time the report was printed.
2. Programmed Fax Header
Shows the sender name programmed for printing.
3. Date
Shows the transmission or reception date.
4. Time
Shows the transmission or reception start time.
5. Other end
• For fax destinations
Shows the name (for display) programmed by the other end.
Shows the programmed fax number if the name (for display) was not programmed. The fax number may
not be shown depending on sender's settings.
258
Print Journal
If neither name nor fax number was programmed by the other end, an entered fax number or a name
programmed in a destination list is shown for transmissions.
• For Internet Fax/e-mail destinations
At time of transmission, it shows the e-mail address or name programmed in the destination list. At time of
reception, it shows the e-mail address of the sender.
At time of broadcasting transmission, it shows the number of destinations after the e-mail addresses or
names of destination.
When documents are transmitted from the computer to the machine, “--LAN-Fax -->” appears. To check
if the documents are sent to the receiver, confirm the same File No.
• For IP-Fax destinations
Shows the IP-Fax destination or name programmed in the destination list. The fax destination details
appear on the reception report.
• For folder destinations
Shows the name programmed in the destination list.
6. Communication mode
• For fax transmissions and receptions
After the line type, “T” for outgoing faxes or “R” for incoming faxes, and the communication mode
appear in alphabetical letters or symbols.
• For Internet Fax/e-mail transmissions and receptions
After
(e-mail mark), “T” for outgoing e-mail or “R” for incoming e-mail, and the communication
mode appear in alphabetical letters or symbols. Documents sent from Internet Fax destinations are
received by Internet Fax, and documents sent from e-mail destinations are received by Mail to Print. “Q”
indicates outgoing e-mail for which a Reception Notice is set in “TX Mode”, whereas “A” indicates
reception notice e-mail.
• For IP-Fax transmissions and receptions
After
(IP-Fax mark), “T” for outgoing faxes or “R” for incoming faxes, and the communication
mode appear in alphabetical letters or symbols.
• For folder destinations
After
(folder mark) and “T” for outgoing faxes, the communication mode appears in alphabetical
letters or symbols.
7. Communication time
Shows time taken for transmissions or receptions.
8. Number of pages
Shows the number of pages transmitted or received.
9. Communication result
Shows the result of transmissions or receptions.
OK: All pages were properly transmitted or received. When Reception Notice is activated using “TX Mode”,
receipt of Reception Notice is shown. The results of received documents that were routed are preceded by
“ ”.
259
4. Changing/Confirming Communication Information
--: The Internet Fax or e-mail document was sent to the mail server programmed in this machine. (However, this
does not mean the e-mail was delivered.) When using LAN-Fax, the results of communication from a computer
to this machine are shown.
E: A communication error occurred.
D: Power was disconnected during communication. Not all fax documents were transmitted.
10. User name
Shows the sender's name.
11. File number
Shows file management numbers.
• For Mail to Print reception, “P.1” is always printed in the number of pages column and “S”, which
indicates the Standard resolution, is always printed in the communication mode column regardless
of the actual page/resolution.
• The information displayed under “Other end” can be either the fax number or name registered in
the machine's own address book, or the fax number or name registered by the other end,
depending on which you prioritize. For details about prioritizing items of journal information,
contact your service representative.
Transmitting Journal by E-mail
Use this function to send the Journal to the administrator's e-mail address.
The Journal is sent automatically after every 50 communications. A CSV format Journal is attached to the
e-mail.
• To transmit the Journal by e-mail, it is necessary to make settings with User Parameter (switch 21,
bit 4) in the Facsimile Features menu. See “Parameter Settings”.
• This machine does not store sent CSV files. It is recommended that you double-check the e-mail
address of an administrator before the Journal is transmitted. If the e-mail address of the
administrator is not correct, your important Journal may be lost. Sent CSV files are not left on the
fax machine.
• If the administrator's address is wrong, you may not be able to acquire the Journal.
• If the Journal fails to be transmitted in e-mail format, the Journal is printed out.
• The name of an attached CSV file is “JOURNAL year, month, date, hours, minutes”. For example,
the file name transmitted in 14:40 on 20th, December, 2007 is “JOURNAL200712201440.csv”.
• The subject of a Journal sent by e-mail begins with “Journal”.
260
Print Journal
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
Journal by e-mail
If the setting is made so that the Journal is transmitted as e-mail, it is transmitted to the e-mail address of
an administrator.
• To transmit the Journal, it is necessary to make settings with the User Parameter (switch 21, bit 4) in
the Facsimile Features menu.
• If user authentication is set, you can select whether to display a sender name with the User
Parameter (switch 04, bit 5) in the Facsimile Features menu.
• For details about Parameter Setting, see “Parameter Settings”.
• To confirm the administrator's e-mail address, use Administrator's E-mail Address under System
Settings. See “File Transfer”, Network and System Settings Reference.
• Depending on security settings, the Destination/Sender name may not appear. You can select
whether to display a destination with the User Parameter (switch 04, bit 4) in the Facsimile Features
menu.
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
261
4. Changing/Confirming Communication Information
Confirming/Printing/Deleting Received and
Stored Documents
You can print documents that are received and stored on the hard disk. You can also delete unwanted
documents.
This machine
Transmitting station
Hard Disk
BZR045
• Make the settings for received and stored documents in “Reception File Setting” in the Facsimile
Features menu before using this function. For details about the setting, see “Reception File Setting”.
• If you have selected to store received documents and specified an e-mail address for notification of
receipt, fax reception notification can be sent to that e-mail address.
• For the maximum number of received documents you can store on the machine's hard disk, see
“Maximum Values”.
• You can view and print received and stored documents using Web Image Monitor. For details, see
“Viewing Fax Information Using a Web Browser”.
• Control panel operations such as printing or deleting received documents, can be restricted. To do
this, select “On” for the User Parameters (switch 10, bit 0) in Parameter Settings. After you do this,
“Print / Delete Stored Reception File” will no longer be displayed on the screen, and received
documents stored on the machine cannot be accessed using the control panel. For details about
Parameter Settings, see “Parameter Settings”.
• If user authentication is set on the machine, “Print / Delete Stored Reception File” is displayed only
if the user who is logged on has been granted permission for these functions under “Stored
Reception File User Setting” in the Facsimile Features menu logs on the machine. For details about
these settings, see “Stored Reception File User Setting”.
262
Confirming/Printing/Deleting Received and Stored Documents
• page 326 "Viewing Fax Information Using a Web Browser"
• page 360 "Reception File Setting"
• page 363 "Stored Reception File User Setting"
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
• page 427 "Maximum Values"
Confirming Received and Stored Documents
This section explains how to view documents stored on the hard disk.
1. Press the [Change TX / Info].
2. Select [Print / Delete Stored Reception File].
3. Select the document you want to confirm.
Press the Thumbnails key to switch the screen to thumbnail display.
4. Press [Preview].
263
4. Changing/Confirming Communication Information
5. Check the preview.
• Press [Zoom Out] or [Zoom In] to reduce or enlarge the preview image.
• Press [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] to scroll the preview image.
• Press [Switch] under “Display File” to display another selected file.
• Press [Switch] under “Display Page” to change the displayed page.
6. Press [Exit].
The display returns to that of step 4.
7. Press [Exit] twice.
The standby display appears.
• If the size of a received and stored document is larger than A4 or 81/2 × 14, the document is
displayed in the preview as a single image, but it will be split and printed over several sheets.
Printing Received and Stored Documents
This section explains how to print documents saved on the hard disk.
1. Press [Change TX / Info].
2. Select [Print / Delete Stored Reception File].
264
Confirming/Printing/Deleting Received and Stored Documents
3. Select a file to be printed, and then press [Print].
To cancel printing, press [Cancel].
To delete the document after printing, press [Delete File after Printing].
To perform two-sided printing, press [Print on 2 Sides] before pressing the [Start] key.
4. Press the [Start] key.
To stop printing after pressing the [Start] key, press [Stop Printing]. The display returns to that of step
3.
5. Press [Exit] twice.
The standby display appears.
• This function allows you to print only received and stored documents.
• You cannot print received and stored documents using the Document Server function.
• You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this function. Using the
Quick Operation Key allows you to omit step 1. For details about Quick Operation Key, see
“General Settings”.
• You can specify and print multiple documents. For the maximum number of documents you can
print at a time, see “Maximum Values”.
• page 335 "General Settings"
• page 427 "Maximum Values"
Deleting Received and Stored Documents
This section explains how to delete documents stored on the hard disk.
265
4. Changing/Confirming Communication Information
1. Press [Change TX / Info].
2. Select [Print / Delete Stored Reception File].
3. Select a file to be printed, and then press [Delete].
4. Press [Yes].
To cancel a deletion, press [No]. The display returns to that of step 3.
5. Press [Exit] twice.
The standby display appears.
• You cannot delete received and stored documents using the Document Server function.
• You cannot delete a document while another person is printing it using Web Image Monitor.
• You can specify and delete multiple documents. For the maximum number of documents you can
delete at a time, see “Maximum Values”.
• page 427 "Maximum Values"
266
Printing a File Received with Memory Lock
Printing a File Received with Memory Lock
Prints files received with Memory Lock.
This is a security function designed to prevent unauthorized users from reading your documents. If
Memory Lock Reception is switched on, all received documents are stored in memory and are not
automatically printed. To print the documents, you have to enter the Memory Lock ID.
When your machine has received a document with Memory Lock Reception, the Confidential File (
indicator blinks.
)
Before using this function, the following preparations are required in the Facsimile Features menu.
• Program your Memory Lock ID under Program Memory Lock ID
• Set Memory Lock Reception to On under Memory Lock Reception
For details about Memory Lock Reception, see “Reception Settings”.
For details about Program Memory Lock ID, see “Initial Settings”.
• If the main power switch is turned off for about an hour, all documents protected by Memory Lock
Reception are deleted. When this happens, the Power Failure Report is printed so you can confirm
which documents have been deleted. See “Turning Off the Main Power / In the Event of Power
Failure”, Troubleshooting.
1. Confirm that the Confidential File indicator is blinking.
CCV003
267
4. Changing/Confirming Communication Information
2. Press [Change TX / Info].
3. Press [Print Memory Lock].
If no documents were received while Memory Lock Reception was switched on, the message "No
reception file." is shown. Press [Exit].
4. Enter a 4-digit Memory Lock ID with the number keys, and then press the [Start] key.
If you make a mistake, press [Clear], and then try again.
To cancel printing, press [Cancel].
If the Memory Lock ID does not match, the "Specified code does not correspond to programmed
Memory Lock ID." message appears. Press [Exit] and retry after checking the Memory Lock ID.
5. Press [Exit].
The standby display appears.
• If Memory Lock Reception and received document storage are both set to on, Memory Lock
Reception is unavailable and received documents become stored documents.
• Even when Memory Lock Reception is available, if free memory is insufficient, reception is not
possible.
• You can also apply a Memory Lock Reception to documents that come only from certain senders.
• Documents received by SEP Code Reception are automatically printed even if this function is
switched on.
268
Printing a File Received with Memory Lock
• You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this function. Using the key
allows you to omit step 2 and 5. For details about Quick Operation Key, see “General Settings”.
• If you print a Memory Lock File, it is deleted.
• page 335 "General Settings"
• page 342 "Reception Settings"
• page 347 "Initial Settings"
269
4. Changing/Confirming Communication Information
Personal Boxes
You can receive confidential documents to Personal Boxes.
• Before using this function, set the Personal Box in advance.
Personal Boxes
Storing your documents in a Personal Box prevents unauthorized users reading them.
When you specify a receiver for the Personal Box, incoming documents are forwarded directly to the
destination you specify. You can specify a fax number, IP-Fax destination, Internet Fax destination, email destination, or folder destination as the receiver.
To be able to receive documents into a Personal Box, you must inform the sender of the SUB Code
programmed for that Personal Box and ask them to send the document using SUB Code Transmission
with that SUB Code. When your machine has received a confidential document, the Confidential File
( ) indicator lights.
• If the main power switch is turned off for about an hour, all documents received into Personal Boxes
are deleted. When this happens, the Power Failure Report is printed so you can confirm which
documents have been deleted. See “Turning Off the Main Power / In the Event of Power Failure”,
Troubleshooting.
• Documents delivered to registered destinations are deleted from Personal Boxes.
This machine
Sender
Personal Box
Receiver
Print
BZR046
270
Personal Boxes
• If a receiver is not assigned, you can print the received documents on this machine. For details
about the printing method, see “Printing Personal Box Documents”.
• If the receiver is an Internet Fax/e-mail destination, e-mail can be encrypted and forwarded with a
digital signature. Use both “Box Setting” on the Facsimile Features menu and Web Image Monitor
to specify whether or not to apply encryption and a digital signature. For details about Box Setting,
see “Box Settings”.
• For details about Confidential File Report, see “Confidential File Report”.
• page 271 "Printing Personal Box Documents"
• page 273 "Confidential File Report"
• page 398 "Box Settings"
Printing Personal Box Documents
This section explains how to print a document received into a Personal Box.
1. Make sure that the Confidential File indicator is lit.
CCV003
2. Press [Change TX / Info].
271
4. Changing/Confirming Communication Information
3. Press [Print Personal Box File].
4. Select the box with the document you want to print.
5. If a password has been set for the box, enter the password, and then press [OK].
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] before pressing [OK], and then try again.
To cancel entering a password, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of step 4.
6. Press the [Start] key.
To stop printing, press [Stop Printing]. The display returns to that of step 4.
To print a document in another Personal Box, repeat from step 4.
7. Press [Exit] twice.
The standby display appears.
• If you print a Personal Box document, it is deleted.
• The passwords for Personal Boxes can be programmed under “Box Setting” in the Facsimile
Features menu. For details about the programming method, see “Box Settings”.
• page 398 "Box Settings"
272
Personal Boxes
Confidential File Report
You can check whether a document was received to a Personal Box.
• You can turn this function on or off with the User Parameter (switch 04, bit 0) in the Facsimile
Features menu. See “Parameter Settings”.
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
273
4. Changing/Confirming Communication Information
Information Boxes
This section describes how to use Information Boxes.
• Before using this function, set the Information Box in advance.
Information Boxes
Use the Information Box function to set up the machine as a document server.
Program a document into an Information Box for others to pick up. When a request is made by another
party, the SEP Code they specify is matched against the SEP Codes programmed in that Information
Box. If a code matches the document stored in the Information Box the document is sent to the other
party automatically.
Other parties can receive these documents whenever they request them.
• If the main power switch is turned off for about an hour, all documents stored in Information Boxes
are deleted. When this happens, the Power Failure Report is printed so you can confirm which
documents have been deleted. See “Turning Off the Main Power / In the Event of Power Failure”,
Troubleshooting.
• For other parties to be able to retrieve a document programmed in an Information Box, you need
to inform the SEP Code assigned to that Information Box.
This machine
Register
Documents
Information Boxes
Receiver
Transmission
Request
Print
BZR047
• For details about storing documents in the Information Boxes, see “Storing Documents in
Information Boxes”.
274
Information Boxes
• You can set a password for Information Boxes in advance. A password can be set in “Box Setting”
in the Facsimile Features menu. For details about the programming method, see “Box Settings”.
• page 275 "Storing Documents in Information Boxes"
• page 398 "Box Settings"
Storing Documents in Information Boxes
This section explains how to store a document in an Information Box.
1. Press [Change TX / Info].
2. Press [Store / Delete / Print Information Box File].
3. Select the box in which you want to store the file.
When there are pre-programmed files, a file mark appears to the left of the box name.
A message is displayed if you select a box with a file stored in it. Press [Yes] when changing the file.
The stored original file is overwritten.
275
4. Changing/Confirming Communication Information
4. If a password has been set for the box, enter the password, and then press [OK].
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] before pressing [OK], and then try again.
To cancel entering a password, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of step 3.
5. Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
You can also select the following settings:
• Original Orientation
• Original Settings
6. Press the [Start] key.
The machine starts to scan the original.
To stop scanning, press [Stop]. The display returns to that of step 3.
To store a document in another Information Box, repeat from step 3.
7. Press [Exit] twice.
The standby display appears.
• One Information Box stores one file.
• The stored file is not deleted automatically. If you want to delete a stored file, see “Deleting
Information Box Documents”.
276
Information Boxes
• page 278 "Deleting Information Box Documents"
Printing Information Box Documents
This section explains how to print a document stored in an Information Box.
1. Press [Change TX / Info].
2. Press [Store / Delete / Print Information Box File].
3. Press [Print].
4. Select the box that contains the stored file you want to print.
You cannot select a box that has no stored file.
277
4. Changing/Confirming Communication Information
5. If a password has been set for the box, enter the password, and then press [OK].
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] before pressing [OK], and then try again.
To cancel entering a password, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of step 4.
6. Press the [Start] key.
If you want two-sided printing, press [Print on 2 Sides] before pressing the [Start] key.
To stop printing before pressing the [Start] key, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of step 4.
To stop printing after pressing the [Start] key, press [Stop Printing]. The display returns to that of step
4.
Repeat from step 4 to print another stored file in the box.
7. Press [Exit] twice.
The standby display appears.
Deleting Information Box Documents
This section explains how to delete a file stored in an Information Box.
1. Press [Change TX / Info].
2. Press [Store / Delete / Print Information Box File].
3. Press [Delete].
278
Information Boxes
4. Select the box that contains the stored file you want to delete.
5. If a password has been set for the box, enter the password, and then press [OK].
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] before pressing [OK], and then try again.
To cancel entering a password, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of step 4.
6. Press [Yes].
To stop deleting, press [No]. The display returns to that of step 4.
Repeat from step 4 to delete another stored file in another box.
7. Press [Exit] twice.
The standby display appears.
279
4. Changing/Confirming Communication Information
280
5. Storing a Document
This section explains storing and managing documents in the Document Server.
Sending a Stored File
This section describes how to store and manage fax documents in the Document Server.
The Document Server can store documents from various applications.
The documents that are stored using the facsimile function are available to transmit by facsimile.
Storing in the Document Server enables the following:
• Once stored, a document can be sent out as many times as you want, just by selecting it.
• Storing a document does not use facsimile memory.
You can send and print multiple stored documents as a single document, and also send them with
scanned originals at the same time. Follow the instructions under [Select Stored File] when sending or
printing stored documents.
This machine
Document Server
(Original + stored file)
BZR048
• Data stored in the machine can be lost if there is an error on the machine's hard disk. The
manufacturer is not responsible for any damage that might result from the loss of data.
• Stored documents are not deleted even if there is a power failure, or the main power switch is
turned off.
• You can specify whether or not the machine automatically deletes documents from the Document
Server after a certain number of days. You can change this setting using “Auto Delete File in
281
5. Storing a Document
Document Server” under “System Settings”. See “Administrator Tools”, Network and System
Settings Reference.
• You cannot check received and stored documents through the Document Server.
• Documents in the Document Server can be sent, printed, or deleted, and their information can be
changed using the Web Image Monitor.
• Using Web Image Monitor, documents you stored in the Document Server can be downloaded
and managed on the computer. See “Document Server”, Copy and Document Server Reference.
• For the maximum values of the following items, see “Maximum Values”:
• Number of documents you can store in the Document Server using the facsimile function
• Number of pages per document you can store in the Document Server
• Number of pages you can store in the Document Server (in total - copy function, facsimile
function, printer function, and scanner function)
• page 427 "Maximum Values"
Storing a Document
You can store and send a document at the same time. You can also just store a document.
File names
Scanned documents are automatically assigned names like “FAX0001” or “FAX0002”.
User Names
You can set this function if necessary to know who and what departments stored documents in the
machine.
Password
You can set this function so as not to send to unspecified people.
1. Place the original, and then specify the scan settings you require.
Specify the “Original Orientation” setting correctly. If you do not, the top/bottom orientation of the
original will not be displayed correctly in the preview.
For details about the setting, see “Setting the Original Orientation”.
282
Sending a Stored File
2. Press [Store File].
3. Select [Send & Store] or [Store Only].
Select [Send & Store] to send documents after they are stored.
Select [Store Only] to store documents.
4. Set the user name, file name, and password as necessary.
If you are not setting a user name, file name, or password, proceed to step 5.
You cannot change multiple documents at once.
5. Press [OK].
The file name appears to the left of [Store File].
283
5. Storing a Document
6. If you have selected [Send & Store], specify the receiver.
If you have selected [Store Only], proceed to step 7.
7. Press the [Start] key.
• You can change file names and user names.
• page 57 "Setting the Original Orientation"
Programming a user name
Specify a user name for the file.
1. Press [User Name].
2. Press the user name to be programmed.
Press the title key to switch between titles.
To set a non-programmed user name, press [Manual Entry], and then enter the name. User names
entered by pressing [Manual Entry] are not programmed into the user code.
3. Press [OK].
• Depending on the security settings, [Access Privileges] might be displayed instead of [User Name].
For details about setting [Access Privileges], ask the administrator.
284
Sending a Stored File
Setting a file name
Specify a name for the file.
1. Press [File Name].
2. Enter the file name.
3. Press [OK].
• For details about text entry, see “Entering Text”, About This Machine.
Setting a password
Set a password for the file.
285
5. Storing a Document
1. Press [Password].
2. Enter a password using the number keys, and then press [OK].
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] before pressing [OK], and then reenter your password.
You can enter up to four to eight digits.
3. Enter the password again, and then press [OK].
Sending Stored Documents
The machine sends documents stored with the facsimile function in the Document Server.
The documents stored in the Document Server can be sent again and again until they are deleted. Once
sent, documents are stored in the Document Server. Therefore, you can send them in just one operation
without having to set your originals again.
• Store the documents to be sent in advance. You can program a password for this function. You can
change the user names, file names, and passwords of stored documents.
• You cannot use the following transmission methods:
• Immediate Transmission
• Parallel Memory Transmission
• On Hook Dial
286
Sending a Stored File
• Manual Dial
1. Press [Select Stored File].
2. Select the documents to be sent.
When multiple documents are selected, they are sent in the order of selection.
• Press [Queue] to arrange the order of the documents to be sent.
• Press [File Name] to place the documents in alphabetical order.
• Press [User Name] to place the documents in order by programmed user name.
• Press [Date] to place the documents in order of programmed date.
To view details about stored documents, press [Details].
Press the Thumbnails key to switch the screen to thumbnail display.
287
5. Storing a Document
3. If you select a document with a password, enter the password, and then press [OK].
If the document does not have a password, proceed to step 4.
4. When you want to add your originals to stored documents and send them all at once,
press [Original Stored File] or [Stored file Original].
When sending only stored documents, proceed to step 5.
When [Original Stored File] is pressed, the machine sends the originals, and then stored files.
When [Stored file Original] is pressed, the machine sends the stored files, and then originals.
5. Press [OK].
6. Specify the destination, and then press the [Start] key.
To add an original to stored documents, place the original, and then select any scan settings you
require.
The added originals are not stored.
• You can send only documents saved with the facsimile function in the Document Server. You cannot
send documents stored in the Document Server using the copy, printer, or scanner functions.
• The specified documents are sent with the scan settings made when they were stored.
• To see details of the selected document, press [Details]. To return to the display in step 2, press
[Exit].
• For the maximum values of the following items, see “Maximum Values”:
288
Sending a Stored File
• Number of stored documents you can specify at a time
• Number of stored pages you can send in one operation
• page 427 "Maximum Values"
Specifying documents from [File List]
Search for a file from the file list.
1. Press [ ] or [ ] to display the documents to be sent.
2. Select the file.
Specifying documents by [User Name]
Search for a file by user name.
1. Select [User Name].
289
5. Storing a Document
2. Select the user name of the programmed document, and then press [OK].
To search by directly entering a user name, press [Manual Entry], and then enter the user name.
Forward matching is used when searching for a user name.
3. Select the file to be sent.
Specifying documents by [File Name]
Search for a file by file name.
1. Select [File Name].
2. Enter the name of the document to be sent, and then press [OK].
Forward matching is used when searching for a file name.
3. Select the file to be sent.
290
Sending a Stored File
Displaying a preview
Display a preview of stored documents.
1. Select the document you want to send.
Press the Thumbnails key to switch the screen to thumbnail display.
2. Press [Preview].
3. Check the preview.
• Press [Zoom Out] or [Zoom In] to reduce or enlarge the preview image.
• Press [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] to scroll the preview image.
• Press [Switch] under “Display File” to display another selected file.
• Press [Switch] under “Display Page” to change the displayed page.
4. Press [Exit].
• If image files are corrupt, they are not displayed on the preview window.
• If the image file is corrupt, store it again.
Printing Stored Documents
Use this function to print documents stored in the Document Server.
You can also print the first page only to check the content of the original.
291
5. Storing a Document
• When [Print 1st Page] is selected, originals larger than A4 size are printed after they are reduced
to A4 size.
1. Press [Select Stored File].
2. Select the document to be printed.
Press the Thumbnail key to switch the screen to thumbnail display.
3. If you select a document with a password, enter the password, and then press [OK].
If the document does not have a password, proceed to step 4.
292
Sending a Stored File
4. Press [Print File] or [Print 1st Page].
When [Print File] is pressed, the machine prints all the pages. When [Print 1st Page] is pressed, the
machine prints only the first page.
To print both sides, press [Print 2 Sides]. When multiple files are specified they are printed per file.
To cancel printing, press [Stop Printing].
5. Press the [Start] key.
When only the first page is printed, the file name is printed at the top of the paper.
To cancel printing after pressing the [Start] key, press [Stop Printing].
6. Press [Cancel].
The standby display appears.
• Only documents stored using the facsimile function can be printed.
• You can specify and print multiple documents at one time.
• For the maximum values of the following items, see “Maximum Values”:
• Number of stored documents you can print at a time using [Print 1st Page]
• Number of stored documents you can print at a time using [Print File]
• page 427 "Maximum Values"
Changing Stored Document Information
You can change the file name, user name, and password of stored documents.
To change a stored document, delete the document you no longer need, and then reprogram the new
document.
1. Press [Select Stored File].
293
5. Storing a Document
2. Select [Manage / Delete File], and then press the document to be changed.
3. If you select a document for which a password is set, enter the password, and then press
[OK].
When a selected file does not have a password, proceed to step 4.
4. Change the desired information of the stored document.
Press the keys for the items you want to change.
5. Press [Exit].
The standby display appears.
294
Sending a Stored File
Changing a user name
Change the user name of a stored document.
1. Press [Change User Name].
2. Press [Clear].
The user name is deleted.
3. Enter the new user name, and then press [OK].
Press the title word keys to switch between titles.
To set a non-programmed user name, press [Manual Entry], and then enter the name.
User names entered by pressing [Manual Entry] are not programmed into the user code.
• Depending on the security settings, [Change Access Priv.] might be displayed instead of [Change
User Name]. For details about setting [Change Access Priv.], ask the administrator.
Changing the file name
Change the name of a stored document.
295
5. Storing a Document
1. Press [Change File Name].
2. Press [ ], [ ], [Backspace], or [Delete All], and then re-enter the file name.
3. Press [OK].
• For details about text entry, see “Entering Text”, About This Machine.
Changing the password
Change the password of a stored document.
1. Press [Change Password].
296
Sending a Stored File
2. Enter a new password using the number keys, and then press [OK].
3. Enter the password again, and then press [OK].
Deleting a Stored Document
Use this function to delete stored documents.
1. Press [Select Stored File].
297
5. Storing a Document
2. Press [Manage / Delete File].
3. Select the document you want to delete.
You can also delete multiple documents at once.
4. Enter a password using the number keys, and then press [OK].
5. Press [Delete File].
6. Press [Yes].
If you do not want to delete the document, press [No].
7. Press [Exit].
The standby display appears.
298
6. Fax via Computer
This section explains how to use this machine's facsimile function from a computer via a network.
Sending Fax Documents from Computers
You can send a document created with a Windows application from a computer connected to the
machine to another fax machine.
Connect computers to the machine via LAN, wireless LAN, or USB 2.0.
• To send a fax, simply select [Print...] from the Windows application, then select LAN-Fax as the
printer, and then specify a destination. LAN-Fax enables paperless faxing from your computer to
the other destinations.
• In addition to sending faxes, the LAN-Fax Driver allows this machine to be used for printing out
documents prepared on a computer for proof checking.
• To use the LAN-Fax Driver, connect this machine to computers and make the necessary network
settings, and then install the LAN-Fax Driver and the related utilities on your computer.
CCV016
• Errors occurring when the machine is used as a LAN-Fax will not be displayed on the computer.
Check for errors by using Web Image Monitor. See Web Image Monitor help.
299
6. Fax via Computer
• It is recommended that you use Web Image Monitor running under the same network environment
as this machine. Otherwise, the Web browser may not open and an error may occur.
• This function supports both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses.
Before Use
To use LAN-Fax features, a LAN-Fax Driver must be installed on your computer.
The LAN-Fax Driver is on the printer/scanner CD-ROM. You must also make the required computer to
fax network settings on the machine, according to the type of connection.
• When using Ethernet or wireless LAN, see “Connecting the Machine”, Network and System
Settings Reference.
Using the Software
This section provides information about LAN-Fax Driver, Address Book, and LAN-Fax Cover Sheet
Editor on the CD-ROM provided with this machine.
LAN-Fax Driver
This driver allows you to use LAN-Fax functions.
• All operations cannot be guaranteed depending on the system environment.
Location of the file
The following folder is on the CD-ROM:
• LAN-Fax Driver for Windows XP/Vista/7, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008/2008
R2
32bit-driver \x86\DRIVERS\LAN-FAX\XP_VISTA
64bit-driver \x64\DRIVERS\LAN-FAX\X64
Operating environment
• Computer
PC/AT compatible
• Operating systems
Microsoft Windows XP/Vista/7
300
Sending Fax Documents from Computers
Microsoft Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008/2008 R2
• Display
VGA 640 × 480 pixels or more
• Before beginning installation, exit all other applications.
Address Book
Address Book helps you edit LAN-Fax transmission destinations.
Operating systems
Microsoft Windows XP/Vista/7
Microsoft Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008/2008 R2
LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor
LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor helps you edit LAN-Fax cover sheets.
Operating systems
Microsoft Windows XP/Vista/7
Microsoft Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008/2008 R2
Auto Run program
The installers for various drivers and utilities launch automatically as Auto Run programs when you insert
the CD-ROM.
LAN-Fax Driver, Address Book, and LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor can be installed by Auto Run.
• If the plug and play function starts, click [Cancel] in the [Found New Hardware] dialog box, and
then insert the CD-ROM.
• Auto Run might not work automatically with certain OS settings. If this is the case, double-click
“SETUP.EXE”, located on the CD-ROM root directory, or click [Run SETUP.EXE] in the [AutoPlay]
dialog box.
• If you want to cancel Auto Run, hold down the left [Shift] key while inserting the CD-ROM. Keep
the [Shift] key held down until the computer stops reading the CD-ROM.
• Clicking [Cancel] during installation aborts the installation. If you cancel the installation, restart
your computer and install the rest of the software or printer driver.
301
6. Fax via Computer
• Manage Printers permission is required to install the drivers. Log on as an Administrators group
member.
Installing Individual Applications
You need to install a LAN-Fax Driver on your computer before using the LAN-Fax functions.
Address Book and LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor are installed with the LAN-Fax Driver. Address Book
helps you edit LAN-Fax transmission destinations. LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor helps you edit LAN-Fax
cover sheets.
Use the following procedure to install LAN-Fax Driver, Address Book, and LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor
at one time.
Using the Standard TCP/IP Port
This describes how to install the LAN-Fax Driver using the Standard TCP/IP Port.
• Manage Printers permission is required to install the drivers. Log on as an Administrators group
member.
• In an IPv6 environment, you cannot use the Standard TCP/IP Port. Use the SmartDeviceMonitor for
Client port.
1. Quit all applications currently running.
2. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
3. Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
4. Click [LAN-Fax Driver].
5. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
After reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
6. Click [Next >].
7. Double-click [Printer Name : <LAN-Fax M14>].
8. Click [Port :], and then click [Add].
9. Click [Standard TCP/IP Port], and then click [OK].
Configure the Standard TCP/IP Port settings, and then see Windows Help if [Standard TCP/IP
Port] does not appear.
10. Click [Next >] in the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] dialog box.
302
Sending Fax Documents from Computers
11. Enter the machine name or IP address in the [Printer Name or IP Address :] box.
The [Port Name :] text box automatically obtains a port name. Change this name if necessary.
12. Click [Next >].
13. Click [Finish] in the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] dialog box.
The installation start dialog box reappears.
14. Check that the port of the machine is displayed in [Port :].
15. Click [Continue].
The driver installation starts.
16. After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the computer either
now or later, and then click [Finish].
Restart the computer to complete installation.
• To stop installation of the selected drivers, click [Cancel] before installation is complete.
• Auto Run might not work automatically with certain OS settings. If this is the case, double-click
“SETUP.EXE”, located on the CD-ROM root directory, or click [Run SETUP.EXE] in the [AutoPlay]
dialog box.
Using the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port
This describes how to install the LAN-Fax Driver using the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port.
For details about SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, see “Downloading Utility Software”, About This
Machine.
• To use this function, you must first download SmartDeviceMonitor for Client from the manufacturer's
Web site and install it on your computer. Contact your local dealer for information on downloading
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
• Manage Printers permission is required to install the drivers. Log on as an Administrators group
member.
1. Quit all applications currently running.
2. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
3. Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
4. Click [LAN-Fax Driver].
5. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
After reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
303
6. Fax via Computer
6. Click [Next >].
7. Double-click [Printer Name : <LAN-Fax M14>].
8. Click [Port :], and then click [Add].
9. Click [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [OK].
10. To configure port settings using TCP/IP, click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
A list of printers using TCP/IP appears.
To configure port settings using IPP, proceed to step 12.
11. Select the machine you want to use, and then click [OK].
Only printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer appear. To use a machine not listed
here, click [Specify Address], and then enter the IP address or host name of the machine.
Proceed to step 17.
12. To configure port settings using IPP, click [IPP].
13. In the [Printer URL] box, enter “http://machine's IP address/printer” as the machine's
address.
If the server authentication is issued, enter "https://printer's IP address/printer" to enable SSL (a
protocol for encrypted communication). Internet Explorer 5.0.1, or higher version must be installed
to use SSL.(example IP address: 192.168.15.16)
http://192.168.15.16/printer
https://192.168.15.16/printer
You can enter “http://machine's IP address/ipp” as the machine's address.
14. Enter a name for identifying the machine in [IPP Port Name]. Use a name different from
the one of any existing ports.
If a name is not specified here, the address entered in the [Printer URL] box becomes the IPP port
name.
15. Click [Detailed Settings] to make necessary settings.
For details about the settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.
16. Click [OK].
17. Check that the port of the machine is displayed in [Port :].
18. Click [Continue].
Installation starts.
19. After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the computer either
now or later, and then click [Finish].
Restart the computer to complete installation.
• To stop installation of the selected drivers, click [Cancel] before installation is complete.
304
Sending Fax Documents from Computers
• Auto Run might not work automatically with certain OS settings. If this is the case, double-click
“SETUP.EXE”, located on the CD-ROM root directory, or click [Run SETUP.EXE] in the [AutoPlay]
dialog box.
Installing the LAN-Fax Driver for USB Connection
Use this procedure to install the LAN-Fax Driver for USB connection.
• Before installing the LAN-Fax driver for USB connection, install the PCL6 printer driver for USB
connection using Quick Install. Then, check the printer driver's property for which USB port the
printer driver uses.
1. Quit all applications currently running.
2. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
3. Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
4. Click [LAN-Fax Driver].
5. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
After reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
6. Click [Next >].
7. Double-click [Printer Name : <LAN-Fax M14>].
8. Click [Port :].
9. From the list under “Change Settings for 'Port'”, click [USBxxx].
“xxx” varies depending on the number of USB ports created on your computer. Select the same
port being used by the printer driver.
10. Click [Continue].
11. When the message informing you that the installation was successfully completed
appears, click [Finish].
Setting LAN-Fax Driver Properties
This section explains how to set properties required for using LAN-Fax Driver.
• Manage Printers permission is required to set the properties for LAN-Fax Driver. Log on as an
Administrators group member.
• The method for selecting LAN-FAX Driver will vary according to your operating system. For details,
see Windows Help.
305
6. Fax via Computer
Setting print properties
This section explains how to make settings such as paper size or resolution.
1. On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel]. Then select [Printers and Other Hardware],
and then [Printers and Faxes].
In Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003/2003 R2, select [Printers and Faxes] on the
[Start] menu.
In Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008, select [Control Panel] on the [Start] menu. Then select
[Hardware and Sound], and then [Printers].
In Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2, select [Devices and Printers] on the [Start] menu.
2. Right click the [LAN-Fax M14], and then click [Printing Preferences...] to set the following
properties:
• Paper Size
• Orientation
• Tray
• Resolution
3. Click [OK].
Making settings for the machine's configuration
Make settings for the machine's configuration.
1. On the [Start] menu, select [Control Panel]. Then select [Printers and Other Hardware],
and then [Printers and Faxes].
In Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003/2003 R2, select [Printers and Faxes] on the
[Start] menu.
In Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008, select [Control Panel] on the [Start] menu. Then select
[Hardware and Sound], and then [Printers].
In Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2, select [Devices and Printers] on the [Start] menu.
2. Select to highlight [LAN-Fax M14], then click [Properties] on the [File] menu.
In Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2, right click the [LAN-Fax M14], and then click [Printer
Properties].
3. Click the [Accessories] tab, and then make the settings for [Hard Disk Unit].
4. Select the check boxes for [Hard Disk Unit].
5. Click [Apply].
6. Click [OK].
[Accessories] tab
306
Sending Fax Documents from Computers
The [Accessories] tab contains the following items:
• Prohibit manual destination entry
Check this option to prohibit direct specification of destinations.
• Enable E-mail
Check this when using Internet Fax with the LAN-Fax function.
• IP-Fax
Check this option when using IP-Fax.
After checking this option, select a protocol by clicking an appropriate radio button.
• If the machine's configuration is not configured as instructed, LAN-Fax functions may fail.
• If the machine is connected to a network and SmartDeviceMonitor for Client is installed on your
computer, the machine's configuration will be performed automatically. If the settings do not match
the machine's configuration, click [Load from Device].
Basic Transmission
This section explains how to send fax documents created using Windows applications.
To send a fax, simply select [Print...] from the Windows application, then select [LAN-Fax M14] as the
printer, and then specify a destination in the [LAN-Fax] dialog box.
Open the application document you want to send or create a new document, and then perform the
following procedure.
For details, see LAN-Fax Driver's Help.
• When entering a destination directly or using the destination list of the LAN-Fax to specify a
destination, you cannot specify an e-mail destination and folder destination.
1. On the [File] menu, click [Print...].
2. Select [LAN-Fax M14] in the list.
3. Click [Print].
The LAN-Fax dialog box appears.
The setting method may differ depending on the application you are using. In all cases, select
[LAN-Fax M14] for the printer.
4. Specify the destination.
You can specify the destination using the following methods:
• “Specifying a destination using a destination list”
307
6. Fax via Computer
• “Specifying a destination using Address Book”
• “Entering a destination directly”
When user authentication is used with this machine, click [User Settings...].
5. Specify necessary options.
For details about specifying options, see “Specifying Options” and “Confirming Transmission
Results by E-mail”.
6. Click [Send].
When you click [Send & Print], the fax is sent to the destination and your machine prints a copy of
the document you sent.
• The machine can retain documents sent from a LAN-Fax Driver as files to be sent.
• For the maximum values of the following items, see “Maximum Values”:
• Number of destinations you can specify per file
• Number of documents sent from a LAN-Fax Driver that the machine can retain as files to be
sent
• When the computer and machine are connected via USB 2.0, a printing error message such as
“This document failed to print” might appear, even though the print job was sent to the machine
correctly. If this happens, check the print job transmission result on the machine's control panel. For
details about how to check the transmission result, see “Checking the Transmission Result
(Transmission File Status)”.
• page 242 "Checking the Transmission Result (Transmission File Status)"
• page 308 "Specifying a destination using a destination list"
• page 309 "Specifying a destination using Address Book"
• page 310 "Entering a destination directly"
• page 311 "Specifying Options"
• page 314 "Confirming Transmission Results by E-mail"
• page 427 "Maximum Values"
Specifying a destination using a destination list
This section explains how to specify destinations in the machine's Address Book using LAN-Fax Driver.
• To use a destination list to specify a destination, you must insert the machine's address book data
into the destination table of the LAN-Fax Driver. See “Using the Machine's Address Book as the
LAN-Fax Destination List”.
308
Sending Fax Documents from Computers
1. Click the [Address Book] or [Specify Destination] tab.
The [Address Book] or [Specify Destination] tab appears.
2. Select the [Device Address] (or [Use device address]) check box.
Device addresses registered by selecting the [Use device address] check box in the Address Book
will appear on the [Address Book] tab.
3. The address is displayed in the [Device Address] field on the [Address Book] tab. On the
[Specify Destination] tab, enter the registration number of the Destination key in the
[Device Address:] box.
4. Click [Set as Destination].
The entered destination is added and appears in the [List of Destination:] box.
If you add a destination by mistake, click the wrong destination, and then click [Delete from List].
5. To specify more destinations, repeat steps 3 and 4.
• For details about specifying destinations, see the LAN-Fax Driver's Help.
• page 322 "Using the Machine's Address Book as the LAN-Fax Destination List"
Specifying a destination using Address Book
This section explains how to specify a destination using Address Book.
• In order to use this method, you need to register destinations in the address list using Address Book.
• To use device address data as the LAN-Fax Driver destination table, you must convert the
destinations registered on the machine to a CSV file and send that file to your computer. For details,
see “Using the Machine's Address Book as the LAN-Fax Destination List”.
1. Click the [Address Book] tab.
The [Address Book] tab appears.
2. Select a CSV file containing the desired destination list, from the [Address Book:]
dropdown menu.
Up to the three most recently used files appear in the dropdown menu. To use a destination list that
did not appear, click [Browse...], and then select the file.
3. Select [Contact] or [Group] in the [Name:] dropdown menu as the display format.
Destination list contents change as follows, depending on the option selected:
• Contact: Individual name, company name, department name, fax number
• Group: Group name
309
6. Fax via Computer
If you selected [Group], proceed to step 5.
4. If you selected [Contact] in step 3, select the type of fax from the [Type:] dropdown menu.
To send by standard fax or IP-Fax, select [Fax]. To send by Internet Fax, select [E-mail].
5. Click the destination in the destination list to highlight it, and then click [Set as
Destination].
The selected destination is added and appears in the [List of Destination:] box.
If you add a destination by mistake, click the wrong destination, and then click [Delete from List].
In the Address Book list box, directly enter the name you want to search for. You can then jump to
the name you entered.
6. To specify more destinations, repeat steps 2 through 5.
• For details about specifying destinations, see the LAN-Fax Driver's Help.
• Destination list contents can be narrowed down by selecting the first letter of a contact name,
company name or group name in the [Search] dropdown menu.
• page 322 "Using the Machine's Address Book as the LAN-Fax Destination List"
Entering a destination directly
This section explains how to enter a destination manually.
1. Click the [Specify Destination] tab.
The [Specify Destination] tab appears.
2. Select the type of fax from the [Type:] dropdown menu.
To send by standard fax or IP-Fax, select [Fax]. To send by Internet Fax, select [E-mail].
After you select the fax type, the items corresponding to the selected type appear.
3. Specify the destination.
Specify the destination depending on the selected fax type as follows:
• If you selected [Fax]: enter the fax number. To send by IP-Fax, enter the IP-Fax destination.
• If you selected [E-mail]: enter the e-mail address.
To enter a pause in the fax number, click [Pause]. If you selected [E-mail] in step 2, [Pause] is not
available.
4. Specify settings according to the type of fax transmission.
Specify settings according to the type of fax transmission selected in step 2, as follows:
• If you selected [Fax], select a line or a protocol in the [Line:] list.
310
Sending Fax Documents from Computers
• If you selected [E-mail], select the [Do not use SMTP server] check box if you want to bypass
the SMTP server.
5. Click [Set as Destination].
The entered destination is added and appears in the [List of Destination:] box.
If you add a destination by mistake, click the wrong destination, and then click [Delete from List].
6. To specify more destinations, repeat steps 2 through 5.
• For details about specifying destinations, see the LAN-Fax Driver's Help.
• For the maximum number of digits that can be included in a destination, see “Maximum Values”.
• page 427 "Maximum Values"
Specifying Options
You can specify the transmission options when sending a fax.
• Sending at specific time
• Print Fax Header
• Attach a Cover Sheet
• 2 sided printing
• Preview
• Save as file
• Document Server
• For details about transmission options, see the LAN-Fax Driver's Help.
To send a fax document at a specific time
Specify a time for sending fax documents.
1. Click [Send Options].
The [Send Options] tab appears.
2. Select the [Sending at specific time] check box, and then specify a transmission time.
To print a sender stamp
Print a sender stamp that is registered in the machine.
311
6. Fax via Computer
1. Click [Send Options].
The [Send Options] tab appears.
2. Select the [Print Fax Header] check box.
To attach a cover sheet
Attach a cover sheet to a document.
1. Click [Send Options].
The [Send Options] tab appears.
2. Select the [Attach a Cover Sheet] check box.
A cover sheet is added to the first page of a transmission file.
• Click [Edit Cover Sheet...] to edit the cover sheet. For details, see “Editing Fax Cover Sheets”.
• page 320 "Editing Fax Cover Sheets"
To specify two-sided printing
You can configure this machine to perform two-sided printing.
1. Click [Send Options].
The [Send Options] tab appears.
2. Select the [2 sided printing] check box.
To display preview
Selecting the [Preview] check box allows you to check how the fax document will be output at the
destination.
1. Click [Send Options].
The [Send Options] tab appears.
2. Select the [Preview] check box.
3. Click [Send], [Print], or [Send & Print].
The [Preview] window appears.
4. Click [Next] or [Previous] to check the image.
To close the [Preview] window, click [Cancel].
312
Sending Fax Documents from Computers
Saving as files
You can save the fax document in TIFF format (TIFF-F).
1. Click [Send Options].
The [Send Options] tab appears.
2. Select the [Save as file] check box.
3. Click [Save to...].
4. Select a folder on the folder tree.
5. Select a method of file naming.
To enter a file name manually, select the [Specify file name when saving] check box. To have the
file assigned a name and saved automatically, select the [Automatically create a new file] check
box.
6. Click [OK].
7. Click [Save] or [Save & Send].
If you select [Automatically create a new file], the image file is assigned a name and saved under
the specified folder.
The file name will be RicHHMMSS.tif (HH: hours, MM: minutes, SS: seconds).
8. Enter a file name.
You can also change the folder in this step.
9. Click [Save].
The image file is saved in the specified folder.
• Single-page documents are saved as single-page TIFF files, and multiple-page documents are
saved as multi-page TIFF files.
To store the fax document on the Document Server
Store sent fax documents on the Document Server.
• If [Hard Disk Unit] is not selected in [Accessories] on the printer properties dialog box, you cannot
select [Document Server].
1. Click [Send Options].
The [Send Options] tab appears.
2. Select the [Send to Document Server] check box, and then enter a user name, file name,
and password.
313
6. Fax via Computer
Checking Transmission Using LAN-Fax Driver
From Web Image Monitor, you can check information about files sent using LAN-Fax Driver.
For the maximum number of transmission results you can check, see “Maximum Values”.
• The job history may differ from the machine's transmission results. In that case, refer to the machine's
transmission results.
• See the Web Image Monitor's Help for details.
• page 427 "Maximum Values"
Confirming Transmission Results by E-mail
After communicating in the LAN-Fax mode, this function transmits the communication results with the
computer by e-mail.
When you have done [Send] or [Send & Print] using the LAN-Fax, and when the communication was
successful, it transmits e-mail of the transmission result.
Result notification e-mail is sent when printing is complete, or if an error occurs during communication
between this machine and a computer.
1. Click the [E-mail Settings] tab.
2. Select the [Notify] check box under [E-mail TX results].
3. Enter the destination.
When entering the e-mail address directly, click the [Specify destinations] radio button, and then
enter the e-mail address in the [Specify destinations] field.
When entering the machine's programmed address, click the [Device Address] radio button, and
then enter the registration number of the Destination key in the [Device Address] box.
The [Device Address] box is unavailable when [Specify destinations] is selected, and you cannot
enter anything in the text box.
4. Click [Send] or [Send & Print].
• You can confirm transmission results using the E-mail TX Results function and the Communication
Result Report. You can set whether to use both of these together in User Parameter (switch 10, bit
6) in the Facsimile Features menu. See “Parameter Settings”.
• If there be any insufficient configurations of the Internet Fax transmission on this machine, or if “Auto
Specify Sender Name” is set to “Off”, the E-mail TX results or LAN-Fax result notification e-mail is
not transmitted, and the TX results report or LAN-Fax Result Report is printed. See “Connecting the
314
Sending Fax Documents from Computers
Machine”, Network and System Settings Reference for the Internet Fax settings, and see “LAN-Fax
Result Report” for the LAN-Fax Result Report.
• page 315 "LAN-Fax Result Report"
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
LAN-Fax Result Report
This section explains the LAN-Fax Result Report.
If “E-mail TX results” is set to “Notify”, if there be any insufficient configurations of the Internet Fax
transmission on this machine, or if “Auto Specify Sender Name” is set to “Off”, the E-mail TX results or
LAN-Fax result notification e-mail is not transmitted, and the TX results report or LAN-Fax Result Report is
printed. If the “E-mail TX Results” of “Sender Name” has not been set to on, the LAN-Fax Result Report is
printed.
• Whether or not the LAN-Fax Result Report is printed, can be configured with User Parameter
(Switch 20, bit 0) in the Facsimile Features menu. See “Parameter Settings”.
• When executing [Send] or [Send & Print] with LAN-Fax Driver, and when the E-mail TX Result
Report has not arrived, the Communication Result Report is printed. For details about
Communication Result Report, see “Communication Result Report (Memory Transmission)”.
• page 245 "Communication Result Report (Memory Transmission)"
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
Printing and Saving
You can print documents created using Windows applications.
Open the application document you want to print or create a new document, and then perform the
following procedure.
1. On the [File] menu, click [Print...].
2. Select [LAN-Fax M14] in the list, and then click [Print].
The [LAN-Fax] dialog box appears.
The setting method may differ depending on the application you are using. In all cases, select
[LAN-Fax M14] for the printer.
315
6. Fax via Computer
3. On the [Address Book] tab, click [Print].
After specifying a destination, click [Send & Print]. This function directs the machine to print any sent
files.
• You can also save documents in TIFF format. For details about saving in TIFF format, see “Saving as
files”.
• You can select the length of time the machine keeps document data in memory if print fails due to
problems such as a paper shortage or paper jams. Make this setting with User Parameters (switch
20, bit 2, 3, 4, 5) in the Facsimile Features menu. Data is deleted when the specified length of time
elapses. See “Parameter Settings”.
• For details about printing the fax image, see the LAN-Fax Driver's Help.
• page 313 "Saving as files"
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
Editing Address Book
You can program and edit destinations in the address list using the Address Book.
• For details about the Address Book, see the LAN-Fax Driver's Help.
• You can use files created in CSV format as Address Book data. For this purpose, create CSV files
that conform to a certain format. For more information, see Help.
Registering new destinations
Register a new destination in the LAN-Fax Address Book.
1. On the [Start] menu, point to [All Programs], [LAN-Fax Utilities], and then click [Address
Book].
The [Address Book] dialog box appears.
If LAN-Fax Driver has already started up, click [Edit Address Book...].
2. Click [New/Browse...], and then select the CSV file containing the address list to be
edited.
3. Enter the destination and name.
You can enter a contact name, company name, department name, fax number, e-mail address
(Internet Fax destination), and IP-Fax address. The name and destination (Fax Number, E-mail
address or IP-Fax address) cannot be omitted.
316
Sending Fax Documents from Computers
4. Click [Add].
The destination is added to the destination list.
5. Click [Close].
6. If you made changes to a destination, a confirmation message appears. To save the
changes, click [Yes].
If you do not want to save the changes and want to quit editing, click [No].
To return to the editing display, click [Cancel].
The confirmation dialog box does not appear when you have not made any changes after starting
Address Book.
• To program the contents of the destination list of this machine to the Address Book, select the [Use
device address] check box, then enter the Destination key's registration number in the [Device
Address:] field.
• For [Line:] under [Fax Number:], the following line types are selectable; G3, G3-2, G3-3, G4, G3
Dir. Auto, G3 PABX Auto, or I-G3. However, this machine supports G3 only.
• For [Protocol:] under [IP-Fax address:], select [H.323] or [SIP].
• To bypass the SMTP server, under [E-mail address:], select the [Do not use SMTP server] check
box.
Editing registered destinations
Edit destinations registered in the LAN-Fax Address Book.
1. On the [Start] menu, point to [All Programs], [LAN-Fax Utilities], and then click [Address
Book].
The [Address Book] dialog box appears.
If LAN-Fax Driver has already started up, click [Edit Address Book...].
2. Click [New/Browse...], and then select the CSV file containing the address list to be
edited.
3. Select the destination you want to edit so it is highlighted in the list.
4. Edit the data.
5. Click [Update].
6. Click [Close].
7. If you made changes to a destination, a confirmation message appears. To save the
changes, click [Yes].
If you do not want to save the changes and want to quit editing, click [No].
To return to the editing display, click [Cancel].
317
6. Fax via Computer
The confirmation dialog box does not appear when you have not made any changes after starting
Address Book.
Deleting registered destinations
Delete destinations registered in the LAN-Fax Address Book.
1. On the [Start] menu, point to [All Programs], [LAN-Fax Utilities], and then click [Address
Book].
The [Address Book] dialog box appears.
If LAN-Fax Driver has already started up, click [Edit Address Book...].
2. Click [New/Browse...], and then select the CSV file containing the address list to be
edited.
3. Select the destination you want to delete so it is highlighted in the list.
4. Click [Delete].
5. Click [Yes].
6. Click [Close].
7. If you made changes to a destination, a confirmation message appears. To save the
changes, click [Yes].
If you do not want to save the changes and want to quit editing, click [No].
To return to the editing display, click [Cancel].
The confirmation dialog box does not appear when you have not made any changes after starting
Address Book.
Registering new groups
Register a new group in the LAN-Fax Address Book.
1. On the [Start] menu, point to [All Programs], [LAN-Fax Utilities], and then click [Address
Book].
The [Address Book] dialog box appears.
If LAN-Fax Driver has already started up, click [Edit Address Book...].
2. Click [New/Browse...], and then select the CSV file containing the address list to be
edited.
3. Click [Group].
4. Click [New], and then enter the group name.
5. Click [OK].
6. Select the group you want to register so it is highlighted in the group list.
318
Sending Fax Documents from Computers
7. From [Address Book], select the destination you want to include in the group, and then
click [Add to Group].
8. Click [Close] twice.
9. If you made changes to a destination, a confirmation message appears. To save the
changes, click [Yes].
If you do not want to save the changes and want to quit editing, click [No].
To return to the editing display, click [Cancel].
The confirmation dialog box does not appear when you have not made any changes after starting
Address Book.
• A group must contain at least one destination.
• A group name must be specified for a group. No two groups can have the same group name.
• A single destination can be included in more than one group.
Editing registered groups
Edit groups registered in the LAN-Fax Address Book.
1. On the [Start] menu, point to [All Programs], [LAN-Fax Utilities], and then click [Address
Book].
The [Address Book] dialog box appears.
If LAN-Fax Driver has already started up, click [Edit Address Book...].
2. Click [New/Browse...], and then select the CSV file containing the address list to be
edited.
3. Click [Group].
4. Select the group you want to edit so it is highlighted in the group list.
5. To add a destination to a group, select the destination you want to add from [Address
Book], and then click [Add to Group].
6. To delete a destination from the group, select the destination you want to delete from [List
of Group Members], and then click [Delete Member].
7. Click [Close] twice.
8. If you made changes to a destination, a confirmation message appears. To save the
changes, click [Yes].
If you do not want to save the changes and want to quit editing, click [No].
To return to the editing display, click [Cancel].
The confirmation dialog box does not appear when you have not made any changes after starting
Address Book.
319
6. Fax via Computer
• To change a group name, select the group, and then click [Change Name]. Enter a new name for
the group, and then click [OK].
• A message appears if the name you specified already exists in the LAN-Fax Address Book. Click
[OK] and register it under a different name.
Deleting registered groups
Delete groups registered in the LAN-Fax Address Book.
1. On the [Start] menu, point to [All Programs], [LAN-Fax Utilities], and then click [Address
Book].
The [Address Book] dialog box appears.
If LAN-Fax Driver has already started up, click [Edit Address Book...].
2. Click [New/Browse...], and then select the CSV file containing the address list to be
edited.
3. Click [Group].
4. Select the group you want to delete so it is highlighted in the group list.
5. Click [Delete].
6. Click [Yes].
7. Click [Close] twice.
8. If you made changes to a destination, a confirmation message appears. To save the
changes, click [Yes].
If you do not want to save the changes and want to quit editing, click [No].
To return to the editing display, click [Cancel].
The confirmation dialog box does not appear when you have not made any changes after starting
Address Book.
Editing Fax Cover Sheets
LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor allows you to edit the format for fax cover sheets.
• It is necessary to create a cover sheet file before attaching a cover sheet to fax document using
LAN-Fax Driver.
320
Sending Fax Documents from Computers
Creating a cover sheet
This section explains how to create a fax cover sheet.
You can edit the following items using LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor:
• Company name as destination information
• Department name as destination information
• Contact name as destination information
• Company name as sender information
• Department name as sender information
• Contact name as sender information
• Telephone number as sender information
• Fax number as sender information
• Date
• Message
1. On the [Start] menu, point to [All Programs], [LAN-Fax Utilities], and then click [LAN-Fax
Cover Sheet Editor].
The [LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor] dialog box appears.
2. Edit the cover sheet.
For details about operations, see Help.
3. Click [Save as...] on the [File] menu.
4. Select a folder, and then enter a file name.
5. Click [Save].
• Cover sheet data is stored in its own format (using “fcp” as its extension).
Attaching a created cover sheet
This section explains how to attach a created cover sheet file to a fax document.
1. On the [File] menu, click [Print...].
2. Select [LAN-Fax M14] in the list, and then click [Print].
The [LAN-Fax] dialog box appears.
3. Click [Edit Cover Sheet...].
The [Cover Sheet] dialog box appears.
321
6. Fax via Computer
4. Select a cover sheet file from the dropdown list or after clicking [Browse...] in [Select
Cover Sheet].
The selection made in [Select Cover Sheet] is not canceled unless you select another file. If you
want to change only destination information, omit this step and proceed to step 5.
5. Select the type of information from [To:].
You can select [Use Address Book], [To Whom It May Concern], [Edit Names], or [(None)].
Selecting [Edit Names] allows you to enter company, department, and contact names.
6. To print the date, select the [With a Date] check box.
7. Enter the sender information.
You can enter company, department, and contact names, and telephone and fax numbers.
To add a message, select the [With a Message] check box, and then enter a message.
8. Click [OK].
9. Specify a destination.
10. Click the [Send Options] tab, and then select the [Attach a Cover Sheet] check box.
11. Click [Send] or [Send & Print].
Managing Facsimile Functions Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
You can check information about this machine's fax functions using a computer and save files on a
computer using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
• To use this function, you must first download SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin from the
manufacturer's Web site and install it on your computer. Contact your local dealer for information
on downloading SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
• For information about SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, see “Downloading Utility Software”, About
This Machine.
Using the Machine's Address Book as the LAN-Fax Destination List
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, you can copy the machine's Address Book data as a CSV file to
a computer. This file can then be used as the LAN-Fax Destination List, and can also be installed on the
machine using [Address Management Tool]. This section explains how to use the Address Book for LANFax.
322
Sending Fax Documents from Computers
• To use this function, you must first download SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin from the
manufacturer's Web site and install it on your computer. Contact your local dealer for information
on downloading SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
• When destinations registered in groups by this machine are inserted into Address Book, each
person's destination is determined according to the following order of priority (check before
inserting and changing the order of priority, if necessary): IP-Fax destination Fax number Email address
• Depending on the machine type, you may not be able to use the machine when it is updating the
Address Book using CSV files (retrieved using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin) that contain user
codes.
• For details, see “SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin” Help.
Copying the machine's Address Book to a computer
1. Launch SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
The machine is automatically detected and its model and IP address appear in the network list.
If nothing appears in the list, select [Search/Monitoring Settings] in the [Searched Device List]
menu, then select the [Specify Address] check box and enter the machine's IP address in the [From]
and [To] boxes, and then click [Add] and [OK]. Then check the machine's IP address. To do this, on
the machine's control panel, press the [User Tools/Counter] key, then press [System Settings],
[Interface Settings], and then [Machine IPv4 Address]. If the machine's IP address still does not
appear in the list, check the settings of any security applications that are installed, as these settings
might be disabling display of the IP address.
2. Select the model of your machine, click [Tools], and then click [Address Management
Tool].
3. In the [Enter Authentication Information] dialog box, specify the user name and
password, and then click [OK].
Enter the factory-set user name “admin”, and leave the password blank.
The “Address Management Tool - Receiving Information” message appears briefly, and then the
machine's Address Book appears.
4. In the [Address Management Tool] dialog box, click [File], and then click [Export Data].
If the "The password information cannot be reused in any device." message appears, click [OK].
5. Select where to store the file, and then click [Save].
The following three files will be stored:
• “Machinemodel_addr.csv”
323
6. Fax via Computer
• “Machinemodel_faxinfo.csv”
• “Machinemodel_taginfo.csv”
“Machinemodel_addr.csv” will be used as the Address Book file.
The Address Book data is now stored in the computer.
6. Close the [Address Management Tool] dialog box, and then close SmartDeviceMonitor
for Admin.
This will be followed by a procedure for displaying the computer's Address Book file on the LAN
Fax screen.
Using the Address Book stored in the computer for LAN-Fax
1. On the [File] menu, click [Print...].
2. Select [LAN-Fax M14], and then click [Print].
The LAN-Fax dialog box appears.
3. In [Address Book], click [Browse...].
4. Select the Address Book file, and then click [Open].
Select “Machinemodel_addr.csv”.
The Address Book appears.
5. Specify the destination.
For details about sending the file, see “Sending Fax Documents from Computers”.
• page 299 "Sending Fax Documents from Computers"
LAN-Fax Operation Messages
This section explains typical operation error messages displayed on the computer when using the LANFax Driver, and solutions to those messages.
Message
324
Causes and Solutions
The number of entries in Destinations exceed
the limits. Up to 500 entries can be entered.
The number of destinations specified exceeds the
maximum possible. The maximum number of
destinations that can be specified at one time is 500.
“LAN-Fax” has already been launched.
Cannot launch it again.
The [LAN-Fax] dialog box is already open. Quit
LAN-Fax once, and then start it up again.
Sending Fax Documents from Computers
Message
Failed to allocate memory.
Causes and Solutions
Available memory on the computer is insufficient.
Quit applications currently not in use.
325
6. Fax via Computer
Viewing Fax Information Using a Web
Browser
You can view received fax documents and their lists or print these documents using Web Image Monitor
on a network computer.
• It is recommended that you use Web Image Monitor running under the same network environment
as this machine. Otherwise, the Web browser may not open and an error may occur.
• You need to select “Store” as the “Reception File Setting” in the Facsimile Features menu. For
details about Reception File Setting, see “Reception File Setting”.
• For details about using Web Image Monitor, see “Monitoring and Configuring the Machine”,
Network and System Settings Reference.
• page 360 "Reception File Setting"
Viewing, Printing, and Deleting Received Fax Documents Using Web Image
Monitor
This section explains how to view and/or print received fax documents using Web Image Monitor.
Viewing received fax documents using a Web browser
Check the content of received documents stored in the machine.
1. Start a Web browser.
2. Enter “http://(IPv4 address, IPv6 address or host name of this machine)/” in the address
bar.
The top page of Web Image Monitor is displayed.
3. Click [Fax Received File] in the left pane.
4. If you have programmed a user code for the stored reception file, enter the code, and
then press [OK].
A list of the received fax documents appears.
If the programmed user code was deleted using the Address Book Management function under
System Settings, a message indicating incorrect user code entry appears. If this is the case,
reprogram a user code.
326
Viewing Fax Information Using a Web Browser
5. Click the property icon
of the desired fax document.
When viewing a list of the fax documents, you can select the thumbnail display, icon display, or
detail display. Click , , or .
6. View the content of the fax document.
7. To download the received fax document, click [PDF] or [Multi-page: TIFF], and then click
[Download].
A downloading confirmation dialog box appears.
When you select [PDF], make the necessary “PDF File Security Settings” before clicking
[Download]. Acrobat Reader starts and the selected document is displayed.
8. Close the Web browser.
• If your computer cannot be connected to Web Image Monitor, see “Monitoring and Configuring
the Machine”, Network and System Settings Reference.
• To enlarge the preview image, click [Enlarge Image]. Enlargement cannot be performed without
Acrobat Reader installed. For more information, see Web Image Monitor Help.
• To download the document data on the list of received fax documents, click [TIFF] or [PDF]. For
details about downloading, see Web Image Monitor Help.
• The method for downloading differs depending on the selected format. For more information, see
Web Image Monitor Help.
Printing fax information using a Web browser
Print received documents stored in the machine.
1. Start a Web browser.
2. Enter “http://(IPv4 address, IPv6 address or host name of this machine)/” in the address
bar.
The top page of Web Image Monitor is displayed.
3. Click [Fax Received File] in the left pane.
The list of received fax documents appears.
4. Select the check box of the fax document to be printed.
When viewing a list of the fax documents, you can select the thumbnail display, icon display, or
detail display. Click , , or .
5. Click [Print].
6. Click [Print].
To cancel printing, press [Cancel] before clicking [Print].
327
6. Fax via Computer
7. Click [OK].
The display returns to that of step 5.
8. Close the Web browser.
• You can change the printing order of selected multiple documents. You can also have documents
printed on both sides of the paper. For more information, see Web Image Monitor Help.
Deleting fax information using a Web browser
Delete received documents stored in the machine.
1. Start a Web browser.
2. Enter “http://(IPv4 address, IPv6 address or host name of this machine)/” in the address
bar.
The top page of Web Image Monitor is displayed.
3. Click [Fax Received File] in the left pane.
The list of received fax documents appears.
4. Select the check box of the fax document to be deleted.
When viewing a list of the fax documents, you can select the thumbnail display, icon display, or
detail display. Click , , or .
5. Click [Delete].
6. Click [Delete File(s)].
To cancel deletion, press [Cancel] before clicking [Delete File(s)].
7. Click [OK].
The display returns to that of step 5.
8. Close the Web browser.
• After selecting multiple documents, you can also cancel deletion of some of the selected
documents. For more information, see Web Image Monitor Help.
Programming Destination Information from Web Browser
If the receiving machine is compliant with T.37 full mode Internet Fax, you can program the receiver's
properties from Web Image Monitor.
You can program the following properties:
• Compression Type
328
Viewing Fax Information Using a Web Browser
• Paper size
• Resolution
• For a detailed description, see Web Image Monitor Help.
• For details about the T.37 full mode, see “T.37 Full Mode”.
• When a receiver that is programmed as full mode in the Address Book returns a Reception Notice
e-mail, the contents of the newly received e-mail overwrite the existing information.
• page 46 "T.37 Full Mode"
To edit machine properties already programmed
Use Web Image Monitor to edit information about the destination machine registered in the Address
Book.
1. Start a Web browser.
2. Enter “http://(IPv4 address, IPv6 address or host name of this machine)/” in the address
bar.
The top page of Web Image Monitor is displayed.
3. Click [Login], and then enter the Administrator's name and password.
4. Click [Address Book] in the left pane.
The Address Book is displayed.
5. Click the radio button to the left of the machine you want to modify, and then click
[Change].
The [Change User] page appears.
6. Set the properties for Internet Fax data format other than the mode selection.
If you change the mode to “Simple Mode”, you cannot set machine properties.
7. Click [OK] at the upper or lower left of the screen.
To cancel the setting, click [Cancel] at the upper or lower left of the screen.
The Address Book is displayed.
8. Close the Web browser.
To add new receiver
Use Web Image Monitor to add a new destination to the Address Book.
1. Start a Web browser.
329
6. Fax via Computer
2. Enter “http://(IPv4 address, IPv6 address or host name of this machine)/” in the address
bar.
The top page of Web Image Monitor is displayed.
3. Click [Login], and then enter the Administrator's name and password.
4. Click [Address Book] in the left pane.
The Address Book is displayed.
5. Click [Add User].
The [Add User] page appears.
6. Enter the registration number, name, and e-mail address, then set the necessary
properties.
You can set the Internet Fax data format after entering the e-mail address.
7. Click [Full Mode] under [Internet Fax Data Format], and set the properties according to
the receiver's properties.
If you change the mode to “Simple Mode”, you cannot set machine properties.
8. Click [OK] at the upper or lower left of the screen.
To cancel the setting, click [Cancel] at the upper or lower left of the screen.
The Address Book is displayed.
9. Close the Web browser.
330
Delivering Files Received by Fax
Delivering Files Received by Fax
Documents received by the machine can be viewed on or downloaded to a computer using ScanRouter
delivery software as the network delivery server.
This is a useful function, enabling you to view and store documents on your computer without printing
them.
• The ScanRouter delivery software*1 is required as a delivery server.
• To view or download documents stored in the delivery server inbox, you must first download
DeskTopBinder Lite from the manufacturer's Web site and install it on your computer. Contact your
local dealer for information on downloading DeskTopBinder Lite.
*1 For details to purchase ScanRouter delivery software, contact your local dealer. With the Global Scan NX
(optional), you can also use this function.
Using the delivery server, you can eliminate the task of retrieving and delivering documents.
Functions
Delivery server provides the following functions:
• Use the delivery server to associate incoming documents (SUB Code, Own Name, and Own
Fax Number) with receivers, so documents are delivered to the intended receivers.
• You can select the delivery method for incoming documents: “Save in the delivery server
inbox”, “Send as an e-mail attachment”, or “Save in the designated folder on the computer”.
Incoming documents with no SUB Code, Own Name, or Own Fax Number are saved in the
delivery server inbox. You can also set it so that the received documents are stored in the
specified delivery server inbox according to the line used for reception.
• You can check or download received documents stored in the delivery server inbox using
DeskTopBinder.
• Documents received in Personal Boxes are also forwarded to the delivery server.
• To send received documents to your computer as e-mail attachments, your computer must have an
e-mail application that is compatible with the ScanRouter delivery software.
• To create a network using the delivery server, you must specify the machine's Fax RX File
Transmission settings under System Settings. The delivery server must also be configured. For details
about Fax RX File Transmission, see “File Transfer”, Network and System Settings Reference.
• For details about the delivery server (ScanRouter delivery software), see the ScanRouter delivery
software's Help or instructions.
• For information about DeskTopBinder, see DeskTopBinder's manual and Help.
331
6. Fax via Computer
332
7. Facsimile Features
This chapter describes user tools in the Facsimile Features menu.
Accessing User Tools
User Tools allow you to change or set defaults.
• Operations for system settings differ from normal operations. Always quit User Tools when you
have finished.
• Any changes you make with User Tools remain in effect even if the main power switch or operation
switch is turned off, or the [Energy Saver] key or [Clear Modes] key is pressed.
• Default settings are shown in bold type.
Changing Default Settings
This section describes how to change the settings of User Tools.
• If Administrator Authentication Management is specified, contact your administrator.
1. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
CCS003
2. Select the menu.
To change the Facsimile Features, press [Facsimile Features].
3. Select the user tool you want to change.
4. Change settings by following instructions on the display, and then press [OK].
333
7. Facsimile Features
• To cancel changes made to settings and return to the initial display, press the [User Tools/Counter]
key.
Quitting User Tools
This section describes how to end User Tools.
1. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
CCS003
• You can also quit User Tools by pressing [Exit].
334
General Settings
General Settings
This section describes the user tools in the General Settings menu under Facsimile Features.
Quick Operation Key (1-3)
Frequently used functions programmed as Quick Operation keys are shown on the menu
immediately after the power is turned on.
If [On] is selected, the Quick Operation keys can be programmed with the following items:
• On
• Manual E-mail RX
• Send Later
• Subject
• Text
• Recept. Notice
• E-mail TX Results
• BCC Transmission
• Std. Message
• Fax Header Print
• Label Insertion
• Closed Network
• SUB Code TX
• SEP Code Reception
• Print Memory Lock
• TX File Status
• RX File Status
• Journal
• Print Stored RX File
• TX Status Report
• Forwarding
• Switch RX Mode
• Off
Up to three functions can be programmed to Quick Operation keys.
Functions that are highlighted have already been set.
Default for Quick Operation Key 1: [No] (not programmed)
335
7. Facsimile Features
Default for Quick Operation Key 2: [TX File Status]
Default for Quick Operation Key 3: [RX File Status]
Switch Title
Select the title to be shown on the destination list.
Default: [Title 1]
Search Destination
Select a destination list to be used in “Search Destination”.
You can select from the Address Book, or a registered LDAP Server.
To search from an LDAP server, it is necessary to register the LDAP server in [System Settings] and
set [LDAP Search] to [On].
Default: [Address Book]
For details about “LDAP Search”, see “Administrator Tools”, Network and System Settings
Reference.
Communication Page Count
Checks the transmission and reception, and totals on the display.
• Pages Sent:
Total number of transmitted pages
• Pages Received:
Total number of received pages
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [General Settings].
3. Press [Communication Page Count].
4. After checking the display, press [Exit].
5. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
Adjust Sound Volume
Adjust the sound volume during On Hook Mode and Immediate Transmission.
Default: [level 2]
Box Setting
The following functions are for delivery and transfer of documents:
• Personal Box
• Information Box
• Transfer Box
For details about Box Setting, see “Box Settings”.
336
General Settings
Box Setting: Print List
You can print a list of the currently registered Personal Boxes, Information Boxes, and Transfer
Boxes.
On Hook Mode Release Time
Use this function to specify a time to cancel On Hook mode after you transmit using On Hook
dialing.
Default: [3 minutes]
Delete Recent Destinations
You can delete destinations stored in “Recent Destinations”.
When you press [Delete Recent Destinations], a confirmation message appears. To delete the
recent destinations, select [Delete].
• page 398 "Box Settings"
337
7. Facsimile Features
Scan Settings
This section describes the user tools in the Scan Settings menu under Facsimile Features.
Program / Change / Delete Scan Size
You can program, change, or cancel frequently used scan sizes.
For details about programming Scan Size, see “Program / Change / Delete Scan Size”.
• page 368 "Program / Change / Delete Scan Size"
338
Send Settings
Send Settings
This section describes the user tools in the Send Settings menu under Facsimile Features.
Max. E-mail Size
When the other party has a limit on the size of e-mail messages that can be received, or sending
data heavy e-mail causes problems, you can make settings to limit the size of sent e-mail. When
this function is set to on, transmission of e-mail that exceeds the set size is aborted.
Default: [Off]
When e-mail exceeds the maximum file size, an Error Report is output, and the e-mail is deleted.
Even when e-mail does not exceed the size limit, it may be rejected if it does not meet the
requirements of the server settings.
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [Send Settings].
3. Press [Max. E-mail Size].
4. Press [On].
5. Enter the maximum e-mail size using the number keys.
Maximum e-mail size can be between 128 and 102,400 KB.
If you make a mistake, press [Clear], and then enter again.
6. Press [OK].
339
7. Facsimile Features
Program / Change / Delete Standard Message
Program standard messages to be printed at the top of the first page of the original of the opposite
party. It is useful for personalizing messages such as sending greetings.
You can program three standard messages. You cannot change the “Confidential”, “Urgent”,
“Please phone”, or “Copy to corres. Section” messages.
The procedure is the same for both programming and changing.
For details about how to enter the text, see “Entering Text”, About This Machine.
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [Send Settings].
3. Press [Program / Change / Delete Standard Message].
4. Check that [Program / Change] is selected.
To delete a registered standard message, press [Delete], then select the message you want to
delete, and then press [Delete]. Then proceed to step 8.
5. Select the message you want to program or change.
6. Enter a new message.
7. Press [OK].
To cancel a registration, press [Cancel].
8. Press [Exit].
9. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
Memory File Transfer
If the printer has stopped functioning or run out of toner or paper, you can transfer the files in
facsimile memory to another machine for printing. Note that this function forwards all documents
that are stored in memory, including files that were received with Memory Lock. Use this function
only in emergencies. For details, see “Memory File Transfer”.
Backup File TX Setting
You can specify whether or not to send to a selected folder the backup of a file sent by Memory
Transmission.
340
Send Settings
By setting [Backup File TX Setting] to [On] and selecting the destination folder, you can
automatically send to the selected folder the backup of a file sent by Memory Transmission using
the machine's control panel, Web Image Monitor or LAN-Fax.
Select the destination folder for the backup file from the address book.
Default: [Off]
If you set [Backup File TX Setting] to [On] but the Backup File TX fails, the machine automatically
prints a backup file TX communication failure report.
Using the parameter settings (switch 37 bit 2, 3), you can specify whether or not the backup file is
printed along with the failure report when a backup file TX communication failure occurs.
The backup file format will be the same as that specified for files forwarded to folder destinations.
Using the parameter settings (switch 21, bit 3), select TIFF or PDF as the format for sending a file.
The format is factory-preset to TIFF.
Using the parameter settings, you can specify the redial interval (switch 35, bits 0-7) and the
maximum number of redials (switch 36, bits 0-7). The redial interval is factory-preset to 15 minutes;
the maximum number of redials, to 192.
Using the parameter settings, (switch 37, bit 0) you can specify whether to stop sending a backup
file if the destination folder becomes full while the machine is sending or waiting to send a fax or
the backup file.
For details about Parameter Setting, see “Parameter Settings”.
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [Send Settings].
3. Press [Backup File TX Setting].
4. Press [On].
If there is a folder already programmed, a folder name is shown. If you want to change the
folder, press [Folder] and proceed to step 5.
5. Specify a folder for back up, and then press [OK].
The folder name is shown to the right of [Folder].
6. Press [OK].
7. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
• page 353 "Memory File Transfer"
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
341
7. Facsimile Features
Reception Settings
This section describes the user tools in the Reception Settings menu under Facsimile Features.
Switch Reception Mode
Specify the method for receiving fax documents.
Default: [Auto Reception]
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [Reception Settings].
3. Press [Switch Reception Mode].
4. Select the reception mode, and then press [OK].
To cancel the selection, press [Cancel].
5. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
For details about reception mode, see “Reception Modes”.
Program Special Sender
By programming particular receivers as Special Sender in advance, you can have Special Senders
treated differently.
For details about how to program Special Sender, see “Special Senders to Treat Differently”.
Program Special Sender: Print List
You can print the Special Sender List.
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [Reception Settings].
3. Press [Program Special Sender: Print List].
4. Press the [Start] key.
To cancel printing a list before pressing the [Start] key, press [Cancel].
To cancel printing a list after pressing the [Start] key, press [Stop Printing].
5. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
Forwarding
Specify whether or not received fax documents are to be forwarded to a programmed receiver.
Default: [Off]
For details about Forwarding, see “Forwarding”.
Reception File Setting
Select whether received documents are saved on the hard disk to be printed later or printed
immediately without being saved.
Default: [Print]
342
Reception Settings
For details about Reception File Setting, see “Reception File Setting”.
Stored Reception File User Setting
The administrator can be specified for managing documents stored on the machine after fax
documents are received. To specify the administrator, enter the administrator user code for
managing documents using Web Image Monitor. You can also restrict control panel operations
such as printing or deleting received documents.
Default: [Off]
For details about Stored Reception File User Setting, see “Stored Reception File User Setting”.
SMTP RX File Delivery Settings
This function is available on systems that allow routing of e-mail received via SMTP.
Default: [Off]
For details about SMTP RX File Delivery Settings, see “SMTP Reception File Delivery Settings”.
2 Sided Print
Specify whether or not received fax documents are to be printed on both sides of the paper.
Default: [Off]
Checkered Mark
Specify whether or not a checkered mark is to be printed on the first page of received fax
documents.
Default: [On]
Centre Mark
Specify whether or not a center mark is to be printed halfway down the left side and at the top
center of each page received.
Default:
(mainly Europe and Asia)
[On]
(mainly North America)
[Off]
Print Reception Time
Specify whether or not the received date, time, and file number are printed at the bottom of
received fax documents.
Default: [Off]
Reception File Print Quantity
Specify the number of copies to be printed for each fax document received.
• 1 to 10 set(s)
Default: [1 set(s)]
343
7. Facsimile Features
Paper Tray
Use this function to print fax documents received from programmed senders and fax documents
from other senders, using different paper trays.
Display of tray names may differ depending on the options installed.
Default: [Auto Select]
Specify Tray for Lines
Specify a paper tray for each line (telephone, Internet Fax, IP-Fax).
Default: [Off]
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [Reception Settings].
3. Press [ Next].
4. Press [Specify Tray for Lines].
5. Press [On].
If you select [Off], the received fax is delivered to a default tray.
6. Select the line type.
7. Select a tray to deliver the received paper onto, and then press [OK].
If you want to specify another line type, repeat from step 6.
8. Press [OK].
344
Reception Settings
9. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
Folder Transfer Result Report
You can set whether the Folder Transfer Result Report is transmitted to the specified e-mail address,
when folders are programmed as the forwarding destinations to which documents are sent from all
senders or Special Senders.
You must first register the destination for the Folder Transfer Result Report in the destination list. See
“E-mail Destination”, Network and System Settings Reference.
Specify a group destination to transfer documents to multiple destinations. A maximum of 500
parties can be specified in a group. See “Registering Names to a Group”, Network and System
Settings Reference.
Even if the Folder Transfer Result Report is not successfully transmitted, the report is not printed on
this machine.
Default: [Do not E-mail]
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [Reception Settings].
3. Press [ Next].
4. Press [Folder Transfer Result Report].
5. To send the Folder Transfer Result Report, press [E-mail].
To not send the Folder Transfer Result Report, press [Do not E-mail], and then press [OK].
6. Press the Destination key of the e-mail address for notification, and then press [OK].
7. Check the selected destination, and then press [OK].
8. Press [Exit].
9. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
Memory Lock Reception
When you switch Memory Lock on, received documents are stored in memory and not printed
automatically. When a document is received in the Memory Lock mode, the Confidential File
indicator blinks. To print this document, enter the Memory Lock ID. A user without the ID cannot
print the document.
This prevents unauthorized users from accessing the document. To use Memory Lock, program the
Memory Lock ID, and then switch Memory Lock on. To store incoming documents from Special
Senders only in Memory Lock, program each sender with “Special Senders to Treat Differently”.
This function cannot be used with Internet Fax or Mail to Print.
Default: [Off]
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [Reception Settings].
3. Press [ Next].
345
7. Facsimile Features
4. Press [Memory Lock Reception].
5. Select [On] or [Off], and then press [OK].
6. Press [Exit].
7. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
• page 196 "Reception Modes"
• page 355 "Forwarding"
• page 360 "Reception File Setting"
• page 363 "Stored Reception File User Setting"
• page 365 "SMTP Reception File Delivery Settings"
• page 385 "Special Senders to Treat Differently"
346
Initial Settings
Initial Settings
This section describes the user tools in the Initial Settings menu under Facsimile Features.
Parameter Setting
User Parameters allow you to customize various settings to suit your needs.
For details about Parameter Setting, see “Parameter Settings”.
Parameter Setting: Print List
You can print Parameter Setting list.
Print this list to see the current User Parameter settings. However, not all the parameter settings are
printed.
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [Initial Settings].
3. Press [Parameter Setting: Print List].
4. Press the [Start] key.
To cancel printing a list before pressing the [Start] key, press [Cancel].
To cancel printing a list after pressing the [Start] key, press [Stop Printing].
5. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
Program Closed Network Code
Register an ID required for Closed Network communication.
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [Initial Settings].
3. Press [Program Closed Network Code].
4. Enter an ID using the number keys and [A] to [F], and then press [OK].
Register a four-digit number using 0 to 9 and A to F (except for 0000 and FFFF).
5. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
347
7. Facsimile Features
Program Memory Lock ID
Program a Memory Lock ID to be entered before printing documents when the Memory Lock
function is activated.
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [Initial Settings].
3. Press [Program Memory Lock ID].
4. Enter an ID using the number keys, and then press [OK].
A Memory Lock ID can be any four-digit number, except 0000.
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] before pressing [OK], and then try again.
5. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
For details about printing a file received with Memory Lock, see “Printing a File Received with
Memory Lock”.
Internet Fax Setting
You can select to display the Internet Fax tab or not. When you want to send an Internet Fax, set
On to display the tab.
Default: [Off]
Select Dial / Push Phone
Use this function to select a line type when the machine is connected to a G3 analog line.
Dial and Push lines are available for selection.
This function is not available in some regions.
Default: [Push Button Phone]
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [Initial Settings].
3. Press [Select Dial / Push Phone].
4. Press [Push Button Phone] or [Dial Phone (10PPS)] to select the line, and then press [OK].
5. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
348
Initial Settings
Program Fax Information
Program information to be shown on the display of the other machine and printed as a report. The
following information can be programmed:
• Fax Header
• Own Name
• Own Fax Number
For details about how to program Fax Information, see “Registering Fax Information”.
Enable H.323
Specify whether or not H.323 is used for IP-Fax transmission.
Default: [Off]
Enable SIP
Specify whether or not SIP is used for IP-Fax transmission.
Default: [Off]
H.323 Settings
Set the IPv4 address or host name, and alias telephone number of the gatekeeper.
If you select “On” using the User Parameters, you can use the gatekeeper server. See “Parameter
Settings” (switch 34, bit 0).
You can use numbers, and symbols (“ ” and “ ”) for registration of the alias telephone number
in H.323 Settings. Make sure you enter these characters correctly.
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [Initial Settings].
3. Press [H.323 Settings].
4. Press [Change] for each property.
5. Enter the IPv4 address or host name, and alias telephone number and press [OK].
6. Press [OK].
7. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
SIP Settings
Set the SIP server's IP address or host name, and SIP user name. You can register either an IPv4 or
IPv6 address for the SIP server. You cannot register an IPv4-mapped address.
If you select “On” using the User Parameters, you can use the SIP server. See “Parameter Settings”
(switch 34, bit 1).
You can use alphanumeric symbols (lower and upper cases) and symbols (“; ”, “? ”, “: ”, “&”,
“=”, “+”, “$”, “, ”, “-”, “_”, “. ”, “! ”, “ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “'”, “(”,“) ”, “%”, “/”, “[”, “]”, and “@”)
for registration of the SIP User Name in SIP Settings. Make sure you enter these characters
correctly.
349
7. Facsimile Features
Use numbers and periods (“.”) to enter the correct IPv4 addresses for the gatekeeper, SIP server,
and gateway. To obtain the correct IP addresses, consult the administrator.
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [Initial Settings].
3. Press [SIP Settings].
4. Press [Change] for each property.
A proxy server relays call requests and responses.
A redirect server processes request destination inquiries.
A register server registers location information of user agents (which correspond to telephones
or facsimiles on public telephone lines) on an IP network.
5. Enter the IP address or host name, and SIP user name, and then press [OK].
6. Specify whether to perform SIP digest authentication.
If you select [On], enter the password using up to 128 characters.
Re-enter the password after the message "Confirm Password" appears on the screen.
7. Press [OK].
8. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
Program / Change / Delete Gateway
Register, change, or delete the gateway used for transmission to IP-Fax. You can register either an
IPv4 or IPv6 address for the Gateway. You cannot register an IPv4-mapped address.
• Program / Change
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [Initial Settings].
3. Press [Program / Change / Delete Gateway].
4. Check that [Program / Change] is selected.
5. Press a VoIP gateway to register.
When registering a new VoIP gateway, press [Not Programmed].
350
Initial Settings
6. Press [Change] for “Prefix”.
7. Enter the Prefix using the number keys, and then press [OK].
To change the existing prefix, press [Clear], and then enter a new prefix.
For documents sent using a VoIP gateway to G3 Fax, prefixes can be used. If the first
several digits of IP-Fax number and the gateway- specific prefix are identical, documents
can be transmitted using the registered digits of the gateway. For example, if both 03
and 04 have been registered as gateway number while 0312345678 is also specified,
documents can be transmitted via a VoIP gateway for which 03 is used as a prefix.
When you wish to use the gateways regardless of the IP-Fax destination numbers,
register only the gateway addresses without registering the prefix.
8. Select a protocol.
9. Press [Change] for “Gateway Address”.
10. Enter the gateway address, and then press [OK].
11. Press [OK].
12. Press [Exit].
13. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
• Delete
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [Initial Settings].
3. Press [Program / Change / Delete Gateway].
4. Press [Delete], and then select a VoIP gateway to delete.
5. Press [Delete] on the confirmation message.
If you do not want to delete the gateway you have selected, press [Do not Delete].
6. Press [Exit].
7. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
Menu Protect
You can prevent unauthenticated users from changing the user tools settings.
351
7. Facsimile Features
For details, consult your administrator.
E-mail Setting
Set whether or not to use “E-mail” in the fax functions.
Default: [Off]
Folder Setting
Set whether or not to use “folder” in the fax functions.
Default: [Off]
Country Code (For Function Settings)
Selects the country in which the machine is used. The country code you specify determines the time
and date display format and the default values of the fax transmission-related settings.
Make sure to select the country code correctly. Selecting a wrong country code may cause failures
in fax transmissions.
• page 267 "Printing a File Received with Memory Lock"
• page 371 "Registering Fax Information"
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
352
Memory File Transfer
Memory File Transfer
If the printer has stopped functioning or run out of toner or paper, you can transfer the files in facsimile
memory to another machine for printing. Note that this function forwards all documents that are stored in
memory, including files that were received with Memory Lock. Use this function only in emergencies.
• A fax or IP-Fax destination can be specified as a forwarding destination. An Internet Fax, e-mail, or
folder destination cannot be specified as a forwarding destination.
• To display “SIP” and “H.323” on the screen, make the settings in “Initial Settings” in the Facsimile
Features menu. If you are using SIP, specify “Enable SIP” and “SIP Settings”. If you are using H.
323, specify “Enable H.323” and “H.323 Settings”. For details about these settings, see “Initial
Settings”.
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [Send Settings].
3. Press [Memory File Transfer].
4. Select the line of the forwarding destination.
5. Enter the forwarding destination.
If you make a mistake, press [Clear], and then enter the destination again.
To cancel forwarding, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of step 3.
6. Press the [Start] key.
After transmission, the display returns to that of step 3.
7. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
• The document is not deleted after you forward it. It is stored in the machine.
• All documents stored in facsimile memory are forwarded, including files received with Memory
Lock or as confidential documents. Note that this function also forwards received documents stored
on the hard disk.
353
7. Facsimile Features
• You can use SUB Codes and a password to specify a forwarding destination. Take care to change
only those settings that are required.
• page 347 "Initial Settings"
Selecting a Line Port or Protocol
This procedure explains how to select a line port or protocol under [Memory File Transfer]. To specify an
IP-Fax address as a forwarding destination, you must first select a protocol.
1. From “Select Line”, select the line port or protocol you require.
You must select either [H.323] or [SIP] if you are specifying an IP-Fax address as a forwarding
destination.
Setting a SUB Code
This procedure explains how to set a SUB Code under [Memory File Transfer].
1. Press [Transmission SUB Code].
2. Enter a SUB Code using the number keys, and then press [OK].
Setting a Password
This procedure explains how to set a password under [Memory File Transfer].
1. Press [Password (SID)].
2. Enter a password using the number keys, and then press [OK].
354
Forwarding
Forwarding
Print documents received and forward to a specified End Receiver. This is useful if, for example, you are
visiting another office and would like a copy of your documents to be sent to that office. You can also
specify a “e-mail” and “folder” as the forwarding destination.
• You can select end receivers only from among destinations programmed in the Address Book.
A fax number, IP-Fax destination, Internet Fax destination, e-mail address, and folder destination can be
set as the forwarding destination.
When you wish to change the end receivers depending on the senders, specify the end receivers by the
senders, at “Program Special Sender”. Documents not received from specified senders are sent to the
destination specified in this function. For details about how to program Special Sender, see “Special
Senders to Treat Differently”.
According to the “Reception File Setting” setting in the “Facsimile Features”, you can specify whether or
not to print or store forwarded documents. See “Parameter Settings” (switch 11, bit 6).
Deleting a destination specified as a forward destination from the destination list causes the settings of
the forward destination to be deleted, so they must be registered again. When a destination is changed,
a document is transmitted to the new destination. If there is no destination of the specified type, you can
set which destination to be used as an alternative destination. See “Parameter Settings” (switch 32, bit
0).
You can program one of the Quick Operation keys with operations for this function. See “General
Settings”.
If you have specified e-mail destination or folder destination for forwarding, you can specify the file
format used for forwarding. See “Parameter Settings” (switch 21, bit 3).
User Parameters (switch 37, bit 4) on the Facsimile Features menu allows you to include the sender's
name in the names of files sent to folders. However, garbling of the file name and data loss can result if
the receiver's operating system cannot accept certain characters in file names. To prevent this, use User
Parameters (switch 37, bit 5) to limit the file names to plain characters only. If you limit file names to
plain characters only but errors still occur, disable display of the sender's name in the file name of
documents forwarded to folders. For details, see “Parameter Settings”.
• page 335 "General Settings"
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
• page 385 "Special Senders to Treat Differently"
355
7. Facsimile Features
Programming an End Receiver
• One end receiver can be registered for each special sender. To register two or more end receivers,
use group destination. However, a maximum of 498 destinations can be specified in a group.
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [Reception Settings].
3. Press [Forwarding].
4. Press [On].
If there is an End Receiver already programmed, a receiver name is shown. If you want to change
the receiver, press [Receiver] and proceed to step 5.
To cancel Forwarding, press [Off] and proceed to step 9.
5. Specify an End Receiver using the destination list, and then press [OK].
Press the transmission type tab to switch the destination between fax number, Internet Fax
destination, e-mail address, and folder destination.
IP-Fax destination appears in the fax destination list.
Set an e-mail destination in Address Book Management under Administrator Tools in the System
Settings menu. See “E-mail Destination”, Network and System Settings Reference.
356
Forwarding
Set a folder destination in Address Book Management under Administrator Tools in the System
Settings menu. See “Registering Folders”, Network and System Settings Reference.
If you have specified e-mail destination or folder destination for forwarding, you can specify the file
format used for forwarding. See “Parameter Settings” (switch 21, bit 3).
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] before pressing [OK], and then try again.
6. Press [Security].
If not specifying the security function, proceed to step 9.
Security is set to use S/MIME authentication. For details about the security settings, consult your
administrator.
7. Select the security functions.
To specify encryption for documents for Forwarding, press [Encryption]. To use the encryption
function, the address must be stored in the Address Book and have the encryption option enabled.
For details about Encryption, consult your administrator.
To attach a signature to documents for Forwarding, press [Signature]. For details about Signature,
consult your administrator.
8. Press [OK].
9. Press [OK].
10. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
357
7. Facsimile Features
• Select [Encrypt All] in the encryption settings and encrypted e-mail is sent regardless of the
encryption settings in [Security]. For details about encryption, consult your administrator.
• The electronic signature is limited in the following ways, depending on the S/MIME settings on
Web Image Monitor. For details about the electronic signature, consult your administrator.
• If [Set Individually] is set:
You can set [Signature] in [Security] and attach an electronic signature to e-mail for every
transmission.
• If [Do not Use Signatures] is set:
Even if you press [Security], [Signature] does not appear.
• If [Use Signatures] is set:
An electronic signature is attached when you send e-mail. The [Signature] setting in [Security]
cannot be cancelled.
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
Quitting the Forwarding Function
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [Reception Settings].
3. Press [Forwarding].
4. Press [Off], and then press [OK].
5. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
Forwarding Mark
This section describes Forwarding Mark.
358
Forwarding
You can print a Forwarding Mark on receiver's documents that have been forwarded.
The receiver can distinguish between forwarded and normally received documents.
BZR036
This function is not available when memory forwarding is performed to an e-mail destination or folder
destination.
You can specify whether or not to print a Forwarding Mark in the User Parameters (switch 02, bit 0).
See “Parameter Settings”.
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
359
7. Facsimile Features
Reception File Setting
Specify whether received documents are to be saved on the hard disk or printed immediately without
being saved. You can print stored documents repeatedly and download them as images to a computer
using Web Image Monitor. If you select printing without saving, documents are printed each time they
are received.
If you have used System Settings to specify to have received faxes distributed to the delivery server, the
documents cannot be saved on the hard disk.
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [Reception Settings].
3. Press [Reception File Setting].
4. Press [Print] or [Store], and then press [OK].
To cancel your selection, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of step 3.
When [Store] is selected, you can select whether or not to send notice of reception to a specific email address. To notify of reception, press [Notify Destination] and select an e-mail address from
the Internet Fax and e-mail destinations programmed in the address book. Further, you can register
a group destination. In such a case, a maximum of 500 destinations can be specified in a group.
5. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
• You can use “Parameter Settings” (switch 10, bit 5) to select whether or not to print stored received
documents. See “Parameter Settings”.
• If [Store] is selected and a destination for notification is specified, notification of document
reception can be sent to the specified e-mail address.
• Documents saved on the hard disk are categorized as received and stored documents.
• You cannot change to a different setting if received documents have been stored on the hard disk.
To change to different setting, print documents stored on the hard disk if necessary, and then delete
them.
360
Reception File Setting
• Received confidential documents are stored in memory. Use the Print Personal Box File function to
print them.
• With [Store] selected, more memory space is used as the number of saved documents increases.
After memory space becomes insufficient, no more documents are saved on the hard disk. When
this happens, the machine starts printing and then overwriting old documents, or it deletes the
received document data without printing it and then prints the Reception File Erased Report.
• When [Store] is selected, you can apply a User Parameter (switch 40, bit 0) to stop the machine
automatically receiving new faxes when available memory space runs too low. See “Parameter
Settings”.
• You can store received documents up to a total of approximately 320 pages or 2,240 pages of
A4 size Standard <ITU-T 1Chart>.
• You cannot send received documents.
• You cannot manage stored documents from the Document Server display.
• It is recommended that you use Web Image Monitor running under the same network environment
as this machine. Otherwise, the Web browser may not open and an error may occur.
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
Specifying Fax Auto Deletion or Reception Stop in the Event of Storage Failure
Even if the machine is set to store documents on its hard disk when it cannot print them if they cannot be
stored normally because of the following conditions, the machine usually prints them.
• Error occurs on the hard disk of the machine
• The memory is full
• The number of received documents exceeds the number of received documents you can store on
the machine's hard disk or facsimile memory
In this case, you can have machine delete the document data without printing it. The machine prints the
Reception File Erased Report to confirm information in the received document instead.
Using the User Parameters (switch 10, bit 7) on the Facsimile Features menu, you can select whether or
not to turn on this function. See “Parameter Settings”.
You can also apply a User Parameter (switch 40, bit 0) to suspend fax reception in the event of fax
storage failure. When this parameter is applied, the machine will stop receiving faxes if a storage error
occurs and resume receiving when the error is resolved.
• For details about storing documents on the machine's hard disk, see “Reception File Setting”.
361
7. Facsimile Features
• You cannot change to a different setting if received documents have been stored on the hard disk.
To change to different setting, print documents stored on the hard disk if necessary, and then delete
them.
• page 360 "Reception File Setting"
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
Reception Report e-mail
When a received document is stored, this report is sent to the e-mail address set as the destination for
notification.
• Depending on your e-mail application, a phishing warning might appear after you receive a
“Reception Report e-mail”. To prevent phishing warnings appearing after you receive a “Reception
Report e-mail”, you must add the sender to your e-mail application's exclusion list. For details
about how to do this, see your e-mail application's Help.
362
Stored Reception File User Setting
Stored Reception File User Setting
The administrator can be specified for managing documents stored on the machine after fax documents
are received. To specify the administrator, enter the administrator user code for managing documents
using Web Image Monitor. You can also restrict control panel operations such as printing or deleting
received documents.
• You must register the administrator's User Code to the destination list in advance.
• It is recommended that you use Web Image Monitor operating under the same network
environment as this machine. Otherwise, the Web browser may not open and an error may occur.
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [Reception Settings].
3. Press [Stored Reception File User Setting].
4. If you want to use a user code, press [On].
If you do not use a user code, press [Off] and proceed to step 6.
To cancel your selection, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of step 3.
5. Press the Destination key of the user you wish to specify, and then press [OK].
363
7. Facsimile Features
6. Check the selected user, and then press [OK].
When a programmed user is deleted from the destination list, message "Destinations are invalid." is
displayed. Enter the user again.
7. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
• This function is only available when [Store] is selected in “Reception File Setting”.
• If the programmed user code was deleted using the Address Book Management function under
System Settings, you cannot view received and saved documents using Web Image Monitor or the
machine's control panel. Select [Off] in step 4 or reprogram the user code. See “Administrator
Tools”, Network and System Settings Reference.
• To restrict control panel operations such as printing or deleting received documents, select “On”
for the User Parameters (switch 10, bit 0). See “Parameter Settings”.
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
364
SMTP Reception File Delivery Settings
SMTP Reception File Delivery Settings
This section describes the SMTP Reception File Delivery Settings menu under Facsimile Features.
When an authorized e-mail address is set, e-mail received from addresses that do not match the
authorized address is discarded, and an error message is returned to the SMTP server.
The authorized e-mail address is compared with the addresses of e-mail originators, as described by the
following examples.
• When the authorized e-mail address is set to “@aaa.abcd.com”:
abc@aaa.abcd.com - accepted
def@aaa.xyz.com - not accepted
abc@abcd.com - not accepted
No Error Report is output even when e-mail is discarded.
This function is available on systems that allow routing of e-mail received via SMTP.
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [Reception Settings].
3. Press [SMTP RX File Delivery Settings].
4. Press [On].
5. Press [Change].
365
7. Facsimile Features
6. Enter the sending e-mail address to be authorized.
If you make a mistake, press [ ], [ ], [Backspace], or [Delete All], and then enter again.
7. Press [OK].
8. Press [Security].
If not specifying the security function, proceed to step 11.
Security is set to use S/MIME authentication. For details about the security settings, consult your
administrator.
9. Select the security functions.
To specify encryption for documents for delivery, press [Encryption]. To use the encryption function,
the address must be stored in the Address Book and have the encryption option enabled. For
details about Encryption, consult your administrator.
To attach a signature to documents for delivery, press [Signature]. For details about Signature,
consult your administrator.
10. Press [OK].
11. Press [OK].
12. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
• Select [Encrypt All] in the encryption settings and encrypted e-mail is sent regardless of the
encryption settings in [Security]. For details about encryption, consult your administrator.
366
SMTP Reception File Delivery Settings
• The electronic signature is limited in the following ways, depending on the S/MIME settings on
Web Image Monitor. For details about the electronic signature, consult your administrator.
• If [Set Individually] is set:
You can set [Signature] in [Security] and attach an electronic signature to e-mail for every
transmission.
• If [Do not Use Signatures] is set:
Even if you press [Security], [Signature] does not appear.
• If [Use Signatures] is set:
An electronic signature is attached when you send e-mail. The [Signature] setting in [Security]
cannot be cancelled.
367
7. Facsimile Features
Program / Change / Delete Scan Size
This section describes how to program, change, and delete a Scan Size.
• When programming or changing a scan size, it is recommended that you make a record of the
new size.
When you select a scan size to scan a custom size original, two custom sizes are available (Program
Size 1 and Program Size 2). Use these functions to program a custom size in advance. The procedure is
the same for programming and changing.
You can program up to two sizes.
Specify a horizontal length from 140 to 1,200 mm, or from 5.5 to 47.0 inches.
Programming/Changing a Scan Size
This section describes how to program a Scan Size.
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [Scan Settings].
3. Press [Program / Change / Delete Scan Size].
4. Make sure that [Program / Change] is selected.
5. Select [Program Size 1] or [Program Size 2].
368
Program / Change / Delete Scan Size
6. Enter a horizontal size using the number keys.
Each time you press [mm] or [inch], the units switch between “mm” and “inch”.
If you enter a length and press [mm] or [inch], the length is converted automatically according to
the unit (fractions are rounded off). For example, when you enter [2], [2], and [0] in millimeters
and change to “inch”, the length 8.7 “inch” is shown on the display. If you press [mm] again, “221
mm” is displayed.
If you make a mistake, press [Clear], and then try again.
To cancel a scan size, press [Cancel].
7. Select a vertical size, and then press [OK].
The displayed vertical size differs depending on the selected unit. When [mm] is selected, [210 mm
(A4)] and [216 mm (8 1/2)] are shown. When [inch] is selected, [8.3 inch (A4)] and [8.5 inch]
are shown.
To cancel a scan size, press [Cancel].
8. Press [Exit].
9. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
• You can use documents longer than 356 mm (14 inches) with the User Parameter (switch 14, bit 1)
in the Parameter Settings. For details about Parameter Setting, see “Parameter Settings”.
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
Deleting a Scan Size
This section describes how to delete the programmed Scan Size.
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [Scan Settings].
3. Press [Program / Change / Delete Scan Size].
369
7. Facsimile Features
4. Press [Delete], and then select [Program Size 1] or [Program Size 2].
5. Press [Delete].
To cancel deleting, press [Do not Delete]. The display returns to that of step 4.
6. Press [Exit].
7. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
370
Registering Fax Information
Registering Fax Information
This section describes Fax Information.
You can send information to the other party when transmitting or receiving a fax document. This
information is shown on the display of the other machine and printed as a report. The following
information can be sent.
• You can confirm programmed settings from the User Parameter List. It is recommended that you
print and keep the User Parameter List when you program or change settings. See “Initial Settings”.
Fax Header
The Fax Header is printed as the header of every fax you send. You should include your name in
the Fax Header.
You can program First Name or Second Name. When you send originals using the destination list,
you can select which Fax Header is printed on the document received by the other party.
You can register “Fax Header” using up to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols.
You can use characters, symbols, numbers, and spaces.
You can set whether or not to print a Fax Header using [Fax Header Print] under “Option Setting”.
See “Fax Header Print”.
Own Name
The Own Name is sent to the other party when you send or receive a fax. This name should include
your name. The Own Name is shown on the display of the other machine and printed in a report.
Own Name can be used only if the other machine is of the same manufacturer and has the Own
Name function.
You can register “Own Name” using up to 20 alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Own Fax Number
The sender's Own Fax Number is sent to the other party when sending a fax.
The received facsimile number is shown on the display of the other machine and printed in a report.
This function is available regardless of the manufacturer of the other party's machine.
You can register “Own Fax Number” using up to 20 numbers, space, and “+”symbol.
• For details about how to print Fax Header, see “Fax Header Print”.
•
•
(mainly Europe and Asia)
page 186 "Fax Header Print
(mainly Europe and Asia)"
(mainly North America)
371
7. Facsimile Features
page 187 "Fax Header Print
(mainly North America)"
• page 347 "Initial Settings"
Registering Fax Information
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [Initial Settings].
3. Press [Program Fax Information].
4. Select the Fax Information you want to register.
5. Register the name and facsimile number.
6. Press [Exit].
7. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
Registering a Fax Header
1. Check that [Fax Header] is selected.
2. Press [First Name] or [Second Name].
3. Enter a fax header including your Own Name and Fax Number, and then press [OK].
372
Registering Fax Information
Registering an Own Name
1. Press [Own Name].
2. Press [Own Name].
3. Enter your own name, and then press [OK].
Registering an Own Fax Number
1. Press [Own Fax Number].
2. Select line type to program.
3. Enter your own facsimile's number using the number keys, and then press [OK].
To enter a + sign or a space, press [+] or [Space].
Changing Fax Information
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [Initial Settings].
3. Press [Program Fax Information].
373
7. Facsimile Features
4. Select the Fax Information you want to change.
To change a Fax Header, see “Registering a Fax Header”.
To change Own Name, see “Registering an Own Name”.
To change Own Fax Number, “Registering an Own Fax Number”.
5. Press [Exit].
6. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
• page 372 "Registering a Fax Header"
• page 373 "Registering an Own Name"
• page 373 "Registering an Own Fax Number"
Deleting Fax Information
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [Initial Settings].
3. Press [Program Fax Information].
4. Press [Fax Header], [Own Name], or [Own Fax Number] to delete.
5. Press the item you want to delete.
6. Press [Backspace] or [Delete All], and then press [OK].
When deleting your own facsimile's number, press [Clear], and then press [OK].
7. Press [Exit].
8. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
374
Parameter Settings
Parameter Settings
User Parameters allow you to customize various settings to suit your needs. To change function settings,
set the User Parameter Switches.
Switches and Bits
Each User Parameter has a set of switches, and each of the switches consist of eight bits, whose
values are “0” or “1”. The right most bit is bit 0 and the left most is bit 7. You can adjust the settings
to match your needs by switching the value of bits between “0” and “1”.
• Switch 02
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
User Parameter List
User Parameter Switches are outlined in the following table.
Switch: 02, Bit: 0
Forwarding Mark
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Switch: 02, Bit: 3
TSI Print
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Switch: 03, Bit: 0
Automatic printing of the Communication Result Report
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Switch: 03, Bit: 2
Automatic printing of the Memory Storage Report
• 0: Off
• 1: On
375
7. Facsimile Features
Switch: 03, Bit: 3
Whether or not to print the SEP Code RX Reserve Report automatically
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Switch: 03, Bit: 4
Whether or not to print the SEP Code RX Result Report automatically
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Switch: 03, Bit: 5
Automatic printing of the Immediate TX Result Report
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Switch: 03, Bit: 7
Automatic printing of the journal
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Switch: 04, Bit: 0
Automatic printing of the Confidential File Report
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Switch: 04, Bit: 1
Automatic printing of Communication Failure Report and Transfer Result Report
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Switch: 04, Bit: 4
Indicates the parties
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Switch: 04, Bit: 5
Include sender's name on reports
• 0: Off
• 1: On
376
Parameter Settings
Switch: 04, Bit: 7
Include a portion of the image on reports
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Switch: 05, Bit: 0
Receive Service Call (SC) Condition (Substitute Reception during service call)
• 0: Possible (Substitute RX)
• 1: Not possible (Reception off)
Switch: 05, Bit: 2, 1
Substitute the reception when the machine cannot print (because paper is jammed, all paper trays
have run out of paper, toner is empty, or all paper trays are out of order)
• 00: Enabled Unconditionally (Free)
• 01: Enabled when Own Name/Own Fax Number is received
• 10: Enabled for Closed Network Code match
• 11: Disabled (Reception off)
Switch: 05, Bit: 5
Print sheet is limited to that which has highest priority (Just size printing)
• 0 : Off
• 1 : On
Switch : 05, Bit: 7
Empty tray alert (Paper Empty Warning) even when one paper tray is empty
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Switch: 07, Bit: 2
Parallel Memory Transmission
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Switch: 08, Bit: 2
Authorized Reception Type
• 0: Receive from specified senders only
• 1: Receive all documents except from specified senders
Switch: 10, Bit 0
Restrict control panel operations such as printing or deleting received documents
377
7. Facsimile Features
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Switch: 10, Bit: 1
Combine Two Originals
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Switch: 10, Bit: 5
Whether or not to print stored received documents
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Switch: 10, Bit: 6
Use both e-mail notification and printed reports to confirm the transmission result
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Switch: 10, Bit: 7
Have the machine delete the document data without printing it when an error occurs
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Switch: 11, Bit: 2
Detect and report nearly blank documents when scanning.
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Switch: 11, Bit: 6
Whether or not to print or store when forwarding according to “Reception File Setting” in
“Facsimile Features”
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Switch: 14, Bit: 0
Print documents received with Auto Power-On Reception (Night Printing mode)
• 0: Immediate Printing (On)
• 1: When turning on the operation switch (Off)
Switch: 14, Bit: 1
Whether or not to use paper longer than 356 mm (14 inches)
378
Parameter Settings
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Switch: 14, Bit: 3
Reset when function changed
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Switch: 15, Bit: 2, 1, 0
Selecting the available paper feed tray
(Only the numbers listed below can be entered)
• 001: Tray 1
• 010: Tray 2
• 011: Tray 3
• 100: Tray 4
Switch: 15, Bit: 5
Whether or not to select the available paper feed tray
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Switch: 17, Bit: 2
Whether you need to press [Add Destination] after specifying a destination with the Destination key
when broadcasting
• 0: Not necessary
• 1: Necessary
Switch : 17, Bit 3
Whether or not to reset the settings when original is scanned
• 0: On
• 1: Off
Switch: 18, Bit: 0
Print date with Fax Header
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Switch: 18, Bit: 1
Print transmitter origin with Fax Header
• 0: Off
379
7. Facsimile Features
• 1: On
Switch: 18, Bit: 2
Print file number with Fax Header
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Switch: 18, Bit: 3
Print page number with Fax Header
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Switch: 19, Bit: 0
Use paper delivery shift function (Offset Print)
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Switch: 19, Bit: 1
Sort Journal by transmission type
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Switch: 20, Bit: 0
Automatic printing of the LAN-Fax Result Report
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Switch: 20, Bit: 5, 4, 3, 2
Reprinting time of stored documents in memory that could not be printed using LAN-Fax Driver
• 0000: 0 minutes
• 0001: 1 minute
• 0010: 2 minutes
• 0011: 3 minutes
• 0100: 4 minutes
• 0101: 5 minutes
• 0110: 6 minutes
• 0111: 7 minutes
• 1000: 8 minutes
• 1001: 9 minutes
380
Parameter Settings
• 1010: 10 minutes
• 1011: 11 minutes
• 1100: 12 minutes
• 1101: 13 minutes
• 1110: 14 minutes
• 1111: 15 minutes
Switch: 21, Bit: 0
Print results of sending Reception Notice Request message
• 0: Off (print only when an error occurs)
• 1: On
Switch: 21, Bit: 1
Respond to e-mail reception acknowledgment request
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Switch: 21, Bit: 2
Choose whether to print JPEG or PDF files attached to incoming e-mail
• 0: Do not print
• 1: Print
Switch: 21, Bit: 3
File format for files forwarded to e-mail destinations or folder destinations
• 0: TIFF
• 1: PDF
Switch: 21, Bit: 4
Transmit Journal by e-mail
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Switch: 21, Bit: 5
Limit printing of specified data in normal e-mail (attached TIFF files).
• 0: No
• 1: Yes
Switch: 21, Bit: 6
Display network error
• 0: Display (On)
381
7. Facsimile Features
• 1: Not display (Off)
Switch: 21, Bit: 7
Transmit Error Mail Notification
• 0: On
• 1: Off
Switch: 22, Bit: 0
Detect a dial tone before sending faxes when using the telephone line (LINE)
• 0: Not detect (Off)
• 1: Detect (On)
Switch: 24, Bit: 0
Store documents that could not be transmitted in memory
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Switch: 24, Bit: 1
Length of time documents that could not be transmitted are stored in memory
• 0: 24 hours
• 1: 72 hours
Switch: 24, Bit: 2
Whether to retain the stored file permanently
• 0: No
• 1: Yes
Switch: 32, Bit: 0
Select which order of priority to be used to select an alternative
• 0: Paper Output Priority
<Priority Order>
1. IP-Fax destination
2. Fax number
3. Internet Fax
4. E-mail address
5. Folder
• 1: Electronic Output Priority
<Priority Order>
1. Internet Fax
382
Parameter Settings
2. E-mail address
3. Folder
4. IP-Fax destination
5. Fax number
Switch: 34, Bit: 0
Use gatekeeper with IP-Fax
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Switch: 34, Bit: 1
Use SIP server with IP-Fax
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Switch: 35, Bit: 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0
Redial interval when sending a backup file
• 00000000: 0 minute(s) 11111111: 255 minute(s)
Switch: 36, Bit: 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0
Maximum number of redials when sending a backup file
• 00000000/00000001: 1 time(s) 11111110/11111111: 254 time(s)
Switch: 37, Bit: 0
Whether to stop sending a backup file if the destination folder becomes full while the machine is
sending or waiting to send a fax or the backup file
• 0: No
• 1: Yes
Switch: 37, Bit: 3, 2
Specify whether or not the backup file is printed along with the TX communication failure report
when a backup file transmission failure occurs
• 00: Do not print
• 01: Print first page only
• 10: Print whole file
Switch: 37, Bit: 4
Display the sender's information in the file name of documents that are forwarded to folder
destinations
• 0: Off
• 1: On
383
7. Facsimile Features
Switch: 37, Bit: 5
Specify whether or not to limit the file names of documents that are forwarded to folder destinations
to plain characters only
• 0: Off
• 1: On
Switch: 40, Bit: 0
When memory space is insufficient, the machine prints and then deletes the oldest faxes, creating
memory space for storage of new faxes
• 0: On
• 1: Off
Changing the User Parameters
This section describes how to set parameters.
• Access to some User Parameter Settings may require options, or other settings may need to be
made beforehand.
• It is recommended that you print and keep a User Parameter list when you program or change a
User Parameter.
• Do not change any bit switches other than those shown on the previous pages.
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [Initial Settings].
3. Press [Parameter Setting].
4. Select the switch number you want to change.
5. Select the bit number you want to change.
When the bit number is pressed, the current value switches between 1 and 0.
Repeat from step 5 to change another bit number for the same switch.
6. Press [OK].
To cancel these settings, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of step 4.
7. Repeat step 4 through step 6 to change the switch settings.
8. After all the settings are finished, press [Exit].
9. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
384
Special Senders to Treat Differently
Special Senders to Treat Differently
This section describes Special Senders settings.
By programming particular senders in advance, you can set the following function for each sender:
• Authorized Reception
• Reception File Print Qty
• Forwarding
• Print 2 Sided
• Memory Lock
• Paper Tray
Use Own Name or Own Fax Number to program your senders. If the sender has a machine of the same
manufacturer, program an Own Name that has already been programmed as a sender. If the machine
is not from the same manufacturer, Own Fax Number is used.
You can apply the same settings to all programmed numbers. You can then customize the settings for
individual numbers as necessary using the Special Sender Registration function.
The following items can be programmed:
• Special Senders
Up to 250 Special Senders can be registered. A maximum of 24 characters can be used for each
name when using G3.
• Full/Partial agreement
When you program own names and facsimile names for multiple destinations, you can program a
common sequence of characters to identify destinations.
Destination to be programmed (Own Name)
Number of programmed identifications
NEW YORK BRANCH
HONG KONG BRANCH
3
SYDNEY BRANCH
Using Partial matching
Destination to be programmed (Own Name)
BRANCH
Number of programmed identifications
1
You can program up to 250 wild cards.
Spaces are ignored when identifications are compared.
385
7. Facsimile Features
You can use wild cards for the following functions:
• Forwarding
• Special Reception Function
• Authorized Reception
When using Partial agreement, you can enter up to the first 24 characters of an e-mail address to
use it as an own name or facsimile name.
• You cannot program senders as Special Senders if they do not have Own Name or Own Fax
Number programmed.
• The machine cannot differentiate between SEP Code RX documents from Special Senders.
• You cannot use the following functions with Internet Fax receptions:
• Authorized Reception per Sender
• Reception File Print Qty per Sender
• Memory Lock per Sender
• You can program up to 24 characters for the sender.
• To use Forwarding, Print 2 Sided, or Paper Tray with Internet Fax reception, program the sender's
e-mail address.
• You can check Own Name and Own Fax Number using the Journal. You can check programmed
Special Senders using the specified sender list.
Authorized Reception
Use this function to limit incoming senders.
The machine only receives faxes from programmed Special Senders, and therefore, it helps you screen
out unwanted documents, such as junk mail, and prevents wasting fax paper.
• Without programming Special Senders, the Authorized Reception function will not work, even if
you select “On”.
• You can change Special Senders in the same way as you program them.
Reception File Print Quantity
Print the specified number of copies of documents received from programmed senders (Special
Senders).
386
Special Senders to Treat Differently
If you do not program any Special Senders, the machine prints the specified number of copies for all
received documents.
• You cannot use multi-copy printing with Memory Lock.
• You can specify up to 10 copies.
Forwarding
Print received documents, and then transfer them to those receivers programmed beforehand.
It is also possible to forward faxes sent only by senders programmed as Special Senders.
• If you select [Same as Basic Settings], the fax document is forwarded to the receivers programmed
in “Forwarding” under Facsimile Features.
• If you do not program any Special Senders, the machine transfers all incoming documents to the
other end receivers specified in “Forwarding” under Facsimile Features.
• You can set the fax destination, Internet Fax destination, IP-Fax destination, e-mail destination, or
folder destination, as a forward destination.
• If you have specified e-mail destination or folder destination for forwarding, you can specify the file
format used for forwarding. See “Parameter Settings” (switch 21, bit 3).
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
Print 2 Sided
Print on both sides of the paper.
• If you select “Custom Size” for the “Bypass Tray Paper Size” setting in “Initial Set Up”, duplex
printing will be disabled.
Memory Lock
Store incoming documents from programmed senders (Special Senders) in memory without printing
them. People without the Memory Lock ID cannot print the documents, and therefore this function is
useful for receiving confidential documents. If you do not program any senders, the machine receives
fax document from all senders using Memory Lock reception.
387
7. Facsimile Features
• You must register Memory Lock ID in advance. For details about how to register Memory Lock ID,
see “Initial Settings”.
• If you program the same sender in Memory Lock and Forwarding, Forwarding is disabled.
• page 347 "Initial Settings"
Paper Tray
Print documents received from programmed senders (Special Senders) and the documents from other
senders on different types of paper.
For example, if blue paper is in Tray 1 and white paper is in Tray 2, the machine prints the documents
from Special Senders on the blue paper and prints the documents from other senders on the white
paper, making it easy for you to separate the two.
If you do not program any Special Senders, the machine outputs documents received from all senders
using the default paper tray.
• Selection of the bypass tray enables you to specify the paper size in “Bypass Tray Paper Size”.
Programming/Changing Special Senders
This section describes how to program and change Special Senders.
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [Reception Settings].
3. Press [Program Special Sender].
4. Check that [Program / Change] is selected.
5. Select the sender to program or change.
To program new sender, press [Not Programmed].
388
Special Senders to Treat Differently
6. Enter a sender name, and then press [OK].
Enter a destination name using Own Name or Own Fax Number.
7. Press [Full Agreement] or [Partial Agreement].
8. Select the item you want to program.
You must select only the item you want to program.
To cancel these settings, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of step 5.
9. Press [OK].
A Special Sender is programmed.
To program another sender, repeat the procedure from step 5.
10. Press [Exit].
11. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
389
7. Facsimile Features
• To specify Authorized Reception, see “Authorized Reception per Sender”.
• To specify Reception File Print Qty, see “Reception File Print Qty per Sender”.
• To specify Forwarding, see “Forwarding per Sender”.
• To specify print 2 sided, see “Print 2 Sided per Sender”.
• To specify Memory Lock, see “Memory Lock per Sender”.
• To specify paper tray, see “Paper Tray per Sender”.
• page 390 "Authorized Reception per Sender"
• page 390 "Reception File Print Qty per Sender"
• page 391 "Forwarding per Sender"
• page 393 "Print 2 Sided per Sender"
• page 394 "Memory Lock per Sender"
• page 394 "Paper Tray per Sender"
Authorized Reception per Sender
This section describes how to specify Authorized Reception.
Specify when programming a Special Sender.
1. Press [Authorized Reception per Sender].
2. Press [On] or [Off], and then press [OK].
Reception File Print Qty per Sender
This section describes how to specify Reception File Print Qty.
Specify when programming a Special Sender.
390
Special Senders to Treat Differently
1. Press [RX File Print Qty per Sender].
2. Press [Number of Sets].
3. Enter the print quantity using the number keys, and then press [OK].
• Selecting [Same as Basic Settings] will result in the same setting made for “Reception File Print
Quantity” of “Reception Settings”.
• If you make a mistake, press [Clear] before pressing [OK], and then try again.
Forwarding per Sender
This section describes how to specify Forwarding.
Specify when programming a Special Sender.
• One forward destination can be registered for each Special Sender. To register two or more
forward destinations, use group destinations. However a maximum of 498 destinations can be
specified in a group.
1. Press [Forwarding per Sender].
2. Select [On] or [Off].
If you select [Off], proceed to step 7.
391
7. Facsimile Features
3. Specify an End Receiver using the destination list, and then press [OK].
Press the transmission type tab to switch the destination between fax number, Internet Fax
destination, e-mail address, and folder destination.
IP-Fax destination appears in the fax destination list.
4. Press [Security].
If not specifying the security function, proceed to step 7.
Security is set to use S/MIME authentication. For details about the security settings, consult your
administrator.
5. Select the security functions.
392
Special Senders to Treat Differently
To specify encryption for documents for Forwarding, press [Encryption]. To use the encryption
function, the address must be stored in the Address Book and have the encryption option enabled.
For details about Encryption, consult your administrator.
To attach a signature to documents for Forwarding, press [Signature]. For details about Signature,
consult your administrator.
6. Press [OK].
7. Press [OK].
• Selecting [Same as Basic Settings] will result in the same setting made for “Forwarding” under
“Reception Settings”.
• If you have specified e-mail destination or folder destination for forwarding, you can specify the file
format used for forwarding. See “Parameter Settings” (switch 21, bit 3).
• Deleting a destination specified as a forward destination from the destination list causes the settings
of the forward destination to be deleted, so they must be registered again. When a destination is
changed, a document is transmitted to the new destination. If there is no destination of the specified
type, you can set which destination to be used as an alternative destination. See “Parameter
Settings” (switch 32, bit 0).
• Select [Encrypt All] in the encryption settings and encrypted e-mail is sent regardless of the
encryption settings in [Security]. For details about encryption, consult your administrator.
• The electronic signature is limited in the following ways, depending on the S/MIME settings on
Web Image Monitor. For details about the electronic signature, consult your administrator.
• If [Set Individually] is set:
You can set [Signature] in [Security] and attach an electronic signature to e-mail for every
transmission.
• If [Do not Use Signatures] is set:
Even if you press [Security], [Signature] does not appear.
• If [Use Signatures] is set:
An electronic signature is attached when you send e-mail. The [Signature] setting in [Security]
cannot be cancelled.
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
Print 2 Sided per Sender
This section describes how to specify Print 2 Sided.
Specify when programming a Special Sender.
393
7. Facsimile Features
1. Press [Print 2 Sided per Sender].
2. Press [On] or [Off], and then press [OK].
• Selecting [Same as Basic Settings] will result in the same setting made for “2 Sided Print” of
“Reception Settings”.
Memory Lock per Sender
This section describes how to specify Memory Lock.
Specify when programming a Special Sender.
1. Press [Memory Lock RX per Sender].
2. Press [On] or [Off], and then press [OK].
• Selecting [Same as Basic Settings] will result in the same setting made for “Memory Lock
Reception” under “Reception Settings”.
Paper Tray per Sender
This section describes how to specify Paper Tray.
Specify when programming a Special Sender.
1. Press [Paper Tray per Sender].
2. Select the tray you want to use, and then press [OK].
• Selecting [Same as Basic Settings] will result in the same setting made for “Paper Tray” of
“Reception Settings”.
Programming Initial Set Up of a Special Sender
This section describes how to program Initial Set Up of a Special Sender.
Program the “Initial Set Up” of a Special Sender. You can also specify the Bypass Tray Paper Size.
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [Reception Settings].
3. Press [Program Special Sender].
394
Special Senders to Treat Differently
4. Press [Initial Set Up].
5. Select the function you want to program.
6. To program Authorized Reception and Special Reception Function, press [Authorized
Reception] or [Special Reception Function].
7. Press [On] or [Off], and then press [OK].
The illustration shows the “Authorized Reception” display as an example.
8. To program Bypass Tray Paper Size, press [Bypass Tray Paper Size].
9. Select the size you want to program.
You can select a size from [Regular Size], or [Custom Size].
If you select [Regular Size], proceed to step 10.
If you select [Custom Size], proceed to step 11.
395
7. Facsimile Features
10. Select the size you want to program from the sizes shown.
After selecting the size, proceed to step 14.
11. Make sure that [Vertical] is selected.
12. Enter the vertical size of the paper using the number keys, and then press [ ].
Specify a vertical size from 140 mm (5.6 inches) to 900 mm (35.4 inches).
Each time you press [mm] or [inch], the units switch between “mm” and “inch”.
If you enter a length and change the units by pressing [mm] or [inch], it is converted automatically
(fractions are rounded off).
13. Enter the horizontal size of the paper using the number keys, and then press [ ].
Specify a horizontal size from 64 mm (2.6 inches) to 216 mm (8.5 inches).
396
Special Senders to Treat Differently
Each time you press [mm] or [inch], the units switch between “mm” and “inch”.
If you enter a length and change the units by pressing [mm] or [inch], it is converted automatically
(fractions are rounded off).
14. Press [OK].
15. Press [Exit].
16. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
Deleting a Special Sender
This section describes how to delete a Special Sender.
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [Reception Settings].
3. Press [Program Special Sender].
4. Press [Delete], and then select the Special Sender you want to delete.
5. Press [Delete].
To cancel deleting a special sender, press [Do not Delete]. The display returns to that of step 4.
6. Press [Exit].
7. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
397
7. Facsimile Features
Box Settings
This section describes Box Settings.
The following functions are for delivery and transfer of documents:
• Personal Box
• Information Box
• Transfer Box
SUB Code and SEP Code
SUB Code and SEP Code are IDs consisting of up to 20 digits, and can include numbers, [ ],
[ ], and spaces.
To use this function, you must program a box and SUB/SEP Code beforehand. The other party can
send documents to, and retrieve stored documents from, this box using the code.
• The combined total of items that can be stored using the Personal Box, Information Box, and
Transfer Box functions is 150.
• You cannot set the same Box code on two different boxes.
• Transmission or programming may not be allowed if there is not enough free memory left. The
amount of free memory left differs depending on the optional equipment installed.
Programming/Changing Personal Boxes
This section describes how to program Personal Boxes.
You can program the following items:
• Box Name (required)
Up to 20 characters long.
• SUB Code (required)
Up to 20 characters long and can be composed of digits [0]-[9], [ ], [ ], and spaces (the first
character cannot be a space).
• Password (optional)
Up to 20 characters long and can be composed of digits [0]-[9], [ ], [ ], and spaces (the first
character cannot be a space).
When programming a password, a mark is displayed before the Box name.
• Receiver (optional)
You can program one delivery destination for each Personal Box. Specify a delivery destination
programmed in Destination key.
398
Box Settings
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [General Settings].
3. Press [Box Setting].
4. Check that [Program / Change] is selected.
5. Select a box to program.
When programming a new box, press [Not Programmed].
To change a box already programmed, press it and proceed to step 8.
6. Press [Personal Box].
7. Enter a box name, and then press [OK].
8. Enter a SUB Code.
To change the SUB Code, press [Clear], and then try again. To change a Box name, press [Box
Name], and then repeat from step 7.
If you do not want to program a password, receiver, or security function, proceed to step 17.
9. Press [Password].
399
7. Facsimile Features
10. Enter a password, and then press [OK].
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] before pressing [OK], and then try again.
11. Re-enter the password, and then press [OK].
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] before pressing [OK], and then try again.
To change the password after pressing [OK], press [Password] and repeat steps 10 and 11, or
press [Cancel] and repeat from step 9.
12. Press [Receiver].
13. Select a destination using the destination list, and then press [OK].
Press the transmission type tab to switch the destination between fax number, Internet Fax
destination, e-mail address, and folder destination.
IP-Fax destination appears in the fax destination list.
14. Press [Security].
If not specifying the security function, proceed to step 17.
Security is set to use S/MIME authentication. For details about the security settings, consult your
administrator.
400
Box Settings
15. Select the security functions.
To specify encryption for documents for delivery, press [Encryption]. To use the encryption function,
the address must be stored in the Address Book and have the encryption option enabled. For
details about Encryption, consult your administrator.
To attach a signature to documents for delivery, press [Signature]. For details about Signature,
consult your administrator.
16. Press [OK].
17. Press [OK].
18. Press [Exit].
19. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
• When programming a password, a mark is displayed before the Box name.
• You can set the fax destination, IP-Fax destination, Internet Fax destination, e-mail destination, or
folder destination, as a transmission destination.
• If you have specified e-mail destination or folder destination for the transmission destination, you
can specify the file format used for delivery. See “Parameter Settings” (switch 21, bit 3).
• The Fax Header is not printed on delivered documents.
• If a document cannot be delivered, a Communication Failure Report is printed and the document is
saved as a Confidential Reception document.
• You can edit boxes in the same way you program them. However, boxes that are being used
cannot be edited.
• If a destination in the destination table is deleted after being registered, delivery is not performed
and the settings of the delivery destination are also deleted. Also, when a delivery destination is
changed, a document is sent to the changed destination. If there is no destination of the specified
type, you can set which destination to be used as an alternative destination. See “Parameter
Settings” (switch 32, bit 0).
• Select [Encrypt All] in the encryption settings and encrypted e-mail is sent regardless of the
encryption settings in [Security]. For details about encryption, consult your administrator.
401
7. Facsimile Features
• The electronic signature is limited in the following ways, depending on the S/MIME settings on
Web Image Monitor. For details about the electronic signature, consult your administrator.
• If [Set Individually] is set:
You can set [Signature] in [Security] and attach an electronic signature to e-mail for every
transmission.
• If [Do not Use Signatures] is set:
Even if you press [Security], [Signature] does not appear.
• If [Use Signatures] is set:
An electronic signature is attached when you send e-mail. The [Signature] setting in [Security]
cannot be cancelled.
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
Deleting Personal Boxes
This section describes how to delete Personal Boxes.
• If there are documents in the box, you cannot delete the box.
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [General Settings].
3. Press [Box Setting].
4. Press [Delete], and then select the box you want to delete.
402
Box Settings
5. If the password is programmed, enter a password using the number keys, and then press
[OK].
If you make a mistake, press [Clear], and then try again.
6. Press [Delete].
To cancel deleting a box, press [Do not Delete]. The display returns to that of step 4.
7. Press [Exit].
8. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
Programming/Changing Information Boxes
This section describes how to set up an Information Box.
You can store the following items:
• Box Name (required)
Up to 20 characters long.
• SEP Code (required)
Up to 20 characters long and can be composed of digits [0]-[9], [ ], [ ], and spaces (the first
character cannot be a space).
• Password (optional)
Up to 20 characters long and can be composed of digits [0]-[9], [ ], [ ], and spaces (the first
character cannot be a space).
When programming a password, a mark is displayed before the Box name.
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [General Settings].
3. Press [Box Setting].
4. Check that [Program / Change] is selected.
403
7. Facsimile Features
5. Select the box to program.
When programming a new box, press [Not Programmed].
To change a box already programmed, press it, and then proceed to step 8. If a password is
programmed, enter the password, press [OK], and then proceed to step 8.
6. Press [Information Box].
7. Enter a box name, and then press [OK].
8. Enter the SEP Code.
To change the SEP Code, press [Clear], and then try again. To change the box name, press [Box
Name], and then repeat the procedure from step 7.
9. Press [Password].
If you do not want to program a password, proceed to step 12.
404
Box Settings
10. Enter a password, and then press [OK].
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] before pressing [OK], and then try again.
11. Re-enter the password, and then press [OK].
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] before pressing [OK], and then try again.
To change the password after pressing [OK], press [Password] and repeat steps 10 and 11, or
press [Cancel] and repeat from step 9.
12. Press [OK].
13. Press [Exit].
14. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
• You can edit boxes in the same way you program them. However, boxes that are being used
cannot be edited.
Deleting Information Boxes
This section describes how to delete Information Boxes.
• If there are documents in the box, you cannot delete the box.
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [General Settings].
3. Press [Box Setting].
405
7. Facsimile Features
4. Press [Delete], and then select the box you want to delete.
5. If the password is programmed, enter a password using the number keys, and then press
[OK].
If you make a mistake, press [Clear], and then try again.
6. Press [Delete].
To cancel deleting a box, press [Do not Delete]. The display returns to that of step 4.
7. Press [Exit].
8. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
Programming/Changing Transfer Boxes
This section describes how to set up a Transfer Box.
This function turns the machine into a fax relay station. Documents sent with a SUB Code that matches
the SUB Code programmed as a Transfer Box are received, and then relayed to a programmed
receiver.
Since documents can be sent to multiple destinations in a single transfer request, you can economize on
call charges when sending to distant destinations.
406
Box Settings
This Machine (Transfer Station)
Requesting party
End Receiver
A
Transfer Box
Transfer
Request
End Receiver
B
End Receiver
C
Print
BZR049
Inform the Requesting Party of the SUB Code assigned to the Transfer Box. When they want to have a
document transferred by your machine, ask them to send the document using SUB Code Transmission
and specify this SUB Code. If a password has also been programmed, inform them of this too, and ask
them to enter it as the SID code.
You can store the following items:
• Box Name (required)
Up to 20 characters.
• SUB Code (required)
Up to 20 characters long and can be composed of digits [0]-[9], [ ], [ ], and spaces (the first
character cannot be a space).
• End Receiver (required)
You can store five End Receivers (destinations to which documents are forwarded) for each box.
Specify End Receivers using a single or group destination programmed in the destination list
beforehand.
• Password (optional)
Up to 20 characters long and can be composed of digits [0]-[9], [ ], [ ], and spaces (the first
character cannot be a space).
When programming a password, a mark is displayed in front of the Box name.
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [General Settings].
3. Press [Box Setting].
4. Check that [Program / Change] is selected.
407
7. Facsimile Features
5. Select the box to program.
When programming a new box, press [Not Programmed].
To change a box already programmed, press it, and then proceed to step 8.
6. Press [Transfer Box].
7. Enter a Box name, and then press [OK].
8. Enter a SUB Code.
To change the SUB Code, press [Clear], and then try again. To change Box name, press [Box
Name], and then repeat from step 7.
9. To program End Receivers, select a Receiving Station.
You can store five Receiving Stations.
10. Specify End Receivers with Destination keys, and then press [OK].
408
Box Settings
Press the transmission type tab to switch the destination between fax number, Internet Fax
destination, e-mail address, and folder destination.
IP-Fax destination appears in the fax destination list.
A reception station can also be registered as a group destination. In such a case, a maximum of
498 parties including End Receivers 1-5 can be specified in a group.
11. To program a password, press [Password].
If you do not want to program a password, proceed to step 14.
12. Enter a password, and then press [OK].
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] before pressing [OK], and then try again.
13. Re-enter the password, and then press [OK].
If you make a mistake, press [Clear] before pressing [OK], and then try again.
To change the password after pressing [OK], press [Password] and repeat steps 12 and 13, or
press [Cancel] and repeat from step 11.
14. Press [Security].
If not specifying the security function, proceed to step 17.
Security is set to use S/MIME authentication. For details about the security settings, consult your
administrator.
15. Select the security functions.
To specify encryption for documents for transfer to receiving station, press [Encryption]. To use the
encryption function, the address must be stored in the Address Book and have the encryption
option enabled. For details about Encryption, consult your administrator.
To attach a signature to documents for documents for transfer to receiving station, press
[Signature]. For details about Signature, consult your administrator.
16. Press [OK].
17. Press [OK].
18. Press [Exit].
19. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
409
7. Facsimile Features
• After documents are transferred, SUB Code Transfer Report is not sent back to the sender.
• You can set the fax destination, IP-Fax destination, Internet Fax destination, e-mail destination, or
folder destination, as a reception station.
• If you have specified e-mail destination or folder destination for the transmission destination, you
can specify the file format used for transferring to receiving station. See “Parameter Settings”
(switch 21, bit 3).
• After documents are transferred, they are deleted.
• When this function is enabled, the machine will print the documents it transfers and a SUB Code
Transfer Report each time it completes a transfer. You can disable printing of the report using User
Parameters. See “Parameter Settings” (switch 04, bit 1).
• You can edit boxes in the same way you program them.
• If you delete a destination specified as a reception destination using the destination list, the settings
of the reception destination are also deleted, so they must be registered again. When a destination
is changed, a document is transmitted to the new destination. If there is no destination of the
specified type, you can set which destination to be used as an alternative destination. See
“Parameter Settings” (switch 32, bit 0).
• Select [Encrypt All] in the encryption settings and encrypted e-mail is sent regardless of the
encryption settings in [Security]. For details about encryption, consult your administrator.
• The electronic signature is limited in the following ways, depending on the S/MIME settings on
Web Image Monitor. For details about the electronic signature, consult your administrator.
• If [Set Individually] is set:
You can set [Signature] in [Security] and attach an electronic signature to e-mail for every
transmission.
• If [Do not Use Signatures] is set:
Even if you press [Security], [Signature] does not appear.
• If [Use Signatures] is set:
An electronic signature is attached when you send e-mail. The [Signature] setting in [Security]
cannot be cancelled.
• page 375 "Parameter Settings"
Deleting Transfer Boxes
This section describes how to delete Transfer Boxes.
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
410
Box Settings
2. Press [General Settings].
3. Press [Box Setting].
4. Press [Delete], and then select the box you want to delete.
5. If the password is programmed, enter a password using the number keys, and then press
[OK].
If you make a mistake, press [Clear], and then try again.
6. Press [Delete].
To cancel deleting a Transfer Box, press [Do not Delete]. The display returns to that of step 4.
7. Press [Exit].
8. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
Printing the Box List
This section describes how to print the Box List.
Print a list showing the currently programmed Personal Boxes, Information Boxes, and Transfer Boxes.
1. Press [Facsimile Features].
2. Press [General Settings].
3. Press [Box Setting: Print List].
4. Press the [Start] key.
After printing the list, you can then start from step 3.
To cancel printing a list before pressing the [Start] key, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of
step 3.
To cancel printing a list after pressing the [Start] key, press [Stop Printing]. The display returns to
that of step 3.
5. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
411
7. Facsimile Features
412
8. Appendix
This section explains features and specifications of the facsimile function.
Checking the Memory Status
Use this function to display a summary of current memory usage.
On the standby display you can check the percentage of free memory space. Note that destinations are
stored in a separate memory location, not in free memory space.
In addition, in [System Status] you can check the number of “Transmission Standby File(s)”, “Memory
Lock File(s)”, and “RX Print Standby File(s)”. “Others” shows the total number of documents registered in
Information Box and received in Personal Box. See “Checking Machine Status and Settings”,
Troubleshooting.
If available memory falls below the specified minimum, a message reporting this will appear. Delete
stored files as required.
• If you set the “Reception File Setting” in the Facsimile Features menu to “Store”, you can check the
number of received documents using “RX Print Standby File(s)”.
413
8. Appendix
Registering Frequently Used Settings
If you regularly send documents to a particular destination or transmit using the same functions, you can
save repetitive number keys operations by registering this information in a Keystroke Program. Programs
can be recalled by just pressing a programmed key.
Registering and Changing Keystroke Programs
This section explains how to program a new Keystroke Program or overwrite an old one.
You can register the following items in Keystroke Programs:
• Memory Transmission/Immediate Transmission, transmission type, destinations (except for folder
destinations), Original Type, Resolution, Scan Size, Auto Density, Manual Density, Original
Orientation, Original Settings, Select Line, SUB/SID/SEP/PWD Code entry, Send Later,
Reception Notice, BCC Transmission, E-mail TX Results, Text, Standard Message, Label Insertion,
Closed Network, SUB Code Transmission, SEP Code Reception, Fax Header Print, TX Status
Report, Store File, File Type, Preview before transmission
• Program name
The following procedure explains using Send Later with the fax number “0123456789” as an example
of how to register a program.
1. Make sure that the machine is in facsimile mode and the standby display is shown.
If the standby display is not shown, press the [Facsimile] key.
2. Make the settings you want to register in the program.
The procedure for programming differs depending on the items you want to register.
Press the [Clear Modes] key to cancel programming.
Press the number keys [0], [1], [2], [3], [4], [5], [6], [7], [8], [9], and then continue doing the Send
Later setting until the standby display appears when you press [OK].
3. Press the [Program] key.
CCU003
414
Registering Frequently Used Settings
4. Press [Program].
When no programs are registered, proceed to step 5.
5. Select a program number in which “Not Programmed” is shown.
If you make a mistake, press [Cancel] and select a program number again.
When you change a Keystroke Program, press [Yes] after pressing the program number you want
to change. If you make a mistake, press [No] and try again.
6. Enter the program name, and then press [OK].
The standby display appears.
If the program name is already registered, the name is displayed. To change the program name,
press [ ], [ ], [Backspace], or [Delete All], and then try again.
You should register the program name.
To cancel a program, press [Cancel]. The display returns to that of step 5.
• Use the same procedure to register and change programs. In step 5, select the program number
you want to change.
• For details about text entry, see “Entering Text”, About This Machine.
• The method of registering or changing programs for the copy function is different from that of the
fax function.
• For the maximum values of the following items, see “Maximum Values”:
• Number of destinations you can register into a Keystroke Program
415
8. Appendix
• Number of Keystroke Programs you can register
• Number of characters you can enter for a program name
• page 427 "Maximum Values"
Changing a program name
This section explains how to change a program name.
1. Make sure that the machine is in facsimile mode and the standby display is shown.
If the standby display is not shown, press the [Facsimile] key.
2. Press the [Program] key.
CCU003
3. Press [Change Name].
416
Registering Frequently Used Settings
4. Select the program number of the name you want to change.
5. Enter a new program name, and then press [OK].
The standby display appears.
Press [Cancel] to cancel the change.
Deleting a Program
This section explains how to delete an unnecessary program.
1. Make sure that the machine is in facsimile mode and the standby display is shown.
If the standby display is not shown, press the [Facsimile] key.
2. Press the [Program] key.
CCU003
417
8. Appendix
3. Press [Delete].
4. Select the program number you want to delete.
5. Press [Yes].
The standby display appears.
Press [No] not to delete the program. The display returns to that of step 4.
Using a Program
This section explains how to recall and use a registered program.
1. Make sure that the machine is in facsimile mode and the standby display is shown.
If the standby display is not shown, press the [Facsimile] key.
2. Place the original.
418
Registering Frequently Used Settings
3. Press the [Program] key.
CCU003
4. Confirm that [Recall] is selected, and press the registered program number.
The standby display appears.
The programmed fax number appears and the registered settings are recalled.
5. Press the [Start] key.
The machine starts to scan the original.
Then, transmission starts with the recalled transmission settings.
• Using the program causes the previous settings to be cleared.
• If you have no programmed destinations or scan settings as programs, select the program number,
and then enter the fax number of the destination and select the scan settings you require.
419
8. Appendix
Optional Equipment
This section explains the functions of options.
Expansion Memory
This option provides more memory.
This allows you to send fax documents at high resolution (Super Fine). This also allows you to receive fax
documents at high resolution (Fine or Super Fine). If you require this option, consult your service
representative.
For details about the memory capacity of machines equipped with the optional expansion memory, see
“Maximum Values”.
• page 427 "Maximum Values"
420
Specifications
Specifications
Fax Transmission and Reception
Component
Specifications
Standard
G3
Resolution
G3:
8 × 3.85 lines/mm, 200 × 100 dpi (Standard character),
8 × 7.7 lines/mm, 200 × 200 dpi (Detail character),
8 × 15.4 lines/mm (Fine character: optional),
16 × 15.4 lines/mm, 400 × 400 dpi (Super Fine character:
optional)
Transmission time
G3: 3 seconds at 28,800 bps, Standard resolution
(JBIG transmission: 2 seconds)
Data compression method
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Maximum original size
Standard: A4 , 81/2 × 14
Custom: 210 × 1,200 mm, 81/2 × 47 inches
Maximum scanning size
210 × 1,200 mm, 81/2 × 47 inches
Print process
Printing on standard paper using a laser
Transmission speed
G3:
33,600 / 31,200 / 28,800 / 26,400 / 24,000 / 21,600 /
19,200 / 16,800 / 14,400 / 12,000 / 9,600 / 7,200 /
4,800 / 2,400 bps (auto shift down system)
Power Consumption
Component
Specifications
Immediate Transmission
Approx. 230 W
Memory Transmission
Approx. 220 W
Memory Reception
Approx. 220 W
Reception
Approx. 600 W
421
8. Appendix
IP-Fax Transmission and Reception
Component
Network
Specifications
Standard:
• Ethernet interface (100BASE-TX/10BASE-T)
Optional:
• Gigabit Ethernet interface (1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/
10BASE-T)
• IEEE 802.11a/b/g wireless LAN interface
Scan line density
8 × 3.85 lines/mm, 200 × 100 dpi (Standard character),
8 × 7.7 lines/mm, 200 × 200 dpi (Detail character),
8 × 15.4 lines/mm (Fine character: optional),
16 × 15.4 lines/mm, 400 × 400 dpi (Super Fine character:
optional)
Maximum original size
Standard: A4 , 81/2 × 14
Custom: 210 × 1,200 mm, 81/2 × 47 inches
Maximum scanning size
210 × 1,200 mm, 81/2 × 47 inches
Transmission protocol
Recommendation: T.38, TCP, UDP/IP communication, SIP (RFC
3261 compliant), H.323 v2
Compatible machines
IP-Fax compatible machines
IP-Fax transmission function
Specify an IP address and send faxes to an IP-Fax compatible
fax through a network.
Also capable of sending faxes to a G3 fax connected to a
telephone line via a VoIP gateway.
IP-Fax reception function
Receive faxes sent from an IP-Fax compatible fax through a
network.
Also capable of receiving faxes from a G3 fax connected to a
telephone line via a VoIP gateway.
422
Specifications
Internet Fax Transmission and Reception
Component
Network
Specifications
Standard:
• Ethernet interface (100BASE-TX/10BASE-T)
Optional:
• Gigabit Ethernet interface (1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/
10BASE-T)
• IEEE 802.11a/b/g wireless LAN interface
Transmit function
E-mail
Scan line density
200 × 100 dpi (Standard character), 200 × 200 dpi (Detail
character), 200 × 400 dpi (Fine character: optional)*1, 400 ×
400 dpi (Super Fine character: optional)*1
Original size : Scanning width A4
Communication Protocols
• Transmission
SMTP, TCP/IP
• Reception
POP3, SMTP, IMAP4, TCP/IP
E-mail format
Single/Multi-part, MIME Conversion
Attached file forms: TIFF-F (MH, MR*1, MMR*1 compression)
Authentication method
SMTP-AUTH, POP before SMTP, A-POP
Internet communication
Send and receive e-mail with a computer that has an e-mail
address.
Encryption method (for
forwarding)
S/MIME
Internet Fax send functions
Automatic conversion of sent documents to e-mail format and email transmission. Memory transmission only.
Internet Fax receive functions
Automatic detection and printing of appended TIFF-F (MH) files
and ASCII text. Memory reception only.
*1 Full mode
423
8. Appendix
E-mail Transmission and Reception, and Folder Transmission
Component
Network
Specifications
Standard:
• Ethernet interface (100BASE-TX/10BASE-T)
Optional:
• Gigabit Ethernet interface (1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/
10BASE-T)
• IEEE 802.11a/b/g wireless LAN interface
Scan line density
200 × 100 dpi (Standard character)*1, 200 × 200 dpi (Detail
character), 400 × 400 dpi (Super Fine character: optional)
Maximum original size
Standard: A4 , 81/2 × 14
Custom: 210 × 1,200 mm, 81/2 × 47 inches
Maximum scanning size
E-mail reception/transmission
protocols
210 × 1,200 mm, 81/2 × 47 inches
• Transmission
SMTP, TCP/IP
• Reception (Mail to Print)
POP3, SMTP, IMAP4, TCP/IP
Protocols for sending files to
folders
SMB, FTP, NCP, TCP/IP
E-mail formats
Single/Multi-part, MIME Conversion
File formats
• Transmission
TIFF (MH, MR, MMR compression), PDF
• Reception (Mail to Print)
JPEG (JFIF), PDF
424
Authentication methods
SMTP-AUTH, POP before SMTP, A-POP
Encryption method (for
forwarding)
S/MIME
E-mail sending functions
Automatically converts documents to e-mail format and sends
them as e-mail.
Specifications
Component
Specifications
E-mail receiving functions
Automatically detects and prints JPEG and PDF documents
attached to received e-mail.
Sending to folder functions
Sends scanned files over the network to shared folders, FTP
server folders, or NetWare folders.
*1 When you send document in TIFF format.
Specifications Required for the Internet Fax Destination Machines
This section explains the specifications required for the Internet Fax destination machine.
When communicating with full mode-compatible machines, you can take advantage of higher
specifications for coding, original size, and resolution. For details about the specifications available in
full mode, see “Internet Fax Transmission and Reception” in “Specifications”.
Component
Communication protocols
Specifications
• Transmission
SMTP
• Reception
POP3, SMTP, IMAP4
E-mail format
• Format
MIME, Base64
• Content-Type
Image/tiff
Multipart/mixed (text/plain, Image/tiff (attached file forms))
Data format
• Profile
TIFF Profile S
• Coding
MH
• Original size
A4
• Resolution (dpi)
200 × 100/200 × 200, 204 × 98/204 × 196
425
8. Appendix
• page 421 "Specifications"
426
Maximum Values
Maximum Values
The following list contains the maximum value for each item.
Item
Expansion
memory
(Optional)
Standard
Memory
4 MB
28 MB
Number of documents you can store in memory for Memory
Transmission
400
400
Number of pages you can store in memory (using A4
Standard <ITU-T 1 Chart>)
Approx. 320
Approx. 2,240
Number of destinations you can register in the destination list 2,000
2,000
Number of groups you can register
100
100
Number of destinations you can register in a group
500
500
Number of destinations you can specify per file
500
500
Number of destinations you can specify for all files
(including files in memory)
500
500
Number of destinations you can search at a time using
[Search Dest.]
100
100
Number of recent destinations the machine can store
10
10
Number of digits that can be included in a destination
128
128
Number of digits for a SEP/SUB/PWD/SID Code
20
20
Number of characters you can enter in the e-mail subject
line
128
128
Number of communication results you can check on this
machine
200
200
Number of communication results printed in the Journal
50
50
Number of special senders you can register
250
250
Number of LAN-Fax Driver transmission results you can
check using Web Image Monitor on a network computer
70
70
427
8. Appendix
Item
Standard
Number of documents sent from a LAN-Fax Driver that the
machine can retain as files to be sent
400
400
Number of destinations you can register into a Keystroke
Program
500
500
Number of Keystroke Programs you can register
100
100
Number of characters you can enter for a program name
20
20
Number of received documents you can store on the
machine's hard disk
400
400
Number of documents you can print at a time in [Print /
Delete Stored Reception File]
30
30
Number of documents you can delete at a time in [Print /
Delete Stored Reception File]
30
30
Number of stored documents you can specify at a time in
[Select Stored File]
30
30
Number of stored pages you can send in one operation in
[Select Stored File]
1,000
1,000
Number of stored documents you can print at a time using
[Print 1st Page]
30
30
Number of stored documents you can print at a time using
[Print File]
30
30
Number of documents you can store in the Document Server
using the facsimile function
3,000
3,000
Number of pages per document you can store in the
Document Server
1,000
1,000
Number of pages you can store in the Document Server (in
total - copy function, facsimile function, printer function, and
scanner function) (Using ITU-T 4 Chart)
Approx. 9,000
Approx. 9,000
Number of destinations you can register in the Address Book 2,000
of the LAN-Fax
428
Expansion
memory
(Optional)
2,000
Maximum Values
Item
Number of destinations you can specify at once using LANFax
Standard
500
Expansion
memory
(Optional)
500
• The maximum number of pages that can be stored or transmitted may decrease depending on the
contents of documents.
429
8. Appendix
Trademarks
Adobe, Acrobat, and Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows Server®, Windows Vista®, and Outlook® are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through X/
Open Company Limited.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
• The product names of Windows XP are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional Edition
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition
Microsoft® Windows® XP Media Center Edition
Microsoft® Windows® XP Tablet PC Edition
• The product names of Windows Vista are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 7 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Professional
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows Server 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Enterprise Edition
• The product names of Windows Server 2003 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 are as follows:
430
Trademarks
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Enterprise
431
8. Appendix
432
INDEX
180-degree rotation printing.............................214
1st Sheet.................................................................58
2 Sided Original....................................................58
2 Sided Print........................................................343
2 sided printing...........................................212, 312
2nd Sheet...............................................................58
Broadcasting sequence........................................33
Bypassing the SMTP server............................89, 96
C
B
Canceling a Memory Transmission...................151
Canceling a transmission....................................151
Canceling a transmission before the original is
scanned................................................................151
Canceling a transmission before the transmission
is started...............................................................154
Canceling a transmission of an Internet Fax..... 151
Canceling a transmission while the original is
being scanned.....................................................151
Canceling a transmission while the original is
being transmitted.................................................152
Canceling an Immediate Transmission..............151
Centre Mark................................................211, 343
Change / Stop Transmission File.......................158
Change File Name..............................................295
Change Name....................................................416
Change Password...............................................296
Change Title........................................................102
Change TX / Info...............................223, 236, 238
Change User Name............................................295
Changing a fax destination................................112
Changing a program name...............................416
Changing default settings...................................333
Changing Fax Information..................................373
Changing Keystroke Programs..........................414
Changing stored document information............293
Changing the default functions of the fax's initial
display..................................................................161
Changing the settings of files in memory...........223
Changing the SMTP server setting.....................232
Changing the transmission time.................228, 230
Changing the User Parameters..........................384
Check / Change Settings........158, 223, 225, 228,
Backup File TX Setting.........................................340
Basic transmission...............................................307
BCC Transmission................................................170
Before use............................................................300
Box Setting...........................................................336
Box Setting Print List.............................................337
Box Settings.........................................................398
Check / Stop Transmission File.................154, 223
Check Modes........................................................36
Checkered Mark........................................211, 343
Checking a transmission file...............................223
Checking files stored in memory........................238
Checking the content of a scanned original........63
Checking the memory status...............................413
A
About Data Security for Copying.........................23
Acceptable original sizes.....................................61
Accessing User Tools..........................................333
Add.........................................................................33
Add Destination...................................................225
Add User..............................................................329
Adding a destination...........................................225
Address Book..............................................301, 316
Adjust Sound Volume..........................................336
Adv.Features........................................................143
Advanced Features.............................................143
Advanced Search...............................................130
All.........................................................................250
Area........................................................................71
Area 1....................................................................71
Area 2....................................................................71
Attach a Cover Sheet..........................................312
Attaching a created cover sheet........................321
Authorized Reception.................................386, 390
Auto Density...........................................................73
Auto e-mail reception.........................................198
Auto fax reception power-up.............................210
Auto Reception....................................................196
Auto Run program...............................................301
Automatic Redial...................................................32
230, 232
433
Checking the reception result.............................248
Checking the result of the communication.........245
Checking the result of the Immediate Transmission.
..............................................................................246
Checking the storage result................................160
Checking the transmission result........................242
Checking transmission using LAN-Fax Driver...314
Clear Modes key..........................................18, 151
Clear/Stop key..........................................151, 152
Closed Network..................................................182
Closed Network Code...............................182, 194
Combine Two Originals.....................................215
Combined Auto and Manual Density..................73
Communicating indicator...................................152
Communication Failure Report...........................246
Communication Page Count..............................336
Communication Result Report............................245
Compatible machines.........................................425
Confidential File indicator..................................267
Confidential File Report......................................273
Confirming a transmission..................................158
Confirming by e-mail..........................................244
Confirming by report..................................243, 249
Confirming by report and e-mail.......................245
Confirming on display................................242, 248
Confirming received and stored documents....262,
263
Confirming the reservations for SEP Code
Reception.............................................................149
Confirming the result of a SEP Code Reception 150
Confirming the results of transfer........................205
Confirming transmission results by e-mail. 172, 314
Copy speed...........................................................14
Country Code (For Function Settings)................352
Creating a cover sheet........................................321
CSI - Own Fax Number.....................................194
D
Delete..................................................265, 278, 417
Delete File............................................................297
Delete Recent Destinations.................................337
Deleting a destination from a Broadcast...........223
Deleting a fax destination...................................114
Deleting a program............................................. 417
434
Deleting a scan size............................................369
Deleting a Special Sender..................................397
Deleting a stored document...............................297
Deleting Fax Information....................................374
Deleting fax information using a Web browser328
Deleting Information Box documents.................278
Deleting Information Boxes................................405
Deleting Personal Boxes.....................................402
Deleting received and stored documents. 262, 265
Deleting registered destinations.........................318
Deleting registered groups.................................320
Deleting Transfer Boxes......................................410
Delivering files received by fax..........................331
Density (contrast)...................................................73
Destination key...........................................101, 102
Detail......................................................................68
Detecting blank sheet............................................65
Display panel.........................................................16
Displaying confirmation of transmission..............36
Document Server.................................................313
Dual Access...........................................................32
E
E-mail......................................................................26
E-mail encryption............................................47, 50
E-mail functions and folder transmission..............42
E-mail Setting.......................................................352
E-mail text............................................................199
E-mail Transmission...............................................49
E-mail TX results...................................................314
E-mail TX Results................................140, 172, 244
Edit Cover Sheet..................................................321
Edit Dest.....................................................81, 86, 92
Editing Address Book..........................................316
Editing fax cover sheets......................................320
Editing registered destinations...........................317
Editing registered groups....................................319
Enable H.323......................................................349
Enable SIP............................................................349
Entering a destination directly............................310
Entering a pause....................................................79
Entering a tone.......................................................80
Entering an e-mail address............................86, 92
Entering an IP-Fax destination..............................81
Entering numbers using the number keys.............78
Expansion memory..............................................420
External telephone......................................138, 196
F
Facsimile key.................................................18, 196
Fax..........................................................................26
Fax Destination....................................................121
Fax Header Print.........................................186, 187
Fax via computer.................................................299
File List..................................................................289
File Name............................................................285
First Name...................................................186, 187
Folder.....................................................................26
Folder Setting.......................................................352
Folder Transfer Result Report..............................345
Folder Transmission...............................................53
Forwarding................................342, 355, 387, 391
Forwarding destination.......................................205
Forwarding Mark................................................358
Forwarding received documents.......................205
Full mode.......................................................46, 328
Functions not available by Internet Fax reception...
................................................................................46
Functions not available by Internet Fax
transmission............................................................45
Functions not available for e-mail transmission...50
Functions not available for folder transmission...53
Functions not available for IP-Fax transmission. .41
G
Gatekeeper (VoIP gatekeeper)............................40
Gateway (VoIP gateway).....................................40
General Settings..................................................335
H
H.323.....................................................................40
H.323 Settings....................................................349
Having incoming documents printed on paper
from the bypass tray............................................219
How to read this manual.......................................14
I
If there is no paper of the correct size...............217
Image Rotation....................................................215
Immediate Reception..........................................191
Immediate Transmission..................................25, 34
Immediate TX Result Report................................246
Important................................................................13
Information Box...................................................274
Initial display..........................................................18
Initial Settings.......................................................347
Installing individual applications........................302
Installing the LAN-Fax Driver for USB connection. .
..............................................................................305
International TX Mode........................................104
Internet Fax............................................................26
Internet Fax Setting..............................................348
Internet Fax Transmission......................................43
IP-Fax functions......................................................38
J
JBIG reception.....................................................210
JBIG transmission...................................................68
Journal................................................249, 254, 257
Journal by e-mail.................................................261
JPEG.....................................................................201
Just size printing................................................... 218
K
Keystroke Programs............................................414
L
Label Insertion.....................................................180
LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor.....................301, 320
LAN-Fax Driver...........................................299, 300
LAN-Fax operation messages............................324
LAN-Fax Result Report........................................315
Legal prohibition.................................................... 16
Louder..................................................................136
Lower....................................................................136
M
Machine types.......................................................14
Mail to Print..........................................................201
Making settings for the machine's configuration.....
..............................................................................306
Manage / Delete File................................293, 297
Managing
facsimile
functions
using
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.........................322
435
Manual Density.....................................................73
Manual Dial.........................................................138
Manual e-mail reception....................................199
Manual E-mail RX...............................................199
Manual Entry...........................81, 86, 92, 284, 289
Manual Reception............................................... 196
Manuals for this machine......................................10
Max. E-mail Size.................................................339
Maximum values.................................................427
MDN....................................................................168
Memory...............................................................413
Memory File Transfer.................................340, 353
Memory Lock..............................................387, 394
Memory Lock Reception.....................................345
Memory Reception..............................................192
Memory Storage Report.....................................160
Memory Transmission.....................................25, 28
Memory Transmission sequence..........................33
Menu Protect.......................................................351
Mixing scan settings for a multiple page original...
................................................................................75
Model-specific information...................................17
Multi-copy reception...........................................214
N
Name...................................................................118
Names..................................................................116
Names of major functions.....................................15
Notes on using Internet Fax..................................44
Notes on using IP-Fax...........................................40
Notice..................................................................... 13
O
On Hook..............................................................136
On Hook Dial......................................................136
On Hook Mode Release Time...........................337
Operation switch.................................................210
Option list...............................................................15
Option Setting.....................................................179
Optional equipment............................................420
Original + Stored File.........................................286
Original Feed Type.........................................57, 58
Original size....................................................55, 61
Original Type.........................................................66
436
P
Page separation and length reduction..............216
Paper size and scanned area..............................61
Paper Tray...................................................344, 388
Paper Tray per Sender.......................................394
Parallel Memory Transmission.......................25, 31
Parameter Setting................................................347
Parameter Setting Print List..................................347
Parameter Settings..............................................375
Password..............................................................285
Password (PWD).................................................149
Password (SID)...........................................146, 354
Pause......................................................................79
PDF..........................................................49, 53, 201
Personal Box...............................................203, 270
Photo.......................................................................66
Placing into the ADF..............................................55
Placing on the exposure glass..............................55
Placing originals....................................................55
Preventing transmission to the wrong destination....
..............................................................................105
Preview...............................................263, 291, 312
Preview before transmission.................................63
Prg. Dest......................................................115, 116
Print..............................................................236, 264
Print / Delete Stored Reception File.........264, 265
Print 1st Page.......................................................291
Print 2 Sided................................................387, 393
Print completion beep.........................................211
Print Fax Header.................................................311
Print File................................................................291
Print Journal.........................................................250
Print List.................................................................238
Print Memory Lock...............................................267
Print per File No..................................................251
Print per User.......................................................253
Print Personal Box File.........................................271
Print Reception Time............................................343
Print speed..............................................................14
Printing a file from memory.................................236
Printing a file received with Memory Lock........267
Printing a list of files in memory..........................238
Printing and saving..............................................315
Printing fax information using a Web browser. 327
Printing Information Box documents..................277
Printing on both sides..........................................212
Printing options....................................................211
Printing Personal Box documents.......................271
Printing received and stored documents...262, 264
Printing stored documents...................................291
Printing the Box List..............................................411
Printing the Journal..............................................250
Program...............................................................414
Program / Change / Delete Gateway.............350
Program / Change / Delete Scan Size...338, 368
Program / Change / Delete Standard Message...
..............................................................................340
Program as Defaults............................................161
Program Closed Network Code........................347
Program Dest.......................................................104
Program Fax Information....................................349
Program key........................................................414
Program Memory Lock ID..................................348
Program Special Sender....................................342
Program Special Sender Print List......................342
Programming a user name.................................284
Programming an End Receiver...........................356
Programming destination information from Web
browser................................................................328
Programming Initial Set Up of a Special Sender.....
..............................................................................394
Programming/Changing a scan size................368
Programming/Changing Information Boxes....403
Programming/Changing Personal Boxes.........398
Programming/Changing Special Senders.......388
Programming/Changing Transfer Boxes..........406
Properties.............................................................305
PWD Code..........................................................149
Q
Quick Operation Key (1-3)...............................335
Quitting the forwarding function........................358
Quitting user tools...............................................334
R
Re-entering a fax number to confirm destination....
..............................................................................105
Reading the display...............................................18
Reading the display panel and using keys..........18
Recall....................................................................418
Receive File indicator..........................................192
Received images.................................................199
Receiving documents according to parameterspecified settings.................................................194
Receiving documents unconditionally...............193
Receiving e-mail..................................................197
Receiving Internet Fax documents.....................198
Recent...................................................................104
Reception File Print Qty.......................................390
Reception File Print Quantity......................343, 386
Reception File Setting.................................342, 360
Reception File Status...........................................248
Reception functions.............................................203
Reception modes.................................................196
Reception Notice.................................................168
Reception notice message..................................168
Reception Report e-mail.....................................362
Reception SEP Code...........................................146
Reception Settings...............................................342
Reception time.....................................................212
Reg. No................................................................ 133
Registering a fax destination..............................109
Registering destinations in the Address Book. . .109
Registering destinations to the Address Book from
Prg. Dest...............................................................115
Registering entered destinations to the Address
Book.....................................................................116
Registering Fax Information.......................371, 372
Registering frequently used settings...................414
Registering Keystroke Programs........................414
Registering new destinations..............................316
Registering new groups......................................318
Regular...................................................................70
Report.....149, 150, 160, 205, 238, 245, 246, 254,
257, 273, 315
Resending a file...................................................240
Resolution...............................................................68
Returning the machine to the standby mode.......18
Routing e-mail received via SMTP.....................208
Routing received documents..............................203
Routing received documents with SUB Code...203
RTI - Own Name.................................................194
437
S
Saving as files......................................................313
Scan Settings.................................................66, 338
Scan Size...............................................................70
Scanning two-sided originals...............................58
Search by destination name...............................118
Search by e-mail destination..............................125
Search by fax number........................................121
Search by folder destination..............................127
Search by Internet Fax destination....................123
Search by IP-Fax destination..............................121
Search by registration number...........................133
Search criteria.....................................................130
Search Dest..........................................................118
Search Destination..............................................336
Search using Advanced Search........................130
Searching for a destination in the Address Book....
..............................................................................118
Searching through an LDAP server....................118
Second Name............................................186, 187
Select Dial / Push Phone....................................348
Select Stored File...............................286, 291, 293
Selecting a line port or protocol........................354
Selecting destinations from Recent Destinations......
..............................................................................104
Selecting the file format.........................................76
Selecting type of transmission..............................26
Send & Store.......................................................282
Send Later...................................................163, 166
Send Settings.......................................................339
Sender Name......................................................140
Sender settings....................................................140
Sending a stored file...........................................281
Sending an e-mail.................................................92
Sending at a specific time..........................163, 166
Sending at specific time......................................311
Sending by Internet Fax........................................86
Sending by IP-Fax.................................................81
Sending fax documents from computers...........299
Sending originals using the exposure glass..31, 35
Sending over a fax line.........................................78
Sending stored documents.................................286
Sending to an e-mail address..............................86
438
Sending to folder destinations..............................98
SEP Code....................................................146, 184
SEP Code Reception..................................146, 184
SEP Code RX Reserve Report.............................149
SEP Code RX Result Report.................................150
Setting a password.............................................354
Setting a SUB Code............................................354
Setting an Internet Fax/e-mail destination as a
BCC......................................................................170
Setting LAN-Fax Driver properties.....................305
Setting print properties........................................306
Setting priority trays............................................218
Setting the Original Orientation...........................57
SID Code.............................................................146
Simplified Display..................................................21
SIP...........................................................................40
SIP server................................................................40
SIP Settings..........................................................349
SMTP..............................................................89, 232
SMTP Reception File Delivery Settings..............365
SMTP reception using Internet Fax....................207
SMTP RX File Delivery Settings...........................343
Special Senders to Treat Differently..................385
Specifications......................................................421
Specify Tray for Lines..........................................344
Specifying a destination........................................78
Specifying a destination using a destination list......
..............................................................................308
Specifying a destination using Address Book...309
Specifying a host name.........................................84
Specifying a SIP user name..................................84
Specifying an alias telephone number................84
Specifying an IP address......................................81
Specifying auto-generated subjects for e-mail. 176
Specifying documents by File Name.................290
Specifying documents by User Name...............289
Specifying documents from File List...................289
Specifying fax auto deletion or reception stop in
the event of storage failure.................................361
Specifying group destinations............................102
Specifying options...............................................311
Specifying tray for lines......................................221
Stamp Sender Name..........................................140
Standard................................................................68
Standard Message Stamp..................................179
Stop Transmission.......................................152, 154
Store / Delete / Print Information Box File......275,
277, 278
Store File..............................................................282
Store Only............................................................282
Stored file + Original..........................................286
Stored Reception File User Setting............343, 363
Storing a document....................................281, 282
Storing documents in Information Boxes...........275
SUB Code.........................143, 183, 203, 204, 270
SUB Code Transfer Report.................................205
SUB Code Transmission.............................143, 183
Subject.................................................................174
Substitute Reception............................................192
Super Fine..............................................................68
Switch Reception Mode.....................................342
Switch RX Mode..................................................196
Switch Title...........................................................336
Switching between Memory and Immediate
Transmission...........................................................25
Switching the type of title in the Address Book. 102
Symbols..................................................................14
System Status.......................................................413
T
T.37 full mode...............................................46, 328
Terminology...........................................................40
Text.................................................................66, 177
Text / Line Art........................................................66
Text / Photo...........................................................66
TIFF-F format..........................................................43
Title 1....................................................................102
Title 2....................................................................102
Title 3....................................................................102
Title word key.........................................................18
To add new receiver...........................................329
To edit machine properties already programmed. .
..............................................................................329
Tone........................................................................80
Top to Bottom.........................................................58
Top to Top..............................................................58
Trademarks..........................................................430
Transfer Box.........................................................204
Transferring received documents.......................204
Transmission....................................................28, 34
Transmission File Status.......................................242
Transmission modes...............................................25
Transmission SUB Code.............................143, 354
Transmit Failed File..............................................240
Transmit Stored File only.....................................286
Transmitting Journal by e-mail............................260
Tray Shift..............................................................221
TSI - Transmitting Subscriber Identification.......217
TSI Print (Transmitting Subscriber Identification
Print).....................................................................217
Two-sided printing..............................................212
TX File List.............................................................238
TX Mode..........163, 166, 168, 170, 172, 174, 177
Types of reception...............................................191
U
User Name..........................................................284
User Parameter List..............................................375
User Text..............................................................174
Using a program.................................................418
Using the Address Book to specify destinations......
..............................................................................101
Using the Document Server................................281
Using the machine's Address Book as the LANFax Destination List..............................................322
Using the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port..303
Using the software...............................................300
Using the Standard TCP/IP Port........................302
V
Viewing fax information using a Web browser 326
Viewing received fax documents using a Web
browser................................................................326
Vol........................................................................136
W
Web Image Monitor...........................................326
When placing an original into the ADF...............62
When placing an original on the exposure glass...
................................................................................62
Where incoming documents are delivered - output
tray.......................................................................221
439
MEMO
440
EN GB
EN US
EN AU
M381-7000A
© 2011-2014
Operating Instructions Facsimile Reference
M381-7000A
US
EN
Download PDF
Similar pages
FO-1550 - Lumen Tele
MPC (FC) Models Fax Quick Reference Guide
0491399001313146094.
2005 MDX Navigation Manual
2005 TSX Navigation Manual
2006 TL Navigation Manual
2006 TSX Navigation Manual
2005 RL Navigation Manual